--- /dev/null
+Staff Account Permissions
+=========================
+
+[[whats-new]]
+New in Evergreen Version 2.10
+-----------------------------
+
+[[new-features-video]]
+New Features on Video
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=bCyXo6vq2qs[*Sitka's Evergreen New
+Features in release 2.10 (5:55)*]
+
+[[new-features-circ]]
+Circulation
+~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+* Conditional Negative Balance: Libraries can now decide whether or not
+to use a negative balance to refund lost charges or overdue payments
+after a selected period of time. This is optional. Libraries need to set
+up the related settings to use this feature. See
+link:#conditional-negative-balances[Conditional Negative Balances] for
+details.
+* New reasons for billing/payment voiding/adjustment. Under some
+circumstances, Evergreen does not void bills but adds adjustment
+billing/payment to maintain/adjust the bill balance.
+* New function on Bills: Adjust to Zero, which sets the selected bill's
+balance to zero by adding billing or payment.
+* Restricted function on Bills: Void All/Selected Billings. This
+function is now available to Local System Administrators (LSA) only. Due
+to the new settings described above, there is now less need to void
+bills. LSA may grant the permission to selected staff accounts as
+required via the User Permission Editor.
+* Holds Count option in the Column Picker on some item display screens.
+You can choose to view number of holds that may be, but not necessarily,
+filled by the highlighted copy, or, for title level holds, the number of
+holds that may be filled by other copies, if available. Note that
+newly-added items and items in a non-holdable status will not display
+accurate hold counts until 24 hours after they have been added to the
+system or moved to a holdable status using Retarget Local Holds and
+Retarget All Statuses check in modifiers.
+* New images on Transit and Hold pop-ups: Farewell to Frog and Turtle.
+Welcome Truck and Bookshelf!
+* Duplicate patron check on Patron Registration screen now includes
+inactive patrons. To view inactive patrons, make sure Include Inactive
+Patrons? checkbox is selected on patron search screen.
+
+[[new-feature-selfcheck]]
+Evergreen Self Check
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+* The patron information area no longer displays unless a patron is
+logged in.
+* A pop up will appear on the Evergreen self check 20 seconds before
+logging out a patron due to inactivity.
+
+[[new-features-cat]]
+Cataloguing
+~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+* Quickly export non-imported records on MARC Batch Import/Export. This
+allows staff to download to a MARC file any records in their import
+queue that were not imported into the catalogue. Cataloguers can then
+work with the records using an external tool, then attempt to import
+them into Evergreen again.
+
+[[new-features-opac]]
+OPAC/Catalogue
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+* Exclude electronic results
++
+A new checkbox to exclude electronic resources from search results is
+now available on the advanced search screen and from the search results
+page.
+* Availability Details
++
+On the results screen the availability details now show X of X copies
+available rather than just a count of the currently available items.
+* Sort in Holds and Checkout screens in My Account
++
+Column sorting is now available in patron's Items Checked Out, Check Out
+History, and Holds screens in My Account.
+* Account Expiration Date in My Account
++
+The Account Expiration Date has been added to the Account Preferences
+page.
+* Check Out History - delete specific titles
++
+Patrons can now delete titles that they do not wish to appear in their
+Check Out History.
+* Warning when turning off check out and/or hold history
++
+When disabling checkout and/or holds history in the My Account's Search
+and History Preferences tab, patrons will be warned that existing data
+will be permanently deleted.
+
+[[new-features-server-administration]]
+Administration
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+* Library Settings:
++
+Negative Balance Interval (Default)
++
+Negative Balance Interval for Lost
++
+Negative Balance Interval for Overdues
++
+Prohibit negative balance on bills (Default)
++
+Prohibit negative balance on bills for lost materials
++
+Prohibit negative balance on bills for overdue materials
+* Email Courtesy Notice on Expiring Patron Accounts: Libraries may
+choose to send an email reminder when a patron account will become
+expired in a number of days. Contact Co-op support to set it up.
+* Welcome Email to Newly Registered Patrons: Libraries may choose to
+send an email to the patron when a new patron record is created. Contact
+Co-op support to set it up.
+
+[[new-features-report]]
+Reports
+~~~~~~~
+
+* Sortable columns in HTML output when results are under 10,000 rows.
+
+[[new-features-video-links]]
+Snippet and Training Videos
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+Links to the Sitka Snippet and training videos created by Support can
+now be found throughout the manual.
+
+Visit the https://www.youtube.com/channel/UCiMYBCQG4QJVT-B3Ruk0Ncg[BC
+Libraries Cooperative YouTube channel] for a complete list of our
+videos.
+
+Have a topic you'd like to see a video for? Email
+https://bc.libraries.coop/support/[Support] and let us know.
+
+________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Note*
+
+We continue to use videos created in previous versions of Evergreen that
+demonstrate functionality that has not changed.
+________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+[[new-behaviour]]
+New Behaviour in Evergreen 2.10
+-------------------------------
+
+[[conditional-negative-balances]]
+Conditional Negative Balances
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+https://goo.gl/ZjHvQV[*Sitka Snippet Video - Conditional Negative
+Balances (2:11)*]
+
+Through a series of link:admin-lsa-library-settings.xml[Library
+Settings], a site can prohibit negative balances on bills or can allow
+those negative balances to be applied for a specific period of time
+after a lost or overdue bill is charged to the patron. This is optional.
+Libraries need to set up the related settings to use this feature.
+
+link:#cnb-do-not-void[Libraries that *Do NOT Void* Lost Charges when an
+Item is returned should follow these instructions]
+
+link:#cnb-do-void[Libraries that *Do Void* Lost Charges when an Item is
+returned should follow these instructions]
+
+[[cnb-do-not-void]]
+Libraries that Do NOT Void Lost Charges when an Item is returned
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
+
+On returning/claiming returned a lost item, if a library does not want
+to void lost charges, set the following four settings to FALSE, and
+ignore other settings mentioned in the next section.
+
+[width="100%",cols="72%,28%",options="header",]
+|=========================================================
+|Setting |Value
+|Void lost item processing fee when claims returned |FALSE
+|Void processing fee on lost item return |FALSE
+|Void lost item billing when returned |FALSE
+|Void lost item billing when claims returned |FALSE
+|=========================================================
+
+[[cnb-do-void]]
+Libraries that Do Void Lost Charges when an Item is returned
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
+
+________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Note*
+
+Settings should be set following one of the four configuration options
+list below. Pick the applicable scenario based on your libraries
+policies regarding returned lost and paid items.
+________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+* link:#cnb-scenario3[ALWAYS Refund Lost Item Billing].
+* link:#cnb-scenario2[NEVER Refund Lost Item Billing]
+* link:#cnb-scenario4[ALWAYS accept lost Item return. Refund Lost Item
+Billing within Time Frame]
+* link:#cnb-scenario1[Accept Lost Item return within Time Frame. Refund
+Lost Item Billing within Time Frame]
+
+A library will take back a lost item if returned within a year and will
+always refund regardless the payment has been made.
+
+[width="100%",cols="72%,28%",options="header",]
+|============================================================
+|Setting |Value
+|Void lost max interval |1 year
+|Prohibit negative balance on bills for lost materials |FALSE
+|Negative Balance Interval for Lost |Do Not Set-up
+|============================================================
+
+A library will take back a lost item if returned within a year (since it
+became overdue) and never refund once the payment has been made.
+
+[width="100%",cols="72%,28%",options="header",]
+|===========================================================
+|Setting |Value
+|Void lost max interval |1 year
+|Prohibit negative balance on bills for lost materials |TRUE
+|Negative Balance Interval for Lost |Do Not Set-up
+|===========================================================
+
+A library will always take a lost item regardless when it is returned,
+but refund only within two months after the payment has been paid
+
+[width="100%",cols="72%,28%",options="header",]
+|===========================================================
+|Setting |Value
+|Void lost max interval |99 years
+|Prohibit negative balance on bills for lost materials |TRUE
+|Negative Balance Interval for Lost |2 months
+|===========================================================
+
+A library will take back a lost item if returned within a year (since it
+became overdue), and refund paid charges only when the item is returned
+within two months after the payment was made:
+
+[width="100%",cols="72%,28%",options="header",]
+|===========================================================
+|Setting |Value
+|Void lost max interval |1 year
+|Prohibit negative balance on bills for lost materials |TRUE
+|Negative Balance Interval for Lost |2 months
+|===========================================================
+
+_______________________________________________________
+*Note*
+
+Interval durations can be customized per library policy
+_______________________________________________________
+
+[[permissions_changes]]
+Changes to all Staff Permission Groups
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+To truly remove the ability to produce negative balances on a
+transaction, we have made the following changes to all staff permission
+groups.
+
+* VOID_BILLING : permission revoked from all staff, granted to Local
+System Administrator (LSA may grant to selected staff memebers, if
+needed)
+* ADJUST_BILLS : permission granted to all staff. This permission allows
+staff to use the new Adjust to Zero function to resolve bills.
+
+__________________________________________________________
+*Caution*
+
+Manual voiding will continue to produce negative balances.
+__________________________________________________________
+
+[[cnb-adjusttozero]]
+Adjust Bill Balance to Zero
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+https://goo.gl/Sa0iba[*Sitka Snippet Video - Adjust to Zero on Bills
+(1:45)*]
+
+An Adjust to Zero option has been added to the bills interface of the
+patron record. This option will always adjust the selected bill to a
+zero balance. It can also be used to easily clear a negative balance
+from the patron’s record.
+
+_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Tip*
+
+This feature is used instead of void a bill in almost all procedures.
+Local System Administrators are able to void bills on the rare occasions
+it is necessary.
+_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+Retrieve patron using F1 (retrieve patron by barcode) or F4 (patron
+search).
+
+Click on Bills button.
+
+screenshot of patron menu
+
+All bills under one transaction are grouped under one bill line. Select
+the bill line and click Actions for Selected Transactions > Adjust to
+Zero and click Yes when asked to confirm.
+
+screenshot of bills interface
+
+_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Tip*
+
+If partial bill should be cleared, staff may collect the partial payment
+first, then Adjust to Zero to resolve the bill. Ask a supervisor to help
+when partial bill should be cleared but no payment can be made.
+_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+[[revisions]]
+Revisions to Version 2.10 and Attributions to Contributors.
+-----------------------------------------------------------
+
+Version 2.10 of this manual was published May 24, 2016. Below are
+subsequent content changes in reverse chronological order. Minor changes
+including spelling corrections, formatting changes, and cosmetic
+screenshot updates are excluded.
+
+BC Libraries Cooperative acknowledges the Documentation Interest Group
+(DIG) Copyright © 2008-2015 GPLS and others, for their contribution to
+this manual.
+
+[width="100%",cols="20%,20%,60%",options="header",]
+|=====================================
+|Revision date |Editor(s) |Description
+| | |
+|=====================================
+
+[[resources]]
+Sitka and Evergreen Resources
+-----------------------------
+
+* The _Sitka Evergreen Policy Manual_ contains policy and best-practice
+documents supporting Sitka's consortial installation of the Evergreen
+ILS. See http://docs.sitka.bclibraries.ca/Policy/current/html/ for html
+and pdf versions.
+
+* The http://bc.libraries.coop//[BC Libraries Cooperative website]
+(http://bc.libraries.coop/) provides information about the
+implementation of Evergreen in BC and MB, including Evergreen staff
+client downloads, Sitka documentation, and Sitka policy and governance
+documents.
+* See the http://evergreen-ils.org/[Evergreen site]
+(http://evergreen-ils.org/) for information about Evergreen for all
+audiences, not specific to Sitka. Includes links to the Evergreen blog,
+the software development roadmap, and general documentation.
+
+* Join the https://bc.libraries.coop/groups/sitka/[Sitka Group] on the
+BC Libraries Cooperative website where current member libraries discuss
+Sitka's implementation of Evergreen.
++
+Any library specific questions including patron information should be
+directed to Co-op Support.
+* http://evergreen-ils.org/communicate/mailing-lists/: multiple lists
+for discussions of Evergreen. Messages sent to the General, Developer,
+and DIG Evergreen lists are searchable at
+http://georgialibraries.markmail.org/search/
+
+[[community-documentation]]
+Sitka Community Documentation
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+We encourage Sitka sites to share locally produced Evergreen
+documentation with the wider Sitka community. If you have any guides,
+tutorials, or tip sheets to share please contact Sitka support and we'll
+link to them in the table below.
+
+[width="100%",cols="24%,38%,38%",options="header",]
+|=======================================
+|Contributing Library |Description |Link
+| | |
+|=======================================
+
+[[support]]
+Sitka Evergreen Support
+-----------------------
+
+The Co-op Support team strives to respond to new requests within 24
+hours, excluding weekends. To manage requests (also referred to as
+__tickets__) the Support team uses ticket tracking software called
+Request Tracker (RT).
+
+[[support-contact]]
+How to Contact Support
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+There are four ways to contact Co-op Support for Evergreen support:
+
+1. *Request Tracker Interface.*
++
+Submit and track requests with link:#support-rt[RT Self Service]. After
+logging in you may use the form to create new tickets, track the
+progress of open tickets, or review issues that have been resolved.
+2. *Email.*
++
+Send questions to the support email address. Requests submitted by email
+generate RT tickets and can also be link:#support-rt-view[viewed online]
+by logging in to RT Self Service.
+3. *Online Contact Form.*
++
+Send questions to Co-op Support through the
+https://bc.libraries.coop/support/[contact form] on the BC Libraries
+Cooperative website. Requests submitted through the contact form
+generate RT tickets and can also be link:#support-rt-view[viewed online]
+by logging in to RT Self Service.
+4. *Phone.*
++
+Telephone support is available 9:00 AM to 4:00 PM Pacific Time, Monday
+to Friday, with emergency after hours support 7 days a week. Call our
+toll free number during regular hours to speak with support staff, or
+after hours to leave a message or request emergency server support. To
+protect our staff we do not accept anonymous calls so please ensure your
+caller ID is not blocked.
+
+The Co-op Support toll free number and email address can be found on the
+Splash page in the Sitka Evergreen Staff Client. The toll free number
+can also be found on the https://bc.libraries.coop/support/sitka/[Sitka
+Support] page. This information is also given to libraries during
+migration.
+
+You can check on the status of Co-op supported services at:
+http://status.libraries.coop/
+
+[[support-request-guidelines]]
+Guidelines for Support Requests
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+Thorough and consistent reporting makes it easier for Co-op Support to
+respond to your requests.
+
+* *Report problems as they occur.*
++
+Prompt reporting may help us catch a problem before it affects other
+patrons, respond quickly to issues that impact multiple libraries, or
+save you time if there is an easy solution. Please report issues as soon
+as is convenient.
+* *One issue per request..*
++
+Please submit one issue at a time. Emails generate tickets in RT which
+are assigned to support team members. Reporting each question separately
+helps us assign, classify, and prioritize tickets more efficiently.
+* *Contact information.*
++
+We strive to offer friendly, personalized service. Please include your
+name and use an email address where we can reach you directly.
+* *Descriptive subject.*
++
+To make tickets easier to identify in RT please provide as descriptive a
+subject as possible.
+** Example of a descriptive subject line: _Circ+Full Cat login unable to
+edit item record_
+** Example of a non-descriptive subject line: _Editing question_
+* *What, where, when, how?.*
++
+Be specific about what you were doing in Evergreen, what results you
+obtained versus what you expected, and the steps required to reproduce
+the problem. If you cannot reproduce the problem exactly please describe
+the circumstances in which it occurred and the symptoms observed,
+including relevant patron and item barcodes.
+* *Include error messages.*
++
+If the problem caused any OPAC or staff client error messages please
+copy and paste error text or attach screenshots when possible. See
+link:#rt-screenshots[simplesect_title] for guidelines.
+* *Include example barcods and IDs.*
++
+A problem in circulation? Make sure you include the patron and/or item
+barcodes that were in use when the problem occurred. Cataloguing issues?
+Make sure you include the item barcode and/or the record ISBN/ISSN or
+record ID where the problem occured.
+* *Trouble-shooting.*
++
+Spare yourself a boring or obvious email from the Support Team: tell us
+what steps you have already taken to try and resolve the problem.
+
+When submitting images to Co-op Support please follow the guidelines
+below:
+
+* *Save as a .jpg or .png.*
++
+The best file formats in which to save screenshots are .png and .jpg.
+These files are easily accessed by Sitka Support and are unlikely to
+contain viruses.
+* *Do not submit .doc or .docx unless absolutely necessary..*
++
+Files saved as .doc or.docx require additional software to open them and
+have a higher potential for carrying viruses.
+
+[[support-rt]]
+RT Self Service
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+Each library has a single account with which to access RT. Under this
+account staff are able to see all the tickets associated with their
+library. Not sure what the username and password are for your library's
+account? link:#support-contact[Contact Co-op Support] to find out.
+
+link:#support-rt-access[Access RT Self Service]
+
+link:#support-rt-create[Create New Tickets]
+
+link:#support-rt-view[View and Add to Existing Tickets]
+
+link:#support-rt-closed[Review Closed Tickets]
+
+link:#support-rt-status[Ticket Status]
+
+Co-op Support uses RT software to receive, discuss, and respond to
+questions from libraries in the BC Libraries Cooperative. Requests are
+numbered and referred to as __tickets__, and assigned to team members
+according to availability and expertise.
+
+Through the RT website
+https://support.libraries.coop/rt/[https://support. libraries.coop/rt/]
+
+The Self Service home page displays current tickets submitted by email
+or in RT.
+
+image:../media/1.png[image] Click the number or subject of any listed
+ticket to view past correspondence or add new information.
+
+image:../media/2.png[image] Status usually progresses from new to open
+to resolved as a ticket is addressed. See also
+link:#support-rt-status[Ticket Status].
+
+image:../media/3.png[image] Tickets are assigned to individual Co-op
+Support members depending on availability and expertise. A ticket may be
+owned by Nobody while the Support Team gathers more information about
+the problem.
+
+image:../media/4.png[image] Access any of your tickets by number with
+the Goto ticket field. Tickets submitted by other libraries are not
+visible.
+
+image:../media/5.png[image] When finished please Logout.
+
+Login to RT Self Service as shown link:#support-rt-access[above].
+
+Click New ticket.
+
+Complete the form and click Create ticket.
+
+image:../media/1.png[image] By default the Requestors field contains the
+email address associated with your RT login. Any replies to this ticket
+will also be sent to this address.
+
+image:../media/2.png[image] The Subject should be descriptive to make
+the ticket easier to identify, assign, and classify. This will also be
+the subject line for emailed replies.
+
+image:../media/3.png[image] Screenshots or other files that help
+describe the problem may be attached here.
+
+image:../media/4.png[image] For guidelines on the kind of information
+that may help the Sitka Team respond to your request please see
+link:#support-request-guidelines[section_title].
+
+Login to RT Self Service as shown link:#support-rt-access[above].
+
+Click a ticket number or subject to view details or reply.
+
+Additional information about the selected ticket appears, including when
+it was created and last updated. Also displayed is correspondence
+between the requestor and Co-op Support, either of whom may add to the
+ticket by clicking Reply.
+
+Enter your reply in the form and click Submit.
+
+The new message is added to the correspondence history.
+
+___________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Note*
+
+It is not possible to edit past correspondence. To make corrections
+please add a new reply.
+___________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+Resolved tickets do not appear on the RT Self Service welcome page but
+can be viewed and re-opened if a problem recurs.
+
+Login to RT Self Service as shown link:#support-rt-access[above].
+
+Click Closed tickets.
+
+Closed tickets are listed with status resolved. Click on a number or
+subject link to review a ticket.
+
+_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Tip*
+
+To re-open a closed ticket simply add a new reply. This will change the
+status to open and alert Co-op Support that more attention is required.
+_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+Ticket status provides general information about a support request and
+affects display in RT Self Service. Most status changes are made by
+Co-op Support but resolved tickets change back to open with any new
+correspondence.
+
+[width="100%",cols="25%,50%,25%",options="header",]
+|=======================================================================
+|Status |Description |Displayed with
+|*new* |Recent ticket, awaiting reply from Support Team. |Open Tickets
+
+|*open* |Support Team has replied but the issue is not yet resolved.
+|Open Tickets
+
+|*resolved* |Issue resolved, question answered, or a satisfactory
+work-around identified. |Closed Tickets
+
+|*stalled* |No immediate solution available but future development,
+configuration, or policy changes may provide a fix. |Open Tickets
+|=======================================================================
+
+[[start]]
+Getting Started
+---------------
+
+[[install_staff_client]]
+Installing the Evergreen Staff Client
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=CJb2ByBjfak[Using the the Staff Client
+Auto-Update (1:43)]
+
+On the login screen of the staff client click on Help > Check for
+upgrades.
+
+image:media/auto-update-1.png[screenshot of staff client login]
+
+A new screen will appear indicating that there is an update available.
+Click Update Evergreen.
+
+image:media/auto-update-2.png[screenshot of staff client login]
+
+Click Restart Evergreen
+
+image:media/auto-update-3.png[screenshot of staff client login]
+
+The partial update failing is normal. Click OK to download the complete
+update.
+
+image:media/auto-update-4.png[screenshot of staff client login]
+
+Click Restart Evergreen
+
+image:media/auto-update-3.png[screenshot of staff client login]
+
+Evergreen should restart and now indicate 200 : OK for both Status and
+Version.
+
+If auto-update does not work try downloading and installing a new staff
+client.
+
+image:media/auto-update-5.png[screenshot of staff client login]
+
+To use Evergreen you must first download and install the Evergreen 2.10
+staff client. The customized Sitka staff client is available for
+download from the BC Libraries Cooperative website here:
+http://bc.libraries.coop/support/staff-client-executables/
+
+Due to Sitka specific customizations on our servers the Evergreen
+Community 2.10 staff client will not work with the Sitka servers.
+
+For a video tutorial on downloading, installing, and registering the
+staff client see: https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=D6J4rkNt0Dg[Installing
+the Staff Client - 4:28]
+
+[[register_staff_client]]
+Registering a Workstation
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+Each Evergreen staff client must have a workstation registered with
+every server it is used with. The workstation identifies your physical
+computer location and may help Co-op Support when troubleshooting.
+
+Registration takes place when a staff client is installed for the very
+first time, when it connects to a new server, or if the hostname is
+changed.
+
+Open the Evergreen staff client
+
+From the Locale drop down menu select en-CA : English (Canada or fr-CA :
+French (Canada). This sets the language preferences for the staff
+client.
+
+Click Apply Locale.
+
+In the Server section, enter the hostname in the Hostname field.
+
+Click Re-Test Server. Status and Version should both display as 200 :
+OK.
+
+In the Authentication section, enter a Local System Administrator
+Username and Password into the appropriate fields.
+
+________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Note*
+
+Only a Local System Administrator account has the required permission to
+register a workstation.
+________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+Click Login.
+
+In the Workstation section, enter a name for your workstation in the WS
+Name field.
+
+__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Tip*
+
+Co-op Support recommends that a unique, meaningful name is used for each
+workstation, such as checkout or reference.
+
+Do not use slash ("/") or backslash ("\") in your workstation's name as
+it may interfere with offline transaction uploads.
+__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+Select the correct organizational unit from the Organization drop down
+menu.
+
+_____________________________________________________________________
+*Note*
+
+Multi-branch libraries need to ensure the correct branch is selected.
+_____________________________________________________________________
+
+Click Register.
+
+A pop-up will appear to indicate successful registration. Click OK.
+
+Re-enter the Local System Administrator account password or login using
+a different staff account.
+
+[[profile-manager]]
+Adding the Profile Manager
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+The profile manager makes it possible to create multiple profiles that
+can be used to login to Evergreen. To use the profile manager you will
+need to edit the desktop shortcut once the Evergreen staff client is
+installed.
+
+_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Note*
+
+The screenshots provided here are for the Windows version of the staff
+client but should be similar in the Linux staff client. The profile
+manager is not currently available for the Macintosh staff client.
+_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+Access Properties for the Evergreen staff client.
+
+Add "-P" or "-ProfileManager" to the desktop shortcut
+
+In Windows this is done by adding -profilemanager to the end of the
+Target field.
+
+profile manager
+
+Click OK.
+
+Click on the Evergreen staff client shortcut. The Profile Manager will
+appear.
+
+Click Create Profile.
+
+profile manager
+
+Click Next.
+
+profile manager
+
+Enter the new profile name and click Finish.
+
+The profile manager will not let you use the same name twice.
+
+profile manager
+
+Select the profile you wish to use and click Start Evergreen.
+
+profile manager
+
+[[login-staff-client]]
+Logging in to Evergreen
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+An account with library staff permissions is required to log in to the
+Evergreen staff client. Each staff member can have their own username
+and password, or generic logins can be used. For more information about
+staff profiles and permissions see link:#profiles[???].
+
+Open the Evergreen staff client.
+
+The hostname should display in the Server section. Status and Version
+should both display as 200 : OK.
+
+________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Note*
+
+If Status displays as There was an error testing this hostname. check
+that the hostname has been entered correctly and that your internet
+connection is working.
+
+If Version displays as 404 : Not Found check that your staff client
+version matches the version on server you are attempting to connect to.
+You can check the staff client version by clicking on Help and selecting
+About this client. The version appears as Target Server ID.
+________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+In the Authentication section, enter a library staff account Username
+and Password into the appropriate fields.
+
+Click Login.
+
+During a network outage staff can login to the Offline Module, also
+known as the Standalone Interface.
+
+See link:#offline[Offline Transactions] for instructions on using the
+Offline Module.
+
+Open the Evergreen staff client.
+
+Click Standalone Interface.
+
+The Evergreen Standalone Interface, also referred to as the Offline
+Module, will open.
+
+__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Caution*
+
+If your connection to Evergreen is lost during open hours, click
+Standalone Interface to continue with check out and patron registration
+functions until the connection is restored. When there are offline
+transactions to be uploaded in a workstation, Offline Transactions
+Pending will show up on top of Standalone Interface in red.
+__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Caution*
+
+For regular uploading and processing offline transactions, use Offline
+Transaction Management on the Admin menu. Export Transactions and Import
+Transactions on the login screen are used to copy offline transaction
+files out of or into a workstation. They are designed for extreme cases
+when a workstation will not be able to connect to the network anymore.
+____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+[[change-operator]]
+Change Operator
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+The login account of a workstation can be changed to another one without
+logging out first. Go to Admin > Change Operator:New in Evergreen main
+window.
+
+In the popup window, type in the new staff username and password. Read
+the instruction carefully and choose a New Login Type from the dropdown
+list. Click Authorization. The menu bar's background colour will be
+changed to red. screenshot of staff client login
+
+________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Caution*
+
+Temporary logins expire in a few minutes of inactivity. Choose it if you
+need the new account for some specific task, which can be finished very
+quickly. Remember to switch back to the old login once you finish it, or
+else staff may see the session expired prompt. The old session may NOT
+be restored if the timeout occurs at some screens. Log out and re-log in
+if it happens.
+________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+_________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Tip*
+
+Staff logins are the same as the old login, but you can switch back to
+the old login at any time.
+
+Permanent logins discard the old login and replace it. You can not
+switch back.
+_________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+To switch back to the old account, Go to Admin > Change Operator:
+NewUsername.
+
+[[navigate-eg]]
+Navigation
+~~~~~~~~~~
+
+Evergreen uses tabs to display functions. Tabs allow all software
+functionality to be open in one window. You can have multiple tabs open
+at once and you can have more than one tab of a single function open at
+the same time. You simply move through the tabs to perform your work.
+
+You can operate on Windows and Tabs using the dropdown menu under File .
+You can also use the plus sign beside the last tab title and the cross
+sign at the end of the tab title line to open a new or close the active
+tab. You can also use the following keyborard shortcuts/hotkeys, too.
+Some functions will automatically open records in new tabs.
+
+* +Ctrl+ +T+ new tab
+* +Ctrl+ +W+ close tab
+* +Ctrl+ +Shift+ +W+ close all tabs
+* +Ctrl+ +Tab+ tabs forward through open tabs
+* +Ctrl+ +Shift+ +Tab+ tabs backward through open tabs
+
+In the example below, the MARC Template tab is active. Click on any open
+tab to bring that screen to the front. You can also use +Ctrl+ +Tab+ to
+move to the required tab
+
+staff client tabs
+
+Now the Check Out tab is the active screen.
+
+staff client tabs
+
+Once you are in the selected tab, you can use the drop down menus or
+keyboard shortcuts to perform required functions. Menu functions and
+corresponding keyboard shortcuts will be demonstrated throughout this
+manual.
+
+Most menu items have keyboard shorcuts that can greatly increase
+efficiency. Below is a selected list of commonly used shortcut keys (AKA
+HotKeys). All or partial hotkeys can be turned off. See
+link:#intro-start-workstation-admin-select-hotkey[Workstation
+Administration section] for details.
+
+[width="100%",cols="25%,75%",options="header",]
+|==================================================
+|Key |Function
+|F1 |Checkout, or retrieve patron record by barcode
+|F2 |Checkin
+|F3 |Catalogue search
+|F4 |Patron search
+|F5 |Retrieve copy by barcode
+|F6 |Record in house use
+|F8 |Retrieve last patron
+|F9 |Re-print the last receipt
+| +Shift+ +F1+ |Register new patron
+| +Shift+ +F2+ |Capture holds
+| +Shift+ +F3+ |Retrieve record by TCN
+| +Shift+ +F8+ |Retrieve last patron
+| +Ctrl+ +T+ |Open new tab
+| +Ctrl+ +W+ |Close current tab
+| +Ctrl+ +Tab+ |Move forward through tabs
+| +Ctrl+ +Shift+ +Tab+ |Move back through tabs
+| +Ctrl+ +C+ |Copy
+| +Ctrl+ +V+ |Paste
+|==================================================
+
+Most staff client check-boxes are "sticky" -- if you select or deselect
+them, that status persists. For example, Auto-print, which will print
+the relevant receipts automatically in certain functions, is sticky. If
+you select it on one login, it will persist for future logins until you
+uncheck the box.
+
+staff client tabs
+
+Fast Item Add is another "sticky" check box that makes it possible to
+add volume and item records from the MARC editor.
+
+staff client tabs
+
+Double click a line on patron search result list opens the selected
+record in a new tab. Double click an item line on Holdings Maintenance
+opens the record with Copy Editor in a new tab.
+
+There are several methods of copying and pasting text in Evergreen,
+depending on where you are in the staff client and the type of
+information you are copying
+
+1. *Underlined blue text.*
++
+Clicking on any of the blue links in the Evergreen client copies the
+data to the computer clipboard (left and right click work the same way
+for these links). To paste into another location, use +Ctrl+ +V+ .
++
+copy/paste methods
+2. *Text displayed in tables.*
++
+To copy information from a staff client table, first select the desired
+row then right-click and choose Copy to Clipboard; alternatively select
+Actions for Selected Items > Copy to Clipboard.
++
+copy/paste methods
++
+image:media/intro-start-6b.png[copy/paste methods]
++
+Next click the desired information in the popup to copy it to the
+clipboard
++
+copy/paste methods
+3. *Text from catalogue search results.*
++
+There is no right-click menu for copying data from staff client search
+results. To copy the ISBN in the example below, highlight it and click
++Ctrl+ +C+ . To paste into another location use +Ctrl+ +V+ .
++
+copy/paste methods
+
+From many screens and lists, you can click on the _column picker_ icon
+to change which columns are displayed.
+
+screenshot of staff client column picker
+
+When data is displayed in columns, you can click and drag them, add new
+ones, or remove them. You can also sort data in a column by clicking on
+the column header. After customizing the display you may save your
+changes for future sessions under that login by right-clicking anywhere
+in the display area and choosing Save Columns from the drop-down menu.
+Some libraries use generic accounts and for those who do, staff need to
+be aware of the implications to other staff members of any changes made
+to the display.
+
+You can sort a list by ascending or descending order on any screen with
+grid display. Clicking the label of a column sorts display by the
+column. One more click reverses the order.
+
+You may sort by multiple columns. Click the column label of your first
+sorting column. Move the cursor to the second sorting column. Right
+click your mouse to choose an option from the list.
+
+sorting column
+
+You may sort by a third column by repeating the above step.
+
+[[intro_start_workstation_admin]]
+Workstation Administration
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+link:#intro-start-workstation-admin-copy-location-name-first[Copy
+Editor: Copy Location Name First]
+
+link:#intro-start-workstation-admin-font-sound[Font and Sound Settings]
+
+link:#intro-start-workstation-admin-select-hotkey[Select Hotkeys]
+
+link:#intro-start-workstation-admin-configure-printer[Configure
+Printers]
+
+link:#intro-start-workstation-admin-search-preference[Set Search
+Preferences]
+
+link:#intro-start-workstation-admin-button-bar[Button Bar/Toolbar]
+
+By default, when editing item records, library code is displayed in
+front of shelving location in Shelving Location field. You may reverse
+the order by going to Admin > Workstation Administration > Copy Editor:
+Copy Location Name First. Simply click it to make copy location name
+displayed first. The setting is saved on the workstation.
+
+You may change the size of displayed text or turn staff client sounds on
+and off. These settings are specific to each workstation and stored on
+local hard disk. They do not affect OPAC font sizes.
+
+Select Admin > Workstation Administration > Global Font and Sound
+Settings.
+
+To turn off the system sounds, like the noise that happens when a patron
+with a block is retrieved, check the disable sound box and click Save to
+Disk.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+To change the size of the font, pick the desired option and click Save
+to Disk.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+All or partial hotkeys can be turned on or off. It can be done for all
+workstations at a particular library (see
+link:#lsa-library-settings[Library Settings] for details) or for a
+particular workstation by going to Admin > Workstation Administration >
+Hotkeys > Current. Select from Default, Minimal, and None. hotkeys
+Default: inlcuding all hotkeys Minimal: including those hotkeys using
+CTRL key None: excluding all hotkeys Go back to the above menu. Click
+Set Workstation Default to Current. To clear the existing default click
+Clear Workstation Default.
+
+You can use the Toggle Hotkeys button, included in some toolbars, on top
+right corner, to switch your selected Hotkeys for the current login
+session on or off. It has the same effect as when you click Disable
+Hotkeys on the Hotkeys menu.
+
+Use the Printer Settings Editor to configure printer output for each
+workstation. If left unconfigured Evergreen will use the default printer
+set in the workstation's operating system (Windows, OSX, Ubuntu, etc).
+
+Evergreen printing works best if you are using recent, hardware-specific
+printer drivers.
+
+Select Admin > Workstation Administration > Printer Settings Editor.
+
+Select the Printer Context. At a minimum set the Default and Offline
+context on each Evergreen workstation. Repeat the procedure for other
+contexts if they differ from the default (e.g. if spine labels should
+output to a different printer).
+
+________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Note*
+
+If the Offline context is not set receipts will not print when using the
+Offline Module.
+________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+[width="100%",cols="25%,75%",options="header",]
+|=======================================================================
+|Printer Context |Description
+|Default |Default settings for staff client print functions (set for
+each workstation).
+
+|Receipt |Settings for printing receipts
+
+|Label |Printer settings for spine and pocket labels
+
+|Mail |Settings for printing mailed notices (not yet active)
+
+|Offline |Applies to all printing from the link:#offline[Offline
+Interface]
+|=======================================================================
+
+After choosing Printer Context click Set Default Printer and Print Test
+Page and follow the prompts. If successful, test output will print to
+your chosen printer.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+*Optional:* to further format or customize printed output click Page
+Settings and adjust settings. When finished click OK and print another
+test page to view changes.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+________________________________________________________________________________
+*Tip*
+
+Generally you need to set all the margins to 0 and headers and footers
+to Blank.
+________________________________________________________________________________
+
+$Id: 5a97668b87500e2230c191b7bfeb7cd81944fe26 $
+
+If you followed the steps above and still cannot print there are two
+alternate print strategies:
+
+* DOS LPTI Print (sends unformatted text directly to the parallel port)
+* Custom/External Print (configuration required)
+
+In most cases changing the Advanced Settings is a last resort if the
+Default print stragety (Mozilla Print) does not work. Please contact
+Sitka support if you need help with these settings.
+
+______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Note*
+
+Evergreen cannot print using the Windows Generic/Text Only driver. If
+this driver is the only one available try one of the alternate print
+strategies instead.
+______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+You may set up a default search library and preferred library for a
+workstation. These settings will override the same settings in the login
+account. You may also select a default search method for Advanced
+Search.
+
+Go to Admin > Workstation Administration > Set Search Preferences.
+
+Read the description carefully. Use the down-pointed arrow to list the
+options. Click your choice and Save.
+
+____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Tip*
+
+Search Library can be easily overridden on search screens by using the
+dropdown list in Search Library box. Preferred Library can only be
+chosen in either Workstation Administration or Account Preference.
+Settings in Workstation Administration take precedence.
+____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+[[lsa-receipt]]
+Configure Receipt Templates
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
+
+There are many default receipt templates included with the Evergreen
+staff client. These templates are saved on individual workstations.
+Customization can be done workstation by workstation or by exporting the
+templates to import to other workstations.
+
+The follwing example will walk you through how to customize the receipt
+that is printed on Checkout.
+
+Select Admin > Workstation Administration > Receipt Template Editor.
+
+Select the checkout template from the dropdown menu.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+This is what the default checkout template looks like. The template
+preview is on the left hand side. You can edit the Header, Line Item or
+Footer on the right hand side.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+In the upper right hand corner you can see the available macros by
+clicking on the Macros button. A macro prints a real value from the
+database. In this example, the macro %LIBRARY% prints “Prince Rupert
+Library”. The macros that are available vary slightly between types of
+receipt templates (i.e. bills, holds, items).
+
+________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Tip*
+
+Receipt templates are marked up with HTML tags. You may use most HTML
+tags. See http://www.w3schools.com/html/ for more information on HTML
+tags.
+
+You may insert a link to an image, e.g. your library's logo, that exists
+on the web. For example, to inlcude Sitka's logo, enter tag `<img
+ src=http://catalogue.bclibraries.ca//opac/skin/default/images/sitka.png>`.
+in the receipt template. The URL is where Sitka's logo is kept on the
+Web.
+
+There are several macros that can carry pre-built contents specific to
+individual libraries. The contents can be set up in local
+administration. For details see link:#lsa-library-settings[Library
+Settings]. Though text can be hard-coded in receipt templates, the
+pre-built contents will be automatically applied to receipts printed
+from all workstations without editing each template.
+
+* %INCLUDE(notice_text)%
+* %INCLUDE(alert_text)%
+* %INCLUDE(event_text)%
+* %INCLUDE(footer_text)%%
+* %INCLUDE(header_text)%
+________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+Below are some example edits:
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+The above is the default Line Item in Checkout template. The macro
+%barcode% prints the item barcodes of the books that were checked out.
+ The macro %due_date% prints the due date for each item that was checked
+out. You may add a line break between them: Barcode: %barcode% </br>
+Due: %due_date%
+
+The receipt preview will look like this:
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+__________________________________________________________
+*Note*
+
+The due date can only be printed in the YYYY-MM-DD format.
+__________________________________________________________
+
+This is what the default Footer looks like:
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+Remove the “You were helped by %STAFF_FIRSTNAME% <br/>”. As many
+libraries use a generic circulation login on the circulation desk, the
+“You were helped by…” note isn’t meaningful.
+
+Add “Renew your items online at http://terrace.catalogue.bclibrary.ca or
+phone the library at (250) 638-8177” to inform your patrons how to renew
+their items.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+Once you have the checkout template how you want it, click Save Locally
+to save the template to your computer.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+As you can only save a template on to the computer you are working on
+you will need to export the template if you have more than one computer
+that prints out receipts (e.g. more than one computers on the
+circulation desk, or another computer in the workroom that you use to
+checkin items or capture holds with).
+
+Click on Export.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+Select the location to save the template to, name the template, and
+click Save.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+Click OK to confirm.
+
+Send the exported templates file to the workstation to which you want to
+import the templates. You may do it using memory stick or email, etc.
+
+On Receipt Template Editor, Click Import.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+Navigate to and select the template file that you want to import. Click
+Open.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+Click OK to confirm on the prompt.
+
+Click Save Locally.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Caution*
+
+By default all libraries use shared and hard-coded templates for Hold
+Slip and Transit Slip. Libraries can switch to using their own templates
+by setting up a library setting: Use legacy hardcoded receipts/slips.
+Details see link:#lsa-library-settings[Library Settings].
+______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+There is an optional toolbar with buttons providing quick access to
+commonly used staff client functions. When activated the toolbar appears
+below the menu bar.
+
+staff client button bar
+
+The look of the buttons can be customized. Use Mode, Label Position and
+Icon Size on the Toolbar menu shown on the screen below to select your
+preference.
+
+A group of buttons can be selected or activated by default for all
+workstations at a particular library (see
+link:#lsa-library-settings[Library Settings] for details). A different
+default group can be set up on individual workstations by the following
+steps.
+
+Go to Admin > Workstation Administration > Toolbars > Current. staff
+client button bar
+
+Choose a group from the list.
+
+Go back to the above menu. Select Set Workstation Default to Current.
+The above selected toolbar group is set as default for this workstation.
+
+To clear an existing setting click Clear Workstation Default.
+
+Circulation and Cataloguing are the default toolbar groups. Local system
+administrators can create new groups for individual accounts,
+workstations or all in a particular library.
+
+Go to Admin > Workstation Administration > Toolbars > Configure
+Toolbars.
+
+Click New Toolbar staff client button bar
+
+In the prompt window type in a name for the new group, and then click
+OK.
+
+Choose the function buttons you want to add to the new group. Click
+-->(A) to add. You may select one in the Selected pane, and then click
+<--(R) to remove it.
+
+Check one of the radio buttons: Owning Org Unit, Owning Workstation, or
+Owning User to specify that the new group should be available to every
+workstation in your library, or this workstation, or yourself only.
+
+If you chose Owning Workstation in the above step, click the
+down-pointed arrow at the end of the Permission Context box to select
+your library in the organizational unit tree.
+
+Click Save Toolbar.
+
+The new toolbar group will be displayed together with Circulation and
+Cataloguing groups when you choose a toolbar group next time.
+
+[[patron]]
+Patron Records
+--------------
+
+https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=pY6AdD1OAmsU[*Sitka Training Video -
+Patron Record (5:12)*]
+
+[[searching-patrons]]
+Searching Patrons
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+There are two ways to retrieve patron records in Evergreen:
+
+* *Search > Search for Patrons (F4).*
++
+Search by patron name, email address, phone number, OPAC login,
+identification (primary and parent/guardian), etc. You can also filter
+by patron permission profile. Searches can be scoped to your library,
+federation, or to all of Sitka, but patrons from other Sitka libraries
+are only listed if they have used their card at your library and have
+agreed to share their personal information.
+* *Search > Search for patron by Barcode (F1).*
++
+This is the recommended method if you have the patron's barcode: it is
+faster and can retrieve accounts from any Sitka library. Patrons from
+other Sitka libraries visiting your library for the first time must
+consent to sharing their personal information before the account can be
+used.
+
+The following example demonstrates how to retrieve a patron account if
+you do not have the barcode.
+
+To find patrons, press F4 in an active tab or on the top menubar select
+Search > Search for Patrons, or simply click Patron Search button on the
+button bar. You must have the Circulation Toolbar activated for the
+Patron Search button to be present.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+Enter search criteria, such as last name, first name, phone number,
+etc., and select Filter by Permission Profile from drop down menu if
+desired, and click Search or press Enter on your keyboard.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+Search results will be listed on the right column of the screen. You can
+select a record to view record summary on the left (or top) of the
+screen. Double click on the selected patron, or click the Retrieve
+Patron button on the right top corner to load the patron record.
+
+image:media/patron-3.png[image,scaledwidth=100.0%]
+
+_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Tip*
+
+You can use only one search field or combine as many as all search
+fields.
+
+You can truncate search terms for more results.
+
+Selecting Include inactive patrons checkbox searches both active and
+inactive patrons. (Being active/inactive is controlled by the Active
+checkbox in the patron record).
+
+Patrons from other Sitka libraries (not a branch of your library system)
+have to present their Sitka library card for their first visit. Their
+records can only be found by Search > Search for patron by barcode F1.
+They need to give consent to your library to access their records. You
+will be prompted to "opt-in" the patron after scanning such a card.
+After opting-in, these patron records are searchable on the Patron
+Search F4 screen.
+
+opt-in confirmation pop-up
+
+The default search scope on Search > Search for patron by barcode F1 is
+the whole Sitka database. On Search > Search for patron F4 it is your
+library's patrons and the patrons who have opted in to your library. The
+_Limit results to patrons in_ function takes effect on your library's
+patrons and opted-in patrons only. Non-opted-in patrons are not
+searchable on F4, even by barcode.
+_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+[[patron-register]]
+Registering New Patrons
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=1V134gwe8LU[*Sitka Snippet Video -
+Patron Registration (4:13)*]
+
+Before registering a new patron, you need to do a thorough search to
+make sure he/she does not already have a record in Sitka Evergreen. It
+is good practice to ask the patron if they have a library card from
+another library in BC or MB and scan that card. Patrons may be unaware
+that they are part of a consortium and their current library card will
+work at your library. If modification is required, you should modify the
+existing patron's record instead of creating a new one. See Sitka policy
+about how to manage new and existing patron BC or MB library cards in
+Evergreen.
+
+__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Caution*
+
+Always use Search > Search for patron by Barcode for the thorough search
+if the patron has a library card. Using barcode as a search term on the
+patron search screen F4 is different from using Search > Search for
+patron by barcode F1. It does not search those patrons who have not
+opted-in to your library.
+__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+Press +Shift+ +F1+ or select Circulation > Register Patron or click
+Patron Registration button on circulation toolbar.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+Fill in required information. This screen can look different depending
+on your library's choices regarding required and suggested fields and
+whether or not you are displaying all fields, required fields, or
+suggested fields.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+When complete click Save at the right top corner of the screen.
+
+It is good practice to give patrons a piece of paper providing your
+OPAC’s URL, the patron's username, which by default is their barcode
+number, and the system generated password or the last four-digit of
+his/her phone number depending on your library's policy. Patrons can
+login to their account on the OPAC with their user name and password.
+They are encouraged to change their password. The new password must be
+in a format with more security features (at least 7-digit long combining
+numbers and letters). Both username and password are case-sensitive.
+Patrons can also change their username to something easier to remember
+(case-sensitive) in the My Account option in the OPAC.
+
+_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Tip*
+
+All fields with a yellow backgroud and exclamation mark are mandatory.
+
+Duplicate patron check now includes inactive patrons. To view inactive
+patrons, make sure Include Inactive Patrons?checkbox is selected on
+patron search screen
+
+Show Only Required Fields button limits the display to the above
+mandatory fields and fields with a default value. If your library policy
+specifies other required fields, this button will not retain them. You
+are recommended not to use this button when registering a patron.
+
+Blank mandatory fields and fields with a value in the wrong format may
+result in a "Form is invalid" error when saving the record.
+
+For libraries using phone number as patron's password, once the Day
+Phone field is filled, the last 4 digits of the phone number will be
+automatically copied over to password fields to replace the random
+number.
+
+Enter the patron’s middle name into the record if you can. This will
+help distinguish among patrons as the database grows.
+
+Juvenile flag: Each library can determine an age threshold of juvenile
+patrons. If the date of birth in a patron's record falls in the juvenile
+category, the Juvenile checkbox is automatically selected. If your
+library does not record patron's date of birth, you may manually select
+Juvenile checkbox. It is optional.
+
+Email Address: If required, mulitple email addresses can be put in,
+separated with comma or semicolon.
+
+OPAC/Staff Client Holds Alias is used to replace the patron's name on
+the hold slip.
+
+The Receive Overdue and Courtesy Emails checkbox allows patrons to
+opt-out of receiving courtesy and overdue email notifications. If this
+box is un-checked patrons will not be emailed courtesy and overdue
+notifications. Patrons are able to set this themselves as well through
+My Account.
+
+The Hold is behind Circ Desk checkbox is used to identify those patrons
+who request to pick up holds at the circulation desk when your library's
+holds are kept in a public area. It works together with the library
+setting: Hold: Behind Desk Pickup, which can be set up by local system
+administrators. See link:#lsa[???].
+
+If a valid postal code is given, the city, province and country
+information will be automatically retrieved.
+
+Based on your library's policy, patron address may not be mandatory. If
+you do not want to record the address, you need to delete the field by
+clicking the red cross sign beside Address. A Blank Address field will
+result in an error when attempting to save the record.
+
+The consortium decides the shared list of profile groups (patron
+profiles), but individual libraries can choose to use only a subset of
+the available options.
+
+There is no link between patron profile group and the Juvenile checkbox.
+If your library uses the Juvenile checkbox, you need to deselect it when
+moving a patron from the juvenile profile group to the adult profile
+group.
+
+There is a default Account expiration dateof 3 years for all profile
+groups except PL New User which has an expiration of 3 months. It shows
+up once a profile group is selected. You can always change it using the
+calendar widget or typing a date.
+
+If your library does not control Internet access via patron accounts,
+you need not change the default value in Internet Access Level.
+
+Always keep Is Group Lead Account unchecked.
+
+Statistical categories are usually used to further group patrons by
+categories not in the profile groups. Individual libraries can create
+their own patron statistical categories. There are also consortium-wide
+and federation-specific categories. See link:#lsa[???] for more
+information about creating statistical categories.
+
+Clicking the Save and Clone button will save the patron record and open
+a new patron record. Phone numbers from the previous record will be
+copied into the new record. Depending on your library's setting (See
+link:#lsa[???] addresses may be copied over from or linked to the
+previous record. If your library chooses to link the addresses, the
+addresses shown in the new record is greyed out and they can only be
+edited in the original record. However, the linked addresses can be
+replaced by new ones. Using the New Address button you can create a new
+address and mark it as both the Mailing and Billing address. Once the
+record is saved, the linked addresses will be replaced. The address'
+owning account can not be deleted or merged when other accounts are stil
+using the address. Records created by cloning are automatically grouped
+together.
+
+Staff accounts can be used as patron accounts, in terms of circulation.
+Only Local System Administrators can edit staff accounts.
+_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+[[patron-status-colour]]
+Account Status by Colour Code
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+Patron accounts are displayed with a coloured frame around the patron's
+name. The frame colour conveys information about the current status of
+the patron account. Patrons who have no outstanding fines, overdue
+items, or alert messages appear with a green frame:
+
+image:media/patron-record-status-1.png[image]
+
+Here are the possible background colours:
+
+1. image:media/patron-record-status-green.png[image] - everything in
+order (no overdues, no fines, not expired, etc.)
+2. image:media/patron-record-status-orange.png[image] - fines or
+overdue items, but not exceeding maximum limits
+3. image:media/patron-record-status-purple.png[image] - patron exceeds
+one or more of maximum fines, check out, or overdue limits defined in
+link:#lsa-group-penalty[Group Penalty Thresholds]
+4. image:media/patron-record-status-lightblue.png[image] - there is an
+link:#patron-alert[alert message under Message button] on the account
+5. image:media/patron-record-status-darkorange.png[image] - there are
+multiplelink:#patron-alert[alert messages under Message button] on the
+account
+6. image:media/patron-record-status-yellow.png[image] - there is an
+link:#patron-alert[alert in body of patron record] on the account
+7. image:media/patron-record-status-dark-grey.png[image] - account is
+inactive
+8. image:media/patron-record-status-light-grey.png[image] - account is
+expired
+9. image:media/patron-record-status-red.png[image] - patron is barred
+
+In the above list the colours with higher numbers take precedence. For
+example, a patron with a single overdue item would be orange, unless
+they also had an alert message which would make them yellow. A barred
+patron with overdue items and an expired account would be red.
+
+[[circ-update-patron-record]]
+Updating Patron Records
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+link:#circ-update-patron[Updating Patron Information]
+
+link:#circ-renew-card[Renewing Library Cards]
+
+link:#patron-lost-card[Marking Library Cards Lost]
+
+link:#resetting-patron-password[Resetting a Patron's Password]
+
+link:#circ-bar-patron[Barring a Patron]
+
+There are some tasks you need to do in your daily operation with the
+patron records, e.g. updating patron's contact information, renewing an
+expired library card, marking a library card lost, resetting patron's
+password, barring a patron, inserting a note or alert message, etc.
+
+[[circ-update-patron]]
+Updating Patron Information
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
+
+Retrieve a patron record. Here we use Search > Search for patron by
+barcode or F1.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+Scan the barcode, or type barcode and click Submit.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+Once the patron record is loaded, Check Out is the default screen. Your
+library may choose to display the Bills screen first if the patron has
+bills. See link:#lsa[???]. Click Edit to retrieve patron information.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+Edit required fields.
+
+Once editing is done, click the Save button at the right top corner.
+
+________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Caution*
+
+Required Survey questions, if any, need to be answered every time when
+saving the patron record.
+________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Tip*
+
+Patrons may edit their address on OPAC if your library allows it in the
+Library Settings Editor. Such addresses will be displayed on top of the
+existing address in patron record for staff to approve.
+
+To approve it, click Approve Address. It will replace the existing
+address.
+_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+[[circ-renew-card]]
+Renewing Library Cards
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
+
+Follow the steps above to retrieve the patron record and update the
+expiration date in the patron’s record. You can use the calendar widget,
+which shows up automatically once clicking in the field, or simply click
+the Update Expire Date button. Clicking the Update Expire Date button
+will re-calculate the user's expire date to 3 years from today's date.
+Once done, click Save button at the right top corner.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+[[patron-lost-card]]
+Marking Library Cards Lost
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
+
+Follow the steps above to retrieve the patron record. Click Replace
+Barcode beside Barcode.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+Scan or type a new barcode in the blank field.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+Save the changes by clicking Save button at the top right corner.
+
+______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Tip*
+
+If the username is still the original barcode, it should be replaced
+with the new barcode number.
+
+Once a library card is marked lost, Evergreen marks the card inactive
+and keeps it in the database.
+
+If the patron has lost a library card before, the See All button shows
+up beside the Replace Barcode. Click it. All barcodes that the patron
+has had are displayed in a pop-up window. Staff can now reactivate an
+inactive card, by de-selecting Active for current card, and selecting
+Active for card they wish to activate. Staff can also assign the active
+barcode as the primary card, and these two edits should be done in
+tandem; the Active card has to be the Primary Card. Click Apply, and
+Save.
+______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+[[resetting-patron-password]]
+Resetting a Patron's Password
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
+
+Follow the steps above to retrieve the patron record. Click Reset
+Password button or type in a new password in Password and Verify
+Password fields. Save the record.
+
+__________________________________________________________________________
+*Tip*
+
+Existing password is not displayed in patron records for security
+reasons.
+__________________________________________________________________________
+
+__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Caution*
+
+If your library uses the last 4 digits of phone number as the default
+password (Patron: Password from phone # is set to _True_ on
+link:#lsa-library-settings[Library Settings Editor]), please do not use
+Reset Password button. Instead type in the phone number, then save the
+record. Clicking the Reset Password button will generate a random
+number.
+__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Caution*
+
+You can only reset passwords for accounts with less permissions than
+your account. For example, if your account is PL Circ + Full Cat you can
+reset a password for PL Circulator but you cannot reset a password for
+PL Local System Administrator.
+___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+[[invalidate-email-phone]]
+Invalidate Email Address or Phone Number
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
+
+Invalidating patron emails ensures that Evergreen does not continue to
+attempt to send emails to an invalid email address. Accumulated bounced
+back emails may result in emails from Evergreen (such as overdue and
+pre-due notices) being blocked by some email service providers (Gmail,
+Hotmail, etc). This may affect all Sitka Evergreen users.
+
+Invalidating patron phone numbers ensures that staff do not continue to
+attempt to call patrons at numbers that are no longer in service or
+assigned to the patrons.
+
+______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Note*
+
+Libraries should regularly check the bounced-back emails and invalidate
+the email addresses accordingly to ensure smooth notification services
+from Evergreen.
+______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+Open the patron's record.
+
+Click Edit.
+
+Beside the patron's email address click the Invalidate button. (This
+button will only appear if the email field is filled.)
+
+The patron's email will be cleared from the email field
+
+Click Save.
+
+Click Refresh.
+
+The patron's account will have an alert regarding the invalid email.
+
+A message will also appear at the top of the patron's record saying
+Invalid Email. Clicking on this message will take you to the Messages
+screen.
+
+In the alert and on the Messages screen you can see the invalid email.
+This enables you to compare it with what the patron says their email
+should be. You can delete the the message when it is resolved.
+
+_________________________________________________________________________
+*Tip*
+
+The same procedure can be followed to invalidate a patron's phone
+number.
+_________________________________________________________________________
+
+[[patron-update-address]]
+Update Patron Address
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
+
+After retrieving the patron record, go to Edit tab. Scroll down to
+Address to edit it, then click Save.
+
+If you want to delete an address, you may click the red coloured cross,
+then save the record.
+
+If you want to add a new address, you may click the New Address button
+at the bottom of Address section. A new form is displayed for you to
+enter a new address. Select the Mailing or Billing radio button
+accordingly. Save the record.
+
+If the address is greyed out, which means the patron shares the address
+belonging to another patron, you need to edit the address in the address
+owner's account. Click the blue coloured link of the address owner's
+name. The address owner's account will be opened in a new tab. You may
+edit the address there.
+
+If the patron does not share the address anymore, you may add a new
+address and remove the link by the following procedure.
+
+Click New Address button.
+
+Type in the new address in the new address form.
+
+Select the Mailing and Billing radio buttons in the new Address. You
+will notice that the two radio buttons in the old address are
+automatically deselected.
+
+Save the record.
+
+____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Caution*
+
+Please do not click the red cross in the greyed out address. Attempting
+to delete the greyed out address will cause an error when saving the
+record.
+____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+[[circ-bar-patron]]
+Barring a Patron
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
+
+Follow the steps above to retrieve the patron record. Select Barred
+checkbox. It is good practice to put a note in the Alert Message field
+to explain why the patron is barred. Save the record.
+
+_________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Tip*
+
+ Barring a patron from one library bars that patron from all consortium
+member libraries.
+
+To unbar a patron, uncheck the Barred checkbox and remove the alert
+message.
+_________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+[[patron-alert]]
+Patron Alerts, Notes, Messages and Notifications
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+link:#alerts-patron-record[Alerts]
+
+link:#notes-patron-record[Notes]
+
+link:#messages-patron-record[Messages]
+
+link:#notifications-patron-record[Notifications]
+
+[[alerts-patron-record]]
+Alerts
+^^^^^^
+
+If a patron’s record has an alert, a red _Stop_ sign is displayed when
+the record is retrieved.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+There are three types of alerts in Evergreen: staff-generated,
+system-generated and standing penalties.
+
+Staff-generated alerts are created and should subsequently be removed
+manually by staff.
+
+To insert/remove an alert message, retrieve the patron record.
+Type/delete required message in the Alert Message field. Then save the
+record.
+
+System-generated alerts are automatically inserted on some conditions,
+such as the patron account is expired, patron has a ready-for-pickup
+hold, etc. Once the cause is resolved, e.g. patron's account has been
+renewed or patron has checked out the on-hold item, these messages will
+disappear automatically.
+
+Standing penalties are inserted when a patron's circulation condition
+meets certain criteria set up by your library, e.g. the maximum fine
+threshhold, the maximum number of items allowed to be checked out, or
+the maximum number of overdue items allowed. Standing penalties block
+some of the patron's circulation activities. For example, if a patron
+has a standing penalty of exceeding maximum number of overdue items, the
+patron can not check out more items before returning/renewing the
+overdue items. If a patron has an exceeding maximum fines penalty,
+he/she can not check out or renew any item before he/she clears the
+fines or lowers the amount to below the maximum fines threshold.
+Standing penalties automatically disappear once the cause is resolved.
+
+Standing penalties can be overriden on an item by item basis.
+Alternatively, you can remove the standing penalties temporarily to
+carry out the circulation actions that need to be overriden. If the
+conditions persist, once you refresh or re-access the patron record the
+penalties will be re-applied immediately.
+
+To remove standing penalties, go to Messages. Highlight the penalties.
+Click Actions for these penalties > Remove Penalty/Message.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+Besides the alert screen, alerts can be viewed by going to the dropdown
+menu Other > Display Alerts and Messages
+
+[[notes-patron-record]]
+Notes
+^^^^^
+
+If there is a note in a patron’s record, a See Notes message appears
+underneath the patron's name when the record is retrieved. Notes are
+strictly communicative and in the Evergreen Staff Client are only
+visible from within the Notes field. Notes can be made visible to the
+patron, via their account on the OPAC.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+To insert/remove a note, retrieve patron account and click Other >
+Notes.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+Click Add New Note.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+Enter note information and click Add Note. In this example, Patron
+Visible is selected. Click OK at confirmation prompt.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+To delete a note, go to Other > Notes, use the Delete This Note button
+under each note.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+[[messages-patron-record]]
+Messages
+^^^^^^^^
+
+Staff can also add Note, Alert and Block on Messages screen.
+
+Retrieve patron record. Click Messages.
+
+Click Apply Standing Penalty/Messages.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+In the pop-up window, select Note, Alert or Block. Then type the message
+in the box below.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+Click Apply button.
+
+To remove Note/Alert/Block, highlight it and click Actions for these
+Penalties/Messages > Remove Penalty/Message screenshot of staff client
+
+Note/Alert/Block can be modified or archived by using Modify
+Penalty/Message or Archive Penalty/Message on the above dropdown menu.
+
+An archived penalty/message can be retrieved in the Archived
+Penalties/Messages panel below.
+
+Specify the time frame then click Retrieve Archived Penalties.
+screenshot of staff client
+
+____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Tip*
+
+See Notes note in patron summary is not displayed for a note created on
+the Messages screen.
+
+Alerts and blocks created on the Messages screen are displayed on the
+Alert screen.
+
+Blocks created on the Messages screen blocks some circulation
+activities. Staff with appropriate permission may override it.
+
+System-generated standing penalties are displayed on the Messages
+screen.
+
+Based on your library's setting, staff initials may be required when
+creating a Note/Alert/Block. See link:#lsa[???]
+____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+[[notifications-patron-record]]
+Notifications
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^
+
+https://goo.gl/5Oo9n5[*Sitka Snippet Video - Triggered Events for
+Patrons (2:41)*]
+
+https://goo.gl/IJv1Yo[*Sitka Snippet Video - Triggered Events for Items
+(2:52)*]
+
+Evergreen may send email and SMS (text) messages to patrons via Action
+Triggers. Currently, Sitka Evergreen can email pre-due and overdue
+notices, and patron welcome and expiry notices, and can email or text
+hold-ready-for-pickup notices, depending on patron's choice. An event is
+created when circulation or hold records meet the conditions set up in
+the event definition. When the event is processed, a notice may be
+generated and passed to the email server to be delivered to patrons.
+Triggered events are viewable on the staff client via patron or item
+records. They may help libraries find out whether notices have been
+generated for a particular patron or item.
+
+To view triggered events for a patron.
+
+Find the patron record and go to Other > Triggered Events
+
+By default, events with complete status for pre-due and overdue notices
+are displayed.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+Use the filter on the right to view hold notification events. Click the
+arrow beside Circulation and choose Hold in the dropdown list. Click
+Apply.
+
+To view all events with any status, you may remove the Event State
+filter by clicking the red X beside it. screenshot of staff client
+
+You may add more filters by clicking Add Row.
+
+You may reset events with complete status to generate a new notice by
+selecting the checkbox in front of the events, then clicking Reset
+Selected Events.
+
+You may cancel events with pending status to stop the notice generation
+by selecting the events, then clicking Cancel Selected Events.
+
+____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Tip*
+
+Action Triggers are used for, but not limited to, pre-due, overdue and
+hold notification generation. You may see other triggered events in a
+patron or item record.
+
+Some triggered events do not generate notices, e.g. most events
+generated by marking-long-overdue-items-lost triggers do not generate
+notices.
+
+Complete status means that the event has been successfully processed.
+Usually this means the notice has been generated, unless the notice
+generation process encunters an error, which is very rare.
+
+Events with status of Invalid or Error encountered problems during the
+process. No notices were generated for such events.
+
+Pending and some statuses other than complete, error, or invalid may
+last for a short period of time while the event is being processed.
+____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+[[patron-merging]]
+Merging Patron Records
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=PmsYX-33lHw[*Sitka Snippet Video - Merge
+Patron Records (6:17)*]
+
+______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Tip*
+
+Patron accounts can only be merged together if both accounts have the
+same home library. Staff may need to update the home library in one of
+the accounts before performing the merge.
+______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+Go to the patron search screen by the dropdown menu Search > Search for
+Patrons.
+
+To load the two records on the same search results screen, search by the
+terms shared by the two records, such as names, phone numbers, etc. Hit
+Enter or click Search.
+
+Select the two records you want to merge by pressing down the CTRL key
+and clicking each record. Click Merge Patrons on the top right of the
+screen.
+
+Select the record you want to keep by checking the radio button Lead
+Record?# on top of the record. Click Merge button.
+
+____________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Caution*
+
+If you want to choose the barcode to keep, you need to choose the record
+with it as the lead record.
+____________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Tip*
+
+Once two records have been merged, the notes, bills, holds, and
+outstanding items under the non-lead record are brought to the lead
+record. Staff-inserted alert messages are not.
+
+Local System Administration permission is required to merge patron
+records. Sitka support recommends discarding the non-lead card and
+deleting it as described in link:#delete-patron-card[section_title] Your
+library can also choose to automatically delete inactive card by
+configuring the Library Setting Patron Merge Barcode Delete to True
+
+An inactive card will retrieve the active account when used on Check Out
+screen. The system alerts staff to the situation with an informative
+message.
+___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+[[circ-delete-patron]]
+Deleting Patron Records
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Tip*
+
+Sitka's in-house Patron Deletion Tool is available on the Welcome page.
+See link:#delete-patron[Patron Deletion Tool]. Local System
+Administrator's permissions are required to delete a patron record.
+_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+[[circulation]]
+Circulation
+-----------
+
+Besides the regular items in the catalogue, Sitka Evergreen can
+circulate pre-catalogued, and non-catalogued items, too.
+
+* Regular circulation: circulation of regular items in your catalogue
+with a barcode.
+
+* Pre-catalogued (aka _pre-cat_ ) circulation: circulation of items that
+have a barcode but have not been catalogued yet. You may check them out
+and send for cataloguing after they are returned. Many Sitka sites use
+this functionality to circulate interlibrary loan items from other
+libraries. There is no need to route to cataloguing when using pre-cat
+for ILL, you can simply ignore the alert.
+
+* Non-catalogued (aka __non-cat__) circulation: circulation of items
+that are not in your catalogue and without a barcode. These items are
+usually identified by categories, such as magazines, paperbacks, etc.
+
+[[circulation-check-out]]
+Check Out (F1)
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=2XdWZK12PD0[*Sitka Training Video -
+Check Out (2:04)*]
+
+link:#circ-checkout-regular[simplesect_title]
+
+link:#circ-checkout-precat[simplesect_title]
+
+link:#circ-checkout-non-cat[simplesect_title]
+
+link:#circ-checkout-due-dates[simplesect_title]
+
+To check out an item press F1 or select Circulation > Check Out Items.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+Scan or enter patron’s barcode and click Submit if entering barcode
+manually. If scanning, number is submitted automatically.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+Scan or enter item barcode manually, clicking Submit if needed.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+ Due date is now displayed.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+When all items are scanned, click Doneat bottom right of screen to
+generate slip receipt or to exit patron record if not printing slip
+receipts.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=GjJiRQeXIIk[*Sitka Snippet Video -
+Pre-catalogued Items Checkout (2:31)*]
+
+Go to patron's Check Out screen by Circulation > Check Out Items.
+
+ Scan the item barcode.
+
+ At prompt, click Pre-catalogued.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+Enter required information and click Checkout.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+_____________________________________________________________________________
+*Tip*
+
+On check-in, Evergreen will prompt staff to re-route the item to
+cataloguing.
+_____________________________________________________________________________
+
+You can use this function for items such as paperbacks or magazines that
+you may not care if the patron doesn't return. Items are checked out
+with a due date but when the due date expires, the items disappear from
+the patron's record and no fines accrue. Circulation statistics are
+collected.
+
+____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Tip*
+
+Non-cat circulation statistics are kept separately from regular and
+pre-cat circulation statistics. Use Sitka's non-cat circulation reports
+to generate the numbers.
+____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+Go to the patron's Check Out screen by selecting Circulation > Check Out
+Items.
+
+Click on the drop-down list in Barcode and choose the type of
+non-catalogued items.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+Enter the number of items being circulated and click OK.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+When items are checked out, due dates are automatically calculated and
+inserted into circulation records using the library's circulation
+policies. The Specific Due Date checkbox allows you to set a different
+due date to override the pre-set loan period.
+
+Before you scan the item, select the Specific Due Date checkbox. Use the
+calendar widget to select a date. Or click in day, month or year, then
+use the up or down arrows to make the change or simply delete the data,
+then enter again. Time is used for hourly loan only. This date applies
+to all items until you change the date, de-select Specific Due Date
+checkbox, or quit the patron record.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+[[circ-check-in]]
+Check In (F2)
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=-ZBhZuWSjjc[*Sitka Training Video -
+Check In (3:13)*]
+
+link:#circ-checkin-regular[Regular Check In]
+
+link:#circ-checkin-backdated[Backdated Check In]
+
+link:#circ-circulation-backdate-postcheckin[Backdate Post-Checkin]
+
+link:#circ-circulation-mark-item-missing-pieces[Mark Item as Missing
+Pieces]
+
+To check in an item, select Circulation > Check In Items, or press F2.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+Scan item barcode or enter manually and click Submit.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+This is useful for clearing a book drop.
+
+To change effective check-in date, select Circulation > Check In Items,
+or press F2. Use the calendar widget to choose the effective date.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+The top green bar changes to red. The new effective date is now
+displayed in the header.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+Move the cursor to the Barcode field. Scan the items. When finishing
+backdated check-in, change the Effective Date back to today's date.
+
+After an item has been checked in, you may use the Backdate Post-Checkin
+function to backdate the check-in date.
+
+Select the item on the Check In screen, click Actions for Selected Items
+> Backdate Post-Checkin.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+Use the calendar widget to select an effective check-in date. Click
+Apply. Overdue fines, if any, will be adjusted according to the new
+effective check-in date.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Tip*
+
+At the right bottom corner there is a Checkin Modifiers pop-up list. The
+options are:
+
+* Ignore Pre-cat Items: no prompt when checking in a pre-cat item. Item
+will be routed to Cataloguing with Cataloguing status.
+* Supress Holds and Transit: item will not be used to fill holds or sent
+in transit. Item has Reshelving status.
+* Amnesty Mode/Forgive Fines: overdue fines will be voided if already
+created or not be inserted if not yet created (e.g. hourly loans).
+* Auto-Print Hold and Transit Slips: slips will be automatically printed
+without prompt for confirmation.
+* Clear Holds Shelf. Checking in hold-shelf-expired items will clear the
+items from the hold shelf (holds to be cancelled).
+* Retarget Local Holds. When checking in in process items that are owned
+by the library, attempt to find a local hold to retarget. This is
+intended to help with proper targeting of newly-catalogued items.
+* Retarget All Statuses. Similar to Retarget Local Holds, this modifier
+will attempt to find a local hold to retarget, regardless of the status
+of the item being checked in. This modifier must be used in conjunction
+with the Retarget Local Holds modifier.
+* Capture Local Holds as Transits. With this checkin modifier, any local
+holds will be given an in transit status instead of on holds shelf. The
+intent is to stop the system from sending holds notifications before the
+item is ready to be placed on the holds shelf and item will have a
+status of in-transit until checked in again. If you wish to simply delay
+notification and allow time for staff to process item to holds shelf,
+you may wish to use the Hold Shelf Status Delay setting in Library
+Settings Editor instead. See Local Administration section for more
+information.
+* Manual Floating Active. This check in modifier works in conjunction
+with floating groups, as configured for your library by Sitka support.
+See link:#serveramdin-floating-group[Floating Groups.]
+
+These options may be selected simultaneously. The selected option is
+displayed in the header area.
+______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+If an item is returned with missing pieces, you may mark the item as
+missing pieces. You will be prompted to print a slip, which can be
+inserted in the item, insert a copy and a patron alert message into the
+respective records, and print a letter or note to inform the patron. The
+item's status is set to Damaged. When the missing pieces are returned,
+you need to check in the item, which sets the status to Reshelving. You
+also need to manually remove the patron and copy alert messages.
+
+Select the item on the Check In screen, click Actions for Selected Items
+> Marking Items as Missing Pieces. Click OK on the prompt. screenshot of
+staff client
+
+Choose the printer and click OK to print a slip to be inserted into the
+item.
+
+The Copy Editor will be opened. Fill in the alert message. Click Apply
+and then Modify Copies at the bottom screenshot of staff client
+
+The prompt for a patron alert or note shows up. Click Alert, if you wish
+to add an alert. Type in the content and your initial. Click Apply.
+screenshot of staff client
+
+Notepad will open for you to edit and print a letter/note for the
+patron.
+
+__________________________________________________________________________________
+*Caution*
+
+Windows Command Prompt window will open. It will be closed once Notepad
+is closed.
+__________________________________________________________________________________
+
+_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Tip*
+
+The item's status is set to Damaged once it is marked as missing pieces.
+The item remains in the patron's account.
+
+When the missing piece is returned, check in the item. You will be
+prompted of the item's status and the copy alert message. You need go to
+the patron and item record to remove the alert messages. screenshot of
+staff client
+
+Pre-catalogued items can not be marked as missing pieces.
+
+Currently you need to send In Transit items back to the owning library
+to mark it as missing pieces.
+_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+[[circ-renewal-edit-date]]
+Renewal and Editing the Item's Due Date
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+Checked-out items can be renewed if your library's policy allows it. The
+new due date is calculated from the renewal date. Existing loans can
+also be extended to a specific date by editing the due date or renewing
+with a specific due date.
+
+Retrieve the patron record and go to the Items Out screen.
+
+Select the item you want to renew. Click on Actions for Selected Items >
+Renew. If you want to renew all items in the account, click Renew All
+instead.
+
+If you want to specify the due date, click Renew with Specific Due Date,
+you will be prompted to select a due date. Once done, click Apply.
+
+__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Tip*
+
+Renewal can also be done on the Item Status screen. See
+link:#circulation-item-status[section_title] for more informaiton.
+__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+Retrieve the patron record and go to the Items Out screen.
+
+Select the item you want to renew. Click on Actions for Selected Items >
+Edit Due Date.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+Select a new due date in the pop-up window, then click Apply.
+
+_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Tip*
+
+You can select multiple items by pressing down the CTRL key on your
+keyboard and clicking each item you want to edit.
+
+Edit Due Date changes the due date in the existing circulation record
+without reducing the remaining renewal count or creating a new
+circulation record. It does not generate new circulation statistics.
+Outstanding issues on the circulation, such as overdue fines, may be
+affected by future actions, such as backdated checkin. Since one
+circulation may receive only one pre-due/overdue (for each overdue
+period) notice, no new notice(s) will be generated, if aleady sent out.
+For example, editing the due date on the day when an item is due will
+not generate a new pre-due notice near the new due date.
+_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Caution*
+
+Sitka support team strongly recommends libraries use this function only
+when staff forgot to set Specific Due Date on Checkout. Use Renew with
+Specific Due Date in other circumstances to avoid undesirable result.
+____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+[[circ-lost-claimed]]
+Marking Items Lost, Claimed Returned, and Claimed Never Checked Out
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+link:#circulation-lost-items[Lost Items]
+
+link:#circulation-claimed-returned-items[Claimed Returned Items]
+
+link:#circulation-claimed-never-checked-out[Claimed Never Checked Out]
+
+To mark items Lost, retrieve patron record and click Items Out.
+
+Select the item. Click on Actions for Selected Items > Mark Lost (by
+Patron).
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+By default, the lost item now displays in the Other/Special Circulations
+pane.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Tip*
+
+Marking an item Lost will automatically bill the patron the replacement
+cost of the item as recorded in the price field in the item record or
+the price limits set up by the library, and a processing fee as
+determined by your local policy. If the price field is blank, a default
+replacement cost as determined by the library is used. Based on the
+library's settings, if the price is 0.00, the replacement cost charge
+may be 0.00 or the default amount. If there is no default cost, you may
+manually add the replacement cost portion to the bill. See
+link:#bills-add-new-grocery-bills[section_title] for more information.
+
+If the lost item has overdue charges, based on your library’s settings,
+the overdue charges may be voided or retained.
+
+When a lost item is found and returned, your library may choose to:
+
+* Always void lost charges.
+* Void lost charges if the item is returned within a specified time
+period, e.g. within 6 months since the due date.
+* To generate or not to generate a refund if payment has been made.
+* To generate a refund only if the item is returned within a specified
+time period since the payment date.
+* Restore existing overdue fines.
+* Generate new overdue fines based on the checkin date.
+
+Only when all bills linked to this particular circulation have been
+resolved will a lost-then-returned item disappear from the Items Out
+screen. Bills include replacement charges, overdue charges, and manual
+charges added to the existing bills.
+
+The following are some common scenarios you may encounter:
+
+1. No payment has been made yet. When the item is returned, the lost
+bills are voided and there is no restored overdue charge. The bill and
+circulation record will be closed and the item will disappear from the
+Items Out screen.
+2. No payment has been made yet. When the item is returned, the lost
+bills are voided, but there are restored overdue charges. The overdue
+bill will be open. The item will be displayed on the Items Out screen
+due to the unpaid bill. The item will disappear once the overdue charges
+are cleared.
+3. The lost bills have been paid already. When the item is returned,
+the lost bills are voided and there is no overdue charge or the restored
+overdue charges are less than the replacement cost. There will be a
+negative balance in the bill. A refund (see
+link:#bills-refund[section_title] for more details) needs to be made to
+close the bill and the circulation record. Once the outstanding amount
+has been refunded, the bill and circulation record will be closed and
+the item will disappear from the Items Out screen.
+4. The lost bills have been paid already. When the item is returned,
+the lost bills should be voided and there is no overdue charge or the
+restored overdue charges are less than the replacement cost. But the
+library chooses not to generate refund (bills with negative balance) via
+library settings. Adjustment bills/payments will be automatically added
+to offset the negative balance. Item will not show up on Items Out
+screen.
+
+If your library chooses not to automatically void a lost item billing
+when it is returned, staff need to deal with the bills manually, as per
+your local policy.
+
+From version 2.6, libraries have the option to set up whether/where to
+display Lost items on Items Out screen.
+
+For all the above mentioned settings, See link:#lsa[???] for more
+information.
+_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+To mark an item Claimed Returned, retrieve patron record and go to the
+Items Out screen.
+
+Select the item, then Actions for Selected Items > Claimed Returned from
+the dropdown menu.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+Select a date and click Apply.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+The Claimed Returned item, by default, displays in the Other/Special
+Circulations pane.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Tip*
+
+The date entered for a Claimed Returned establishes the fine. If the
+date given is past, bills will be adjusted accordingly.
+
+When a Claimed Returned item is returned, if there is an outstanding
+bill associated with it, by default, the item will not disappear from
+the Items Outscreen. It will disappear when the outstanding bills are
+resolved.
+
+If a patron pays the fine, but staff don't find the item and check it
+in, there is a known bug in Evergreen that makes the Claimed Return item
+disappear from patron's account, which is not correct behaviour. Sitka
+support recommends the following workaround until bug is resolved
+programmatically. You may check the item in, and, if wanting to pursue
+with original patron, check it back out to that patron and mark it
+Claimed Returned. Alternatively, you can change the item's status to
+Missing, or simply delete the item, based on library policy and facts of
+the case. Please contact Sitka support if you encounter this scenario
+and are uncertain how best to proceed.
+
+When an item is marked Claimed Returned, the value in Claims-returned
+Count field in patron record is automatically increased. But it will not
+be adjusted when the item is found and checked in. You may manually edit
+it according to your local policy.
+
+When an item is marked Claimed Returned, the item's status is
+automatically set to the Sitka wide default status of Claimed Returned.
+
+From version 2.6, libraries have the option to set up whether/where to
+display ClaimedReturned items on Items Out screen.
+____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+To mark an item Claimed Never Checked Out, retrieve patron record and go
+to the Items Out screen.
+
+Select the item, then Actions for Selected Items > Mark Claimed Never
+Checked Out from the dropdown menu.
+
+_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Tip*
+
+Once an item is marked Claimed Never Checked Out, it disappears from the
+patron's account. The circulation record is marked checked in as on the
+checkout date.
+
+An item marked Claimed Never Checked Out has its status changed to
+Missing by a Sitka default.
+_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+[[circ-in-house]]
+In-house Use (F6)
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+You can record in-house use for both catalogued and non-catalogued
+items.
+
+To record in-house use, select Circulation > Record-In House Use or
+press F6.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+To record in-house use for catalogued items, enter number of uses, scan
+barcode or type barcode and click Submit.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+To record In-house Use of non-catalogued items, choose appropriate item
+from the dropdown menu in Barcode box and click Submit.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Tip*
+
+The statistics of in-house use are separated from circulation
+statistics. The in-house use count of catalogued items is not included
+in the items' total use count.
+___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+[[circulation-item-status]]
+Item Status (F5)
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Zy6UcenoLdU[*Sitka Training Video - Item
+Status (7:16)*]
+
+The Item Status screen is very useful. Many actions can be taken by
+either circulation staff or cataloguers on this screen. Here we will
+cover some circulation-related functions, namely checking item status,
+viewing past circulations, inserting item alert messages, marking items
+missing or damaged, etc.
+
+To check the status of an item, select Search > Search for copies by
+Barcode or Circulation > Show Item Status by Barcode , click on the Item
+Status button on circulation tool bar,or press F5. You can also click on
+barcode in copy summary view in catalogue to go directly to Item Status
+from the catalogue.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+Scan the barcode or type it and click Submit. The current status of the
+item is displayed with selected other fields. You can use the column
+picker to select more fields to view.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+Click the Alternate View button, and the item summary and circulation
+history will be displayed.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+Click List View to go back.
+
+___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Tip*
+
+If the item's status is "Available", the displayed due date refers to
+the previous circulation's due date.
+
+Upload From File allows you to load multiple items saved in a file on
+your local computer. The file contains a list of the barcodes in text
+format. To ensure smooth uploading and further processing on the items,
+it is recommended that the list contain no more than 100 items.
+___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Tip*
+
+Sitka has a pre-defined list of copy statuses available.
+link:#serveradmin-copy-statuses[Please
+consult]link:#serveradmin-copy-statuses[section_title] for the
+definition, as well as if the status makes the copy holdable or OPAC
+visible. Additional statuses will be added only after broader
+consultation with the Sitka community.
+________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+To view past circulations, retrieve the item on the Item Status screen
+as described above.
+
+Select Actions for Selected Items > Show Last Few Circulations.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+The item’s recent circulation history is displayed.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+To retrieve the patron(s) of the last circulations, click the Retrieve
+Last Patron or the Retrieve All These Patrons button at the bottom of
+the above screen. Patron record(s) will be displayed in new tab(s).
+
+_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Tip*
+
+Each libary can determine its own number of past circulations to be
+displayed. See link:#lsa[???] for more information.
+
+You can retrieve the past circulations on the patron's Items Out screen,
+too.
+_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+To mark items damaged or missing, retrieve the item on the Item Status
+screen.
+
+Select the item. Click on the Actions for Selected Items dropdown list
+and Mark Item Damaged or Mark Item Missing.
+
+_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Tip*
+
+Depending on the library's policy, when marking an item damaged, bills
+(cost and/or processing fee) may be inserted into the last borrower's
+account. Overdue fines, if any, may be voided at the same time. See
+link:#lsa[???] for more information.
+_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+Following the above procedure, you can check in and renew items by using
+the Check in Items and Renew Items on the dropdown menu.
+
+The Edit Item Attributes function on the Actions for Selected Items
+dropdown list allows you to edit item records. Here we will show you how
+to insert item alert messages by this function. See
+link:#cat[part_title] for more information on item editing.
+
+Retrieve record on Item Status screen.
+
+Once item is displayed, highlight it and select Actions for Selected
+Items > Edit Item Attributes.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+The item record is displayed in the Copy Editor.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+Click Alert Message in the Miscellaneous column. The background colour
+of the box changes. Type in the message then click Apply.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+Click Modify Copies, then confirm the action.
+
+[[circulation-barcode-completion]]
+Barcode Completion
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=anJA2K-Vgt0[*Sitka Snippet Video -
+Barcode Completion (1:35)*]
+
+Barcode completion is used to add prefixes, suffixes, and/or padding to
+a barcode when scanned. This is used when the physical barcode does not
+match the barcode saved in Evergreen. For example, all barcodes at a
+library may be prefixed in Evergreen with their Library and Archives
+Canada code MPL12345 but the physical barcode on the item is 12345. When
+barcode completion is in use Evergreen will add MPL to ever barcode
+scanned.
+
+Barcode completion is generally used in Sitka to handle duplicate item
+or patron barcodes.
+
+link:#barcode-completion-matches[Multiple Matches]
+
+link:#barcode-completion-patron[Patron Barcodes]
+
+link:#barcode-completion-item[Item Barcodes]
+
+When a barcode is entered if multiple matches are found a pop-up will
+appear listing the possible barcodes.
+
+Select the barcode/title or barcode/name combination that matches the
+item in your hand or the patron.
+
+screenshot of barcode completion pop-up
+
+_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Note*
+
+If the barcode is not a 14 digit codebar barcode you may wish to
+re-barcode the item or issue the patron a new library card to prevent
+future pop-ups caused by that barcode.
+_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+The barcode completion pop up will appear when a patron barcode is
+scanned in the following places:
+
+* the Barcode field in the Retrieve Patron Check Out interface (
+Circulation > Check Out Items)
+* the Barcode field in the Check Out section of the patron account.
++
+The library setting Load patron from Checkout must be set to True.
+* the Place hold for patron by barcode field in the staff client
+catalogue.
+
+_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Note*
+
+The Barcode Completion pop up will not appear when a patron barcode is
+scanned into the Barcode field in the Patron Search interface.
+_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+The barcode completion pop up will appear when an item barcode is
+scanned in the following places:
+
+* the Barcode field in the Check Out section of the patron account.
+* the Enter Barcode field in the Check In interface.
+* the Barcode field in the Item Status interface.
+
+[[bills]]
+Bills and Payments
+------------------
+
+[[bills-circ-grocery]]
+Circulation vs. Grocery Bills
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+There are two types of bills in Sitka Evergreen: Circulation bills and
+Grocery bills. Circulation bills are system-generated, including overdue
+fines, lost item cost and processing fees, etc. Overdue fines are added
+daily once an item is overdue. The fine rates are determined by each
+library. When an item is marked as lost, bills may be automatically
+generated to cover the item's cost (price in the item record) and the
+processing fee. Each library can determine its own processing fee. See
+link:#lsa[???] for more information.
+
+Grocery bills are manually created by staff. Grocery bill types can be
+shared by all Sitka libraries or created by an individual library.
+Default price can be attached to each bill type.
+
+[[bills-payments]]
+Making Payments
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+Bills can be paid by cash, check or credit in the patron account. Bills
+can also be resolved by forgiveness, work or goods, e.g. replacement
+copy. The following procedure shows how to collect payments.
+
+Retrieve patron and click on Bills button.
+
+________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Note*
+
+Based on your library's setting, Bills may be the default screen when
+retrieving a patron with bills. You can configure this screen by use of
+the Column Pickerto display required data, and by selecting List
+ActionsSave Column Configuration.
+________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+The bill screen opens.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+Select the payment type from the drop down menu.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+Enter the amount of payment in the Payment Received field and click
+Apply Payment.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+Change, if any, is displayed at the bottom of the screen as Change Due
+Upon Payment. It can be converted to patron credit by selecting the
+Convert to Patron Credit checkbox.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+When partial payment is made, the money applied starts at the top of
+the list of checked bills. Click the See Distribution button, and the
+payment distribution will be displayed in thePayment Pending column. To
+pay selected bill(s), uncheck the other bills. Note the presence of the
+Uncheck All and Check All options as shortcuts.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Tip*
+
+Items marked with red are still checked out. It is possible for a
+patron to pay a bill while the item is still out and accruing fines.
+
+You may choose to annotate the payment and fill in the resulting text
+box as required.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+Using the Receipt Options button at the right bottom corner, you may
+request Evergreen to print or not print receipts. You can also specify
+the number of copies of receipts.
+
+Void vs. Forgive: Void clears all history of the bill, while forgive
+retains the history. Use void when the bill should not be generated,
+e.g. a bill for a lost book that has been found. Forgive payments are
+displayed in the Cash Report.
+_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+[[bills-patron-credit]]
+Patron Credit
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=-l0RjDNIb7A[*Sitka Snippet Video -
+Patron Credit (2:47)*]
+
+A credit can be kept in a patron account and later used to pay bills.
+
+To create or add a credit, on the Bills screen, select the payment
+method, type in the amount, select Convert Change to Patron Credit box
+at the bottom, then click Apply Payment.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+Change from payment can also be converted to credit.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+To use patron credit to pay bills, select Patron Credit as the payment
+type.
+
+If your library chooses not to use Patron Credit, you may turn it off
+through a library setting. See link:#lsa[???] for more information.
+
+[[bills-adjusttozero]]
+Adjust Bill Balance to Zero
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+https://goo.gl/Sa0iba[*Sitka Snippet Video - Adjust to Zero on Bills
+(1:45)*]
+
+An Adjust to Zero option has been added to the bills interface of the
+patron record. This option will always adjust the selected bill to a
+zero balance. It can also be used to easily clear a negative balance
+from the patron’s record.
+
+_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Tip*
+
+This feature is used instead of void a bill in almost all procedures.
+Local System Administrators are able to void bills on the rare occasions
+it is necessary.
+_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+Retrieve patron using F1 (retrieve patron by barcode) or F4 (patron
+search).
+
+Click on Bills button.
+
+screenshot of patron menu
+
+All bills under one transaction are grouped under one bill line. Select
+the bill line and click Actions for Selected Transactions > Adjust to
+Zero and click Yes when asked to confirm.
+
+screenshot of bills interface
+
+_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Tip*
+
+If partial bill should be cleared, staff may collect the partial payment
+first, then Adjust to Zero to resolve the bill. Ask a supervisor to help
+when partial bill should be cleared but no payment can be made.
+_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+[[bills-void]]
+Voiding Bills
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+_____________________________________________________________________
+*Note*
+
+Only users with Local System Administrator permissions can Void Bills
+_____________________________________________________________________
+
+All bills under one transaction are grouped under one bill line. You can
+void the whole amount or partial amount only. To void the whole amount,
+select the bill line and click Actions for Selected Transactions > Void
+All Billings and click Yes when asked to confirm.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+To void a partial amount, select the bill, click Actions for Selected
+Transactions > Full Details. On bill details screen, select the bill you
+want to void, and click Void Selected Billings. Confirm your action.
+
+_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Tip*
+
+You cannot partially void one billing line on the bill details screen. A
+billing line is the minimum bill unit.
+
+Edit Note allows you to edit/create a note. For system-generated bills,
+we recommend you append your message.
+_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+[[bills-add-new-grocery-bills]]
+Adding New "Grocery" Bills
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+A grocery bill can be added as a new bill or to an existing bill.
+
+To add a grocery bill as a new bill:
+
+Retrieve the patron record and select Bills.
+
+Select Bill Patron.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+Grocery is the only available transaction type. Choose appropriate
+billing type from the drop down menu.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+Enter amount in Amount field and any required note in Note field. Click
+Submit this Bill, and then confirm it.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+___________________________________________
+*Note*
+
+Local bill types may have a pre-set amount.
+___________________________________________
+
+To add a grocery bill to an existing bill line:
+
+Retrieve the patron record and go to the Bills screen.
+
+Select the bill to which you want to add, and click Actions for Selected
+Transactions > Add Billing. Click Yes on the confirmation prompt.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+Follow steps 3 - 5 in link:#bills-add-new-grocery-bills[section_title]
+to select billing type, fill in amount and note, if required, then
+submit the bill.
+
+[[bills-history]]
+Bill History
+~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+To view a patron’s bill history, retrieve the patron record and go to
+the Bills screen, and then click History.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+On Bill History, you can view all bills or bills incurred in a specified
+time frame. You can use the calendar widgets to specify the Start Date
+and End Date, and then click Retrieve Transactions.
+
+ screenshot of staff client
+
+For more information about a particular bill, you can select the bill on
+the list and click Full Details at the bottom of the above screen and
+the bill details are displayed in a pop-up window.
+
+You may add a bill entry to an existing bill. Highlight the bill, then
+click Add Billing button at the bottom of the above screen.
+
+On the Bill History screen, you can also view payments by selecting the
+Payments tab. You can view all payments or payments made within a time
+frame.
+
+To view the details of a particular payment, highlight the line and
+click the Full Details button at the bottom.
+
+ screenshot of staff client
+
+___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Tip*
+
+Items can be deleted from the catalogue even if a charge for that item
+is still attached to the patron's record. The charge will remain on the
+patron's account after the deletion.
+___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+[[bills-refund]]
+Refund
+~~~~~~
+
+Sometimes paid bills need to be voided, such as when lost and paid items
+are returned. A negative balance may be created once such bills are
+voided. To close such bills, staff may refund the balance amount or add
+a bill entry.
+
+To refund, select the bill on the Bills screen. Click Actions for
+Selected Transactions > Refund.
+
+ screenshot of staff client
+
+Read the instructions and confirm.
+
+image:media/bills-20.png[screenshot of staff client]
+
+Select payment type and click Apply Payment.
+
+image:media/bills-21.png[screenshot of staff client]
+
+Refund can be converted to patron credit by selecting Patron Credit as
+payment type.
+
+_________________________________________
+*Tip*
+
+Refunds are reflected in the Cash Report.
+
+Non-cash payment can not be refunded.
+_________________________________________
+
+[[hold]]
+Holds
+-----
+
+[[hold-placing-holds]]
+Placing Holds
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+Holds can be placed by staff on the Staff Client and by patrons on the
+OPAC. In this chapter we demonstrate placing holds on the Staff Client.
+See link:#opac[part_title] for placing holds on the OPAC.
+
+Evergreen has four different levels of holds. Library staff can place
+holds at all four levels, while patrons can only place
+Meta-record,Title-level, and Volume-level holds.
+
+The chart below summarizes the four levels of holds.
+
+[cols=",,,,,",options="header",]
+|=======================================================================
+|Hold level |Abbreviation |When to use |How to use |Who can use |Hold
+tied to
+|Meta-record |M |Patron wants first available copy of multiple titles of
+the same/different format |Click on place hold to the right of the
+record. From holds confirmation screen, click Advanced hold options and
+select other applicable formats. |Patron or staff |Holdings attached to
+multiple MARC (title) records sharing the same title and author of
+selected format(s)(book, video, audiobook, etc.)
+
+|Title |T |Patron wants first available copy of a title |Staff or patron
+click on place hold to the right of a record on search result list or
+record summary screen. |Patron or staff |Holdings attached to a single
+MARC (title) record
+
+|Volume |V |Patrons want the first available copy of a specific volume
+(call number) of a title |Staff or patron click Volume in HOLDABLE?
+column on the holdings grid on record summary screen. |Patron or staff
+|Call number specific volume record (local call number resides in volume
+record)
+
+|Copy |C |Patron or staff want a specific copy of a title |Staff click
+details to view barcode then place hold next to that barcode. |Staff
+|Item barcode
+|=======================================================================
+
+To place a title level hold, retrieve the title record on the catalogue
+and click the Place Hold button to the right of the record on the search
+result list, or record summary screen.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+Scan or type patron’s barcode into Place hold for patron by barcode, and
+then tab or move the cursor out of the box.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+Edit patron hold notification methods and pickup location, if necessary,
+and click Submit.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+Click Continue, or Cancel if the hold failed, to go back to search
+result.
+
+__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Tip*
+
+In step 2, checking the Place this hold for me radio button will set the
+login staff as the hold requester. If this is your personal account, you
+can use this button to place holds for yourself.
+
+A default hold expiration date will be recorded if the libary has set up
+a default holds expiration period in their library settings. See
+link:#lsa[???]. Uncaptured holds will not be targeted after expiration
+date. To view and edit the expiration date, go to Holds under My
+Account.
+__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+There are two ways of placing meta-record holds:
+
+Using Advanced Holds Options button
+
+To place a Meta-record level hold, do a regular search for the title.
+Click Place Hold link on either the result list or record details
+screen, shown as step 1 in
+link:#hold-title-level-hold[simplesect_title].
+
+Click Advanced Holds Options under the title.
+
+Scan patron's barcode. Select the acceptable format(s) and language(s).
+Edit patron hold notification methods and/or pickup location, if
+required. Click Submit button.
+
+Using Group by Formats and Editions Search
+
+Search for the meta-record on which you want to place a hold. On the
+Advanced Search screen, select the Group by Formats and Editions
+checkbox. Select the search type and type in search terms. Click Search.
+
+Click Place Hold beside the the meta-record on the result list.
+
+________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Tip*
+
+The icons indicate the available formats at the search location.
+
+The number in the parenthsis beside the title indicates the number of
+records with physical items. Click the title to view these records.
+
+Meta-record holds do not cover E-resources. But E-resource icons may be
+displayed if the search location owns matched E-resources. The link(s)
+will show up only when the search location and/or the preferred library
+of the login account is a library or branch and owns the E-resource.
+Click the link(s) in the summary to access these E-resource records.
+________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+Type in or scan the patron barcode at the prompt.
+
+Select the acceptable formats. Use the CTRL key together with a mouse
+click to select multiple entries. Click Submit once done.
+
+_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Tip*
+
+If no format is selected. All available formats are targeting
+candadites.
+
+Format information is from the MARC record leader and fixed fields.
+Requested formats are listed in the Holdable Formats column in hold
+records. Use the Column Picker to display it. Once a new
+Web-browser-based staff client is used, format icons would be displayed
+in this column. Right now you will see a string. Look for the
+language/format codes, such as "eng", "fre", "book", "dvd", "blue-ray",
+etc. All the selected formats in any of the selected language(s) are
+targeting candidates.
+
+After a meta-record hold is placed, if a new MARC record is added and it
+meets the grouping criteria (title, author and format), items under this
+new record will be used to fulfill the existing holds.
+_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+To place a volume level hold, retrieve and display the record.
+
+On the holdings grid, click Volume in HOLDABLE? column in the row of
+your chosen volume.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+Scan or type patron’s barcode into Place hold for patron by barcode.
+
+Edit patron hold notification fields as required and click Submit. Note
+the hold is identified as a __Volume Hold__.
+
+Retrieve and display the record.
+
+On the holdings grid, click Copy in HOLDABLE? column in the row of your
+chosen copy.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+Scan or type patron’s barcode into Place hold for patron by barcode.
+
+Edit patron hold notification fields as required and click Submit. Note
+the hold is identified as a __Copy Hold__.
+
+Holds can be placed from patron records too. In the patron record Holds
+screen, click the Place Hold button on the left top corner.
+
+The catalogue is displayed in the Holds screen.
+
+Search for the title and place holds using the same procedure as placing
+holds directly in the catalogue.
+
+You may continue to search for more titles. Once you are done, click the
+Holds button on top to go back to the Holds screen. Click the Refresh
+button to reflect your newly placed holds.
+
+[[hold-manage-holds]]
+Managing Holds
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+Holds can be cancelled at any time by staff or patrons. Before holds are
+captured, staff or patrons can suspend them or set them as inactive for
+a period of time without losing the hold queue position, activate
+suspended holds, change notification method, phone number, pick-up
+location (for multi-branch libraries only), expiration date, activation
+date for inactive holds, etc. Once a hold is captured, staff can change
+the pickup location and extend the hold shelf time if required.
+
+Staff can edit holds in either patron's records or the title records.
+Patrons can edit their holds in their account on the OPAC.
+
+Retrieve the patron record and go to the Holds screen.
+
+Highlight the hold record, then select Actions for Selected Holds.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+Manage the hold by choosing an action on the list.
+
+1. If you want to cancel the hold, click Cancel Hold on the above
+screen. You are prompted to select a reason and put in a note if
+required. Once done, click YES.
++
+screenshot of staff client
++
+___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Tip*
+
+A captured hold with a status of "On Hold Shelf" or "Ready for Pickup"
+can be cancelled by either staff or patrons. But the status of the item
+will not be changed until staff check it in.
+___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+2. If you want to suspend a hold or activate a suspended hold, click
+the appropriate action on the list. You will be prompted to confirm your
+action. Suspended holds have a "No" value in the Active? column.
++
+screenshot of staff client
++
+___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Tip*
+
+Suspended holds will not be filled but its hold position will be kept.
+They will automatically become active on the activation day if there is
+an activation date in the record. Without an activation date, the holds
+will remain inactive until staff or a patron activate them manually.
+___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+3. You may edit the Activation Date and Expiration Date by using the
+corresponding action entry on the Action for Selected Holds dropdown
+menu. You will be prompted to enter the new date. Use the calendar
+widget to choose a date, then click Apply. Use the Remove button to
+unset the date.
+4. Your library may set up a hold shelf time. Hold shelf expire time is
+automatically recorded in the hold record when a hold is filled. You may
+edit this time by using the Edit Shelf Expire Time on the Action for
+Selected Holds dropdown menu. You will be prompted to enter the new
+date. Use the calendar widget to choose a date, then click Apply.
+5. If you want to enable or disable phone notification or change the
+phone number, click Edit Phone Notification. You will be prompted to
+enter the new phone number. You must follow the format of XXX-XXX-XXXX.
+The phone number is used for this hold only and can be different from
+the one in the patron account. It has no impact on the patron account.
+If you leave it blank, no phone number will be printed on the hold slip.
+6. If you want to enable or disable email notification for the hold,
+click Set Email Notification. Click Email or No Email on the prompt
+screen.
+7. Pickup location can be changed by clicking Edit Pickup Library.
+Click the dropdown list of all libraries and choose the new pickup
+location. Click Done.
++
+_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Tip*
+
+Staff can change the pickup location for holds with in-transit or
+ready-for-pickup status. Item will be sent in transit to the new
+destination.
+_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
++
+_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Caution*
+
+Sitka Evergreen allows staff to select any library on the list as a
+pickup location. Staff should observe local policy and service agreement
+with other libraries.
+
+For libraries sharing resources with other libraries in the federation,
+Sitka support strongly recommends you not edit pickup location, instead
+cancel and replace the hold with the new pickup location. This is due to
+the fact that the eligible copies that may be used to fill the hold may
+be different with different pickup location. Editing the pickup location
+in the existing hold will not force Evergreen to re-target the eligible
+copies. The hold may be filled by a wrong copy.
+_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+8. You may move a hold to the top of the queue by using the Set Top of
+Queueoption in Actions for Selected Holds. Click Top of Queue to move
+the selected hold to the top of the hold queue. Click No Top of Queue to
+remove it from the top of the queue. You will be prompted to confirm
+your action.
++
+____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Tip*
+
+If an item has been assigned to the hold on top of the queue before you
+move another one to the top, you need to suspend the old top hold, Find
+Another Target for the new top hold, then activate the old top hold.
+____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+9. You can also manipulate hold position by adjusting Hold Request
+Time. Use Edit Request Time on Actions for Selected Holds. Use the
+calendar widget to select a date.
++
+_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Tip*
+
+For most libraries, holds are filled based on request time sequence.
+Changing request time will change the holds fufillment sequence.
+_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+10. The item's physical condition is recorded in the copy record as Good
+or Mediocre in the Quality field. You may request that your holds be
+filled with copies of good quality only. Click Set Desired Copy Quality
+on the Actions for Selected Holds list. Make your choice in the pop-up
+window.
+
+Cancelled holds can be displayed. Click Show Cancelled Holds button on
+the Holds screen.
+
+You may un-cancel it.
+
+_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Tip*
+
+Based on your library's setting, hold request time can be reset when a
+hold is un-cancelled.
+
+Cancelled holds displayed on the Cancelled Holds screen can be limited
+by hold age (amount of time) or count (a number). Individual libraries
+can set this up in the Library Settings Editor. See link:#lsa[???].
+_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+You can view details of a hold by selecting a hold then clicking the
+Detail View button on the Holds screen.
+
+You may add a note to a hold in the Detail View.
+
+Notes can be printed on the hold slip if the Print on slip? checkbox is
+selected. Key in the message then click Add Note.
+
+_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Tip*
+
+Using the Column Picker, you can display Queue Position and Total number
+of Holds. screenshot of staff client
+_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+Retrieve and display the title record in the catalogue.
+
+Click Actions for this Record > View Holds.
+
+All holds on this title to be picked up at your library are displayed.
+Use Filter checkbox and Pickup Library to view holds to be picked up at
+other branches of your libary system.
+
+Highlight the hold you want to edit. Click Actions for Selected Holds
+and the appropriate action you want to take as described in step 3 of
+link:#hold-managing-hold-in-patron-records[simplesect_title].
+
+You can retrieve the hold requestor's account by selecting Retrieve
+Patron on the above dropdown menu.
+
+[[hold-pull-list]]
+Holds Pull List
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+There are five types of status a hold may have: Waiting for Copy,
+Waiting for Capture, In Transit, Ready for Pickup, and the optional
+Reserved/Pending.
+
+_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Note*
+
+If your library chooses to delay hold shelf status (see link:#lsa[???]),
+then a hold may have the status of Reserved/Pending.
+_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+1. Waiting-for-copy holds: all holdable copies are checked out or not
+available.
+2. Waiting-for-capture holds: an available copy is assigned to the
+hold. The item shows up on the Holds Pull List waiting for staff to
+search the shelf and capture the hold.
+3. In Transit holds: holds are captured at a non-pickup branch and on
+the way to the pick-up location.
+4. Ready-for-pick-up holds: holds are captured and items are on the
+Hold Shelf waiting for patrons to pick up.
+5. Reserved/Pending holds: holds are captured and items are in process
+and to be put on the Hold Shelf. The status will be automatically
+changed to Ready-for-pick-up once the delay time period specified in
+Library Settings Editor expires.
+
+Besides capturing holds when checking in items, Evergreen matches holds
+with available items in your library at regular intervals. Once a
+matching copy is found, the item's barcode number is assigned to the
+hold and the item is put on the Holds Pull List. Staff can print the
+Holds Pull List and search for the items on shelves.
+
+To retrieve your Holds Pull List select Circulation > Pull List for Hold
+Requests.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+The Holds Pull List is displayed. By default the items on the list are
+grouped first by Copy Location, then by Call Number. You may re-sort it
+by clicking the column labels, e.g. Title.
+
+_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Tip*
+
+The order of Copy Location can be adjusted on Admin > Local
+Administration > link:#lsa-copy-location-order[Copy Location Order]
+_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Tip*
+
+The maximum number of holds initially displayed on the pull list is
+about 100. Use Fetch More Holds to retrieve more records.
+_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+To print the pull list you may use Print Full Pull List, Print Full Pull
+List (Alternate Strategy) or go to Simplified Pull List Interface. The
+full list prints Title, Author, Shelving Location, Call Number and Item
+Barcode, while the alternative stragegy also prints patron barcode.
+Print button prints title only.
+
+__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Tip*
+
+You may export holds pull list to a CSV file, then import it into MS
+Excel to re-format it for printing. Use List Actions button on bottom
+left of screen.
+__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+Click Simplified Pull List Interface. The pull list will be displayed in
+a new tab.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+You may sort the list by clicking the column label or you may go to the
+column picker to choose the displayed fields and sort order. Move the
+cursor to any column in the label row as shown in the above screen and
+right click your mouse. The column picker will be displayed.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+You may select/deselect the checkboxes in the Display column to choose
+the fields that you want to display/hide. Select Auto Width checkbox if
+you wish Evergreen to automatically adjust the width of each column. Set
+the values for Sort Priority for all the fields that you want to sort
+by. The example list in the above screen will be sorted by Shelving
+Location, Call Number, and then Author.
+
+Scroll to the bottom of the list and click Save.
+
+Click Print Full List. The list will be printed with the selected
+displayed fields and in the selected sort order.
+
+_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Caution*
+
+The current version of Evergreen may not display a whole list of holds
+on the screen in Simplified Pull List, but the printed list is complete.
+_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+You may perform hold management tasks by using the Actions for Select
+Holds dropdown list.
+
+________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Tip*
+
+The Holds Pull List is updated constantly. Once an item on the list is
+no longer available or a hold on the list is captured, the items will
+disappear from the list. The Holds Pull List should be printed at least
+once a day.
+________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+[[hold-title-transfer]]
+Transferring Title Holds
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+Holds on one title can be transferred to another with the hold request
+time preserved.
+
+Retrieve the bibliographic record you would like the holds to be
+transferred to.
+
+Click Actions for this Record > Mark as Title Hold Transfer Destination.
+
+Click OK to acknowledge the pop up.
+
+Retrieve the bibliographic record that currently has the hold(s)
+attached to it.
+
+Click Actions for this Record > View Holds.
+
+Select the hold(s) you would like to transfer.
+
+Click Actions for Selected Holds > Transfer to Marked Title.
+
+Click OK to acknowledge the pop up.
+
+The holds have now been transferred.
+
+Any holds that were placed at the copy or volume level will remain.
+
+[[hold-find-another-target]]
+Find Another Target for Holds
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+For an item on the Holds Pull Listbut not found on the shelves or the
+item is not in proper condition for circulation, staff may mark it
+missing or damaged and find another item for the hold, if it is not the
+only copy.
+
+Finding another target for holds, or retargeting the holds, can be done
+at several places:
+
+* View Holds in title record: selecting Actions for this Record > View
+Holds
+* Holds in patron record
+* Holds Pull List
+
+You need to select the hold and click Actions for Selected Holds > Find
+Another Target. Evergreen immediately searches for an available copy for
+the hold and puts it on the Holds Pull List. If there is no available
+copy, the hold's status will be set to "Wait for copy".
+
+____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Tip*
+
+Newly created items, or items of which the status was just changed from
+a non-holdable to a holdable status, such as from Missing to Reshelving,
+may not trigger holds on regular checkin, because these copies were not
+identified as potential hold targets due to their status. Using the
+checkin modifiers Retarget Local Holds and Retarget All Statuses will
+force Evergreen to check whether there is pending hold on the item
+picked up at the checkin library. These checkin modifiers are sticky,
+and Co-op support recommends they be turned on unless your library is
+part of a multi-branch library system. In such cases, staff may
+re-target the hold on top of the holds queue on the Catalogue > View
+Holds screen.
+____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+[[hold-capture-holds]]
+Capturing Holds
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+Holds can be captured when a checked-out item is returned (checked in)
+or an item on the Holds Pull List is retrieved and captured. When a hold
+is captured, the hold slip will be printed and if the patron has chosen
+to be notified by email, the email notification will be sent out. The
+item should be put on the hold shelf.
+
+To capture a hold, Select Circulation > Capture Holds.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+Scan or type barcode and click Submit.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+The following hold slip is automatically printed.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+If the item should be sent to another location, a hold transit slip will
+be printed.
+
+image:media/hold-27a.png[image]
+
+___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Tip*
+
+If your library chooses to keep on-hold items behind the desk for some
+patrons (Hold is behind Circ Desk checkbox is selected in the patron
+record), you will be prompted to route the item to Private Hold Shelf.
+See link:#lsa[???] for how to set up Behind Desk Pickup.
+
+If a patron has a OPAC/Staff Client Holds Alias in his/her account, it
+will be used on the hold slip instead of the patron name.
+
+Holds can also be captured on the Circulation > Check In Items screen.
+If you have selected the Auto-Print Hold and Transit Slipscheckbox, the
+hold slip will be printed automatically without confirmation prompt.
+___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+[[hold-shelf-list]]
+Holds Shelf List and Clearing Shelf-Expired Holds
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+Items with Ready-for-pickup status are on the Holds Shelf List. The
+Holds Shelf List can help you manage items on the holds shelf. To see
+the holds shelf list, select Circulation > Browse Holds Shelf
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+The Holds Shelf List is displayed. Note the Actions for Selected Holds
+are available, as in the patron record. You can cancel stale holds here.
+
+Select View Clearable Holds checkbox to list expired or cancelled holds
+only. The Clear These Holds button is then lit up. Click it and the
+expired holds will be cancelled.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+Print the list, bring the items down from the hold shelf and check them
+in.
+
+________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Tip*
+
+If you cancel a ready-for-pickup hold, you must check in the item to
+make it available for circulation or trigger the next hold in line.
+
+Hold shelf expire time is inserted when a hold achieves on-hold-shelf
+status. It is calculated according to the individual library's default
+hold shelf time expire interval in the Library Settings Editor. See
+link:#lsa[???].
+________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+[[hold_holds_filling_explained]]
+Holds Filling Explained
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+When a hold is attempted on the catalogue, Evergreen checks all related
+library settings, hold policies and holdings under the title to decide
+whether it is allowed. If it is allowed, Evergreen will create a hold
+request record. Besides the basic information, such as pickup library,
+request time, etc., it also records the range of libraries' copies that
+may be used to fill the hold. The range is decided based on the
+availability of holdable copies and library's policies. It is recorded
+in the hold request record in a field called Selection Depth, which is
+viewable when viewing holds in either patron's account or under a title
+record.
+
+Based on current Sitka settings, you will see either 1 or 2 in Selection
+Depth. 2 means all holdable copies of a library or all branches of a
+multi-branch library system may be used to fill the hold. 1 means all
+holdable copies within a library federation, such as BC_ILC or Spruce,
+are the hold's potential targets.
+
+Selection Depth is not editable on the staff client. Evergreen does not
+re-assess or update Selection Depth when holdings situation under a
+title is changed. If Selection Depth needs to be changed, staff have to
+manually cancel, then replace the hold.
+
+The potential target copies of a hold are also recorded in separate
+records in another table, which are not viewable on the staff client.
+When an item is checked in, Evergreen will quickly go through this
+eligible copy table to check whether it is requested.
+
+After a hold is placed, Evergreen will look for potential targets at a
+shorter interval (about 15 minutes) within the first 24 hours. After the
+24 hours period, Evergreen will check the hold once a day at roughly the
+time of the day when the hold was placed. The time is recorded in the
+hold request record in a field called Previous Check Time, which is also
+viewable when viewing holds.
+
+If a potential target is found, it will be added to the eligible copy
+table. If an eligible copy is availble, it will be put on to the
+library's Hold Pull List. The copy will be on the Pull List until the
+hold is captured, filled, cancelled, or re-targeted. Evergreen does not
+target unavailable copies, such as those checked out. But it will check
+the eligible copy table when items are checked in.
+
+Though there may be multiple eligible copies available, only one copy
+may be put on to a Pull List at a time. But checking in another copy
+before the Pull List is done may capture the hold. The item will
+disappear from the Pull List, unless the Pull List was printed before
+the hold is captured.
+
+When there are multiple eligible copies available, Evergreen will first
+choose the pickup library's copy, if available. Among other libraries'
+copies, it will randomly pick up a copy, unless the pickup library
+imposes special rules prioritizing preferred hold target source.
+
+When Evergreen re-targets holds (at least once a day, but at different
+time for individual holds), it removes the current target, then picks up
+one. Situation wise, it may or may not target the original copy. A copy
+that has been on a Pull List for a day may likely disappear when the
+hold is retargeted.
+
+The eligible copy table is also updated when a hold is re-targeted. That
+staff manually re-target holds via Find Another Target will update the
+eligible copy table, too. Under regular circumstances, without using the
+Checkin Modifiers, Evergreen will check holds for items in the eligible
+copy table only. Newly catalogued items and items that became holdable
+recently may not be in the eligilbe copy table yet, thus not triggering
+holds, if any.
+
+Holds are queued based on request time. Separate holds queues are formed
+based on the potential target copy range. For example, there is a hold
+queue for copy level holds and another for title level holds. Other
+libraries' holds are not counted in in the queue of holds picked up at
+your library, if your holds target your own copy.
+
+Copy level holds have a simple queue, which includes all holds targeting
+the copy. Title level holds queue counts in all holds targeting any of
+the copies that the title hold may target, including the copy level
+holds. A title level hold takes a position in each copy level holds
+queue of all copies it may target. You may notice missing queue numbers
+in copy level holds queues. They are taken by the title level holds.
+
+For resource-sharing libraries, you may see selection depth 1 and 2
+holds. Selection depth 2 holds have a separate queue based on the picked
+up library since they target a separate set of copies. This means each
+library/system has its own queue if it has holdable copies.
+
+Selection depth 1 holds are queued together with all holds (selection
+depth 1 and 2) targeting all copies that the selection depth 1 hold may
+target. The queue number may be big when a few libraries have a few
+selection depth 2 holds. Selection depth 1 holds take a position in each
+selection depth 2 holds queue under the title. You may see missing queue
+numbers in selection depth 2 holds queues, which are taken by selection
+depth 1 holds.
+
+To view selection depth 2 holds queue, simply filter the holds by pickup
+library, then follow the request time. A missing queue number means
+there is a selection depth 1 hold placed between the surrounding two
+holds' request time.
+
+[[circ-transit]]
+Items in Transit
+----------------
+
+Evergreen’s _In Transit_ feature is used to keep track of items
+transferring among branches within a library system or libraries. It
+makes it easy for libraries to provide services such as allowing patrons
+to return items at any branch or place holds on items belonging to
+another branch.
+
+[[transit-item-in]]
+When will an item go In Transit?
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+When an item is checked in at the non-owning branch the status will be
+changed to In transit and a Transit Slip can be printed. Items in
+transit should be set aside and sent to the destination branch according
+to your library’s policy and workflow.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+When you capture a hold with a pickup branch other than your branch, the
+item’s status will be changed to In transit. If you capture the hold on
+the Check In screen you will be prompted to print the Transit/Hold slip
+shown below. If you capture the hold on the Capture Holds screen, a
+Transit/Hold slip will be printed automatically if you have a printer
+attached.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+[[transit-receive]]
+How to receive In transit items?
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+At the receiving branch, all items received should be checked in so that
+items' status will be changed from In transit to Reshelving. If an item
+has a hold on it, a Hold Slip will be printed. If the pickup branch for
+the hold is not your branch, the item will be sent In transit again to
+the pickup branch. A Transit/Hold Slip will be printed.
+
+[[transit-details]]
+Transit Details
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+You may find out the source and destination library of a transit on the
+Item Status F5 screen.
+
+Retrieve the item by barcode.
+
+Select the item and go to Alternate View. Select Holds/Transit tab.
+Transit information is displayed in In Transit on the lower part of the
+screen.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+[[transit-list]]
+Transit List
+~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+The Transit List report can be used as a tool to help manage your
+incoming and outgoing transits.
+
+To access the Transit List report, select Admin > Local Administration >
+Transit List.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+Specify Transit to or Transit from library from the dropdown menu to
+retrieve transits coming to or sending from your library.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+Pick a date range in Transit Date falls between fields.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+Click Retrieve Transits.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+Those items, which were sent In Transit within the date range, and with
+an In Transit status, are listed.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Tip*
+
+ It is good practice to pull Transit Lists when sending or
+receiving items to and from other branches. Reconciling the list against
+the physical items helps ensure your shipments are complete.
+_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+[[transit-abort]]
+Aborting Transits
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Caution*
+
+Under certain circumstances aborting transit may be required. But
+aborting transit may affect data integrity or affect the accuracy of
+statistics. Sitka Support strongly suggests libraries be cautious with
+this function. The general guideline is that the sending libraries may
+abort a transit before sending out items, while receiving libraries
+never abort a transit but check them in instead.
+_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+From the Transit List screen select the transit(s) you wish to cancel
+
+Select Actions for Selected Transits > Abort Transits.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+The transit is cancelled. It will still display in the list, but if you
+re-click Retrieve Transits the screen will be refreshed and the item
+will no longer display as a transit, and the item will have a status of
+Reshelving.
+
+If an item with status of In transit is to be checked out, you can
+override the block by clicking Abort Transit then Checkout.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Tip*
+
+Sometimes mis-scanning happens when you check in an item. Occasionally
+the mis-captured barcode number happens to be a valid item of another
+library. This sends the item in transit wrongly. To correct these
+mistakes libraries need to regularly access their Transit List and abort
+the invalid transits.
+
+It is good practice for libraries to inform the owning library if an
+item with special status, e.g. checked out, missing, lost etc., is sent
+in transit by mis-scanning.
+_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Caution*
+
+Some transits can not be cancelled/aborted, such as items with a
+previous status of Missing. Such items have to be checked in at the
+owning library.
+____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+[[circ-selfcheck]]
+Self Check
+----------
+
+_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Note*
+
+These instructions are specific to the native Evergreen Self Check. For
+instructions on using third party self check outs libraries should refer
+to the instructions provided by the third party vendors.
+_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+For information on how your library can set up and use the native
+Evergreen Self Check see link:#admin-self-check[???].
+
+[[self-check-staff]]
+Staff Functions in the Evergreen Self Check
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+Open the Evergreen Self Check interface in an internet browser.
+
+Enter your self check login credentials and click Login.
+
+_Each library is given a self check specific Local System Administrator
+account during set up._
+
+Close the browser.
+
+Turn off the computer
+
+Sitka Support recommends turning off all computers running the Evergreen
+Self Check at closing every night to avoid any conflicts with overnight
+processes.
+
+[[self-check-check-out]]
+Basic Check Out
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+Patron scans their barcode.
+
+_Optional_ Patron enters their account password.
+
+Patron scans the barcodes for their items.
+
+*OR*
+
+Patron places items, one at a time, on the RFID pad.
+
+Items will be listed below with a check out confirmation message.
+
+If a check out fails a message will advise patrons to see staff.
+
+Patron clicks Receipt to print a checkout receipt and logout.
+
+*OR*
+
+Patron clicks Logout to logout with no receipt.
+
+_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Note*
+
+If the patron forgets to logout the system will automatically log out
+after the time period specified in the library setting Patron Login
+Timeout (in seconds). An inactvity pop-up will appear to warn patrons 20
+seconds before the logout.
+_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+[[self-check-out-renew]]
+Renewing Items
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+Patrons can renew items via the self check if they physically have the
+item.
+
+Patron scans the barcode of the item they wish to renew.
+
+*OR*
+
+Patron places the item on the RFID pad.
+
+A renewal confirmation message will display and the item will display
+below. Type displays as Renewal rather than Checkout.
+
+If the renewal fails a message will advise patrons to see staff.
+
+[[self-check-items-out]]
+View Items Out
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+Patrons are able to view the items they currently have checked out by
+clicking View Items Out.
+
+The items currently checked out will display with their due dates.
+
+Using the Print button patrons can print out a receipt listing all of
+the items they currently have checked out.
+
+[[self-check-holds]]
+View Holds
+~~~~~~~~~~
+
+Patrons are able to view their current holds by clicking View Holds.
+
+Items currently on hold display. Patrons can also see which, if any,
+items are ready for pickup.
+
+Using the Print button patrons can print out a receipt listing all of
+the items they currently have on hold.
+
+[[self-check-fines]]
+View Fines
+~~~~~~~~~~
+
+Patrons are able to view the fines they currently owe by clicking View
+Details.
+
+Current fines owed by the patron display. Fines cannot be paid through
+the self check at this time.
+
+[[offline]]
+Offline Transactions
+--------------------
+
+Evergreen's Standalone Interface/Offline Interface is designed to log
+transactions during network outage, which can be uploaded and processed
+once network operations are restored.
+
+https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=1IQoZFyl3zs[*Offline Module in Evergreen
+(7:50)*]
+
+The terms “Offline Interface” and “Standalone Interface” mean the same
+thing - a separate program to handle simple circulation tasks while the
+network is down.
+
+To access Offline Interface, go to Staff Client login screen. Click
+Standalone Interface button.
+
+Evergreen Standalone Interface will open.
+
+[[offline-setup]]
+Offline Module Setup
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+A default offline printer must be set up on each workstation in order to
+print receipts from Offline Module. See
+link:#intro-start-workstation-admin-configure-printer[Configure
+Printers] for details.
+
+________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Caution*
+
+The offline default printer can only be set up when Evergreen is online.
+But attempting to print a receipt from the Offline Module when Evergreen
+is online will cause an error.
+________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+It is best practice to download the offline patron list every morning on
+any computers that would in the event that the library goes to offline
+checkout.
+
+This list contains blocked, barred, and expired patrons as well as lost
+cards and enables the Offline Module to respond with an error message
+indicating the patron status at check-out time.
+
+Select Admin > Download Offline Patron List.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+[[offline-patron-registration]]
+Patron Registration
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+Patron registration on Evergreen Offline Interface records the minimum
+patron information necessary to register a new patron.
+
+__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Tip*
+
+All fields, except Line 2 of Billing Address, on Patron Registration
+screen are required. If your library does not record information for any
+field, you need to work out a standard fake value for it, e.g.
+1900-01-01 for Date of Birth.
+
+The account password will be automatically generated. Patrons can access
+their account with the password after the offline transactions are
+uploaded and processed.
+__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+Click Register Patron on the top menu bar.
+
+Patron Registration screen is displayed.
+
+Fill in the form with patron information. Use the drop down list if
+available. Click Save patron registration button. Click OK on the
+confirmation pop-up window.
+
+[[offline-check-out]]
+Check Out
+~~~~~~~~~
+
+Click Check Out button to access check out screen.
+
+The Standalone Check Out screen will open.
+
+Make sure the date (on the left end of the menu bar) is correct.
+
+Scan the patron's library card barcode in Enter the patron's barcode
+box.
+
+Check that the due date is correct. You may delete then type in a due
+date in Enter the item due date box. You may also click choose one of
+these dropdown list to select a relative due date based on the loan
+period.
+
+Scan the items' bacode in Enter the item barcode box. It will appear on
+the right side of the screen.
+
+For non-catalogued items, you may also clickchoose a non-barcode option
+dropdown list to select a non-catalogued category.
+
+Enter the number of items you want to check out, then click OK on the
+prompt window.
+
+Scan all the items, changing the due date if necessary.
+
+If you want to print a receipt, make sure the Print receipt? checkbox is
+selected.
+
+_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Note*
+
+Receipts will only print if you have previously set a default offline
+printer in the staff client. See
+link:#intro-start-workstation-admin-configure-printer[Configure
+Printers] for instructions on setting the default offline printer.
+_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+Click Save these transactions.
+
+_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Tip*
+
+The default dates are based on your computer settings.
+
+Pre-catalogued item circulation is not available on Offline Interface.
+If an existing pre-cat barcode happens to be used, it will be checked
+out with the previous author and title. If a new pre-cat barcode is
+attempted, an error of ASSET NOT FOUND (item not found) will be returned
+upon processing offline transactions.
+_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Caution*
+
+The Delete selected transaction function does not currently work.
+Misscans need to be resolved as link:#offline-exceptions[exceptions] at
+this time.
+____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+[[offline-renew]]
+Renew
+~~~~~
+
+To renew, you must know items barcode number. Patron's barcode is
+optional.
+
+To access renew function, click Renew button on the top menu bar.
+
+Renew screen looks very similar to Check Out screen. The differences are
+patron's barcode is optional on Renew screen, and non-barcoded option is
+not available as non-barcoded items can not be renewed.
+
+Follow the same procedure as checking out described above. Skip patron
+barcode if you do not have it.
+
+[[offline-in-house-use]]
+In House Use
+~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+To access In House Use, click In House Use button on the top menu bar.
+
+Make sure the date is correct.
+
+Type in the number in Enter the number of uses of the item box.
+
+Scan or type in the item barcode number in Enter the item barcode box.
+
+Repeat the above 2 steps until all items have been scanned.
+
+Click Save these transactions. Make sure Print receipt? checkbox is
+selected if you want to print a receipt.
+
+[[offline-check-in]]
+Check In
+~~~~~~~~
+
+Click Check In button on the top menu bar.
+
+Check In screen will open.
+
+Make sure the date is correct.
+
+Scan the items barcode in Enter item barcode box. The number will be
+displayed on the right side fo the screen.
+
+Scan all items you want to check in.
+
+Click Save these transactions. If you need to print a receipt, make sure
+Print receipt? checkbox is selected before you save the transactions.
+
+________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Caution*
+
+Without access to Evergreen database, items on holds or with special
+status will not be captured in offline mode. Sitka Support Team
+recommends libraries not use check in function on Standalone Interface
+if possible.
+________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+[[offline-upload-transactions]]
+Uploading offline transactions
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+Once you are able to connect to the server, you need to upload the
+offline transactions. It is good practice to do this as soon as
+possible, but if the local system administrator isn’t on site for a day
+or two do not panic.
+
+The terms Offline Interface and Standalone Interface mean the same thing
+- a separate program to handle simple circulation tasks while the
+network is down.
+
+Once you can connect to the server, there are 3 steps to uploading
+offline transactions:
+
+1. link:#offline-create[Create a session:] to be done by local system
+administrators at an administration workstation.
+2. link:#offline-upload[Upload transactions to a session:] to be done
+by circulation staff at circulation workstations.
+3. link:#offline-process[Process the uploaded transactions:]to be done
+by local system administrators at an administration workstation.
+
+Once the network has come back up, a local system administrator must
+first create a session before uploading transactions. Then, staff can
+upload transactions from each of the workstations used in offline circ
+to that session. Once all of the branch workstations have uploaded
+their transactions to the session, the local system administrator will
+process all the transactions in the session at once.
+
+___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Note*
+
+Circulation Staff uploading transactions to the session does not put the
+transactions into the Evergreen database. It just copies over the
+offline transaction file saved in individual local workstations to the
+Evergreen server. The transactions will not be sent to the Evergreen
+database until the local system adminsitrator processes the session.
+___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+Log into Evergreen with a local system administrator username and
+password.
+
+From the menu bar, select Admin (-) > Offline Transaction Management.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+The Offline Transactions screen will open. Previously created sessions
+will be listed in the Offline Sessions section. Otherwise, the Offline
+Sessions section will be blank.
+
+In the upper Offline Sessions section, click on the Create button to
+create a new session.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+Enter a name for the session, like “Internet Down 2009-12-02”. Click
+OK.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+In the Offline Sessions section, highlight the session you just created.
+An Uploaded Transactions section will appear in the bottom of the
+screen. Initially, this section will be empty.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+Inform library staff that the session has been created and what the
+session name is.
+
+Wait until the local system administrator has created a session and told
+you that it's ready for your upload. There may be several sessions shown
+on the Offline Transaction Management screen, so you will need the name
+of the correct session from your local system administrator.
+
+Log into Evergreen with your regular username and password.
+
+From the menu bar, select Admin (-) > Offline Transaction Management.
+
+The Offline Transactions screen will open. You should see at least one
+session in the Offline Sessions section. You may see old sessions listed
+there, as well.
+
+In the upper Offline Sessions section, highlight the correct session,
+then click Upload.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+When the uploading is finished,select the session in Offline Sessions
+section. Now the value in the Upload Count column should have been
+increased by 1. Your workstation should be listed in Uploaded
+Transactions section now.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+Inform your local system administrator that your transaction has been
+uploaded to the session.
+
+________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Note*
+
+You will need to do this for each workstation you have used for offline
+circulation. If your library has more than one workstations that have
+been used for offline transactions you will see the other workstation
+sessions that have already been uploaded.
+________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+Wait until all the appropriate staff workstations have uploaded their
+transactions to your session. You should see the workstations listed in
+the Uploaded Transactions section. You'll need to be logged into
+Evergreen as a local system administrator to do the processing step.
+
+Log into Evergreen with a local system administrator's username and
+password.
+
+From the menu bar, select Admin (-) > Offline Transaction Management.
+
+Highlight the correct session and, if necessary, Refresh to verify all
+the appropriate workstations have uploaded their transactions to your
+session.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+Click on the Process button.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+The processing may take a while, depending on how many transactions you
+have done. Click the Refresh button to check the status. The processing
+is complete when the Processing? column shows Completed.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Note*
+
+The number in the Transactions Processed column is equal to the number
+of items checked out or checked in. For example, if there are 5
+transactions processed this could be 5 items checked out, or 3 items
+checked in and 2 items checked out, or 5 items checked in.
+_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+Exceptions are problems that were encountered during processing. For
+example, a mis-scanned patron barcode, an open circulation, or an item
+that wasn’t checked in before it was checked out to another patron,
+would be listed as an exception. Those transactions causing exceptions
+may not be loaded into Evergreen database. Staff should examine the
+exceptions and take necessary action.
+
+The example below shows several exceptions:
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+These are a few notes about possible exceptions. It is not an
+all-inclusive list.
+
+1. Checking out a DVD with the wrong date (leaving due date set at +2
+weeks instead of +1 week) doesn't cause an exception.
+2. Overdue books are not flagged as exceptions.
+3. Checking out a reference book doesn't cause an exception.
+4. Checking out an item belonging to another library doesn't cause an
+exception.
+5. The Standalone Interface doesn't recognize books on hold, no
+exceptions will be generated for that.
+6. The Standalone Interface will recognize blocked, barred, and expired
+patrons as well as lost cards, IF you have recently done an Admin (-) >
+Download Offline Patron List on the workstation on which you're using
+the Standalone Interface. You will get an error message indicating the
+patron status from within the Standalone Interface at check-out time.
+7. *ROUTE-ITEM.*
++
+Indicates the book should be routed to another branch or library system.
+You'll need to find the book and re-check it in (online) to get the
+Transit Slip to print.
+8. *COPY_STATUS_LOST.*
++
+Indicates a book previously marked as lost was found and checked in.
+9. *CIRC_CLAIMS_RETURNED.*
++
+Indicates a book previously marked as claimed-returned was found and
+checked in.
+10. *ASSET_COPY_NOT_FOUND.*
++
+Indicates the item barcode was mis-scanned/mis-typed.
+11. *ACTOR_CARD_NOT_FOUND.*
++
+Indicates the patron's library barcode was mis-scanned/mis-typed.
+12. *OPEN_CIRCULATION_EXISTS.*
++
+Indicates a book was checked out that had never been checked in.
+13. *MAX_RENEWALS_REACHED.*
++
+Indicates the item has already been renewed the maximum times allowed
+(or it’s a video/DVD).
+
+[[search]]
+Searching the Database for Cataloguing Purposes
+-----------------------------------------------
+
+https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=lIEPR47y06E[*Sitka Training Video -
+Search the Catalogue (5:16)*]
+
+It is critical to search the database before adding titles, volumes, or
+copies. Good practice is to assume the item you are adding already
+exists, and to do an exhaustive search for the item before cataloguing
+it. By doing so, you will discover whether you need to add your item to
+an existing title record, or if you need to import or create a new title
+record. It is very important that you scope your cataloguing searches to
+the entire Sitka database, either at the time of each search or via
+Workstation or My Account preferences.
+
+You can set workstation
+link:#intro-start-workstation-admin-search-preference[search
+preferences] to configure default search location and preferred search
+library and you can choose to have Numeric Search or MARC Expert search
+be the default advanced search view. These workstation preferences
+override account login preferences set in My Account. For cataloguing
+workstations it is recommended that the Default Search Library be set to
+Sitka. This will ensure staff using those workstations are always
+searching all of Sitka.
+
+[[cat-search-advanced]]
+Advanced/Numeric Search
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+To search the catalogue for holdings select Cataloguing > Search the
+Catalogue, or Search > the Catalogue, or press F3.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+The advanced search screen is displayed. In this example the search
+screen defaults to the Numeric Searchpage You can customize the look of
+this screen via Workstation Administration. In this example note the
+search library is set to Sitka. A cataloguer must ensure they are
+searching the entire Sitka database.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+Enter your search criteria and click Search.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+In this example, the item in hand has 3 copies in Sitka.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+To access the record, click on the title link.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+Confirm bibliographic data as displayed in the brief record. If
+satisfied that the record matches the item in hand, you can proceed to
+add holdings as described in link:#add[???].
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+You may also choose to view MARC record from this screen by clicking on
+MARC Record button below record summary, or selecting Actions for this
+Record > MARC Viewor MARC Edit at top right of record.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+This presents detailed bibliographic data to help you determine whether
+the record matches the item in hand.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Tip*
+
+It is possible to search ISBNs by keyword, but results may not be
+exhaustive. We recommend using Numeric Search as described in this
+lesson.
+
+If an OCLC number is nine digits then Evergreen uses “ocn” as a prefix.
+For example: ocn123456789.
+
+If an OCLC number is less than 8 digits then Evergreen uses “ocm” as a
+prefix. In addition Evergreen will automatically prefix the number with
+zeros so that it is nine digits. For example: ocm01234567, or
+ocm00123456
+
+If searching a LCCN do not use a hyphen, add a “0” in place of a
+hyphen, e.g. 2001001234
+___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+[[cat-search-marc]]
+MARC Expert Search
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+To search the catalogue for holdings select Cataloguing > Search the
+Catalogue, or Search > the Catalogue, or press F3 and click on Expert
+Search tab.
+
+Enter tag definitions and search criteria and click Search.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+You may search multiple tags by clicking Add Search Row.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+You may now search multiple tags.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+Matching records are retrieved. This example is the MARC view of one
+result.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Tip*
+
+You can manipulate the view during a session, and set a default view, by
+clicking on Actions for this Recordon right of screen. Selecting Set
+bottom interface as Default, as in this example, sets the current OPAC
+View as the default. Next time when you click a title on the resut list,
+the record will be displayed in this default view.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+[[add]]
+Adding Holdings to Existing Records in the Sitka Database
+---------------------------------------------------------
+
+[[add-holdings-title-records]]
+Adding holdings to title records
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Note*
+
+Evergreen has a unified volume/copy creator that allows you to create
+volumes and copies in a unified screen. This function consolidates the
+process of creating volume and copy records. You must configure this,
+and whether you want a horizontal or vertical layout, in Library
+Settings. See link:#lsa[???] The examples here demonstrate use of the
+unified volume/copy creator with a vertical layout. There is also the
+ability to pre-configure call number prefixes and suffixes, via the
+Admin menu.
+_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+Search the catalogue for a record that matches the item in hand, as
+described in link:#search[???]. If you do not find a match, refer to the
+Sitka Cataloguing Policy at
+http://sitka.bclibraries.ca/governance/sitka-policy/ for recommendations
+on required procedures. If you do find a match, proceed to next step.
+
+When the record details are loaded, select Actions for this Record >
+Holdings Maintenance.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+On Holdings Maintenance, select your library, or branch(es), from the
+list and click Actions for Selected Rows > Add Volumes or click on Add
+Volumes link at top left.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+In the Volume and Copy Creator section of the screen:
+
+* Enter a number in the # of volumes field.
+* Type in a call number, or use the call number that is autofilled from
+the MARC record.
+* Use the drop down lists for prefix and suffix if your library uses
+that functionality.
+* Enter the appropriate number of copies and scan barcode(s).
+
+Use Tab, Enter or mouse to move through fields.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Note*
+
+If you are creating place holders for on-order items see
+http://docs.sitka.bclibraries.ca/Policy/current/html/policy-cat-faqs.html#id388392[What
+is the best way to enter “on-order” records?] in the Sitka Evergreen
+Policy and Best Practices Manual
+______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+Make all necessary edits to copy record in the Copy Editor section of
+the screen by moving through fields and clicking Apply on every edit.
+
+For information on the individual fields in the Copy Editor see
+link:#cat-copy-editor[section_title]
+
+_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Note*
+
+Co-op support recommends creating and using copy templates with the Copy
+Editor. For information on using and creating copy templates see
+link:#cat-create-template[simplesect_title]
+_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Caution*
+
+There is a field in the Copy/Item Record called Floating? Leave this
+field at its default blank, unless cataloguing special items using this
+field. If interested in using Floating to manage a rotating or block
+collection, contact Co-op support.
+____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+Click Create Volumes/Items.
+
+You may need to click Refreshto view new items, and, depending on how
+you retrieved the volume/copy editor, you may be in the OPAC view.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Tip*
+
+By default, a new item has a status of __In Process__. Item must be
+checked in to become _Available_ or a cataloguer can choose to change
+the status to _Available_ when creating the item record. Your library
+may choose to alter this behaviour by contacting Co-op support who can
+configure a desired default status for you.
+__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+[[add-hold]]
+New Copies and Holds
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+Because of the way Evergreen targets holds, new copies are not
+guaranteed to fulfill pre-existing holds correctly until 24 hours after
+cataloguing. If your cataloguing turn-around time is shorter than 24
+hours you can ensure the new copy is captured correctly at check in by
+using the checkin modifiers Retarget Local Holds and Retarget All
+Statuses or by following the steps below. Co-op support recommends
+single-branch libraries use the checkin modifiers, as once selected they
+are "sticky" and it is a simpler workflow than that described below. We
+recommend multi-branch libraries not use check-in modifiers to retarget
+holds, as the check-in modifier will only re-target the top local hold,
+which may not be the top system hold. For multi-branch libraries we
+recommend using the following procedure.
+
+After adding the item select Actions for this Record > View Holds
+
+actions for this record menu
+
+If there are outstanding hold requests, select the hold that is next in
+line then choose Actions for Selected Holds > Find Another Target. This
+forces Evergreen to re-target the hold and recognize the newly
+catalogued item.
+
+Check in the new item to capture it for the selected hold.
+
+[[add-hold-nonphysical]]
+Adding holdings for non-physical resources
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+There are two ways to catalogue non-physical resources in Evergreen.
+Recommended process is to use specially coded MARC records as described
+in link:#cat-nonphysical[section_title]. Alternatively you may add dummy
+holdings to a MARC record, using the same steps as adding physical
+holdings as described above. Adding dummy holdings will scope your
+non-physical resources to your catalogue. If you use dummy holdings it
+is important to use item barcodes from within your designated barcode
+range.
+
+[[edit-maintain]]
+Editing and Maintaining Holdings
+--------------------------------
+
+[[cat-copy-editor]]
+Copy Editor
+~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=zIgen-2N4PI[*Sitka Training Video - Copy
+Editor (6:17)*]
+
+The Copy Editor is where you fill in the values for item attributes. You
+will use it to create or edit items. Below tables provide detailed
+description of the fields in an item record.
+
+The Copy Editor will display during the process of cataloguing an item
+and can be accessed through Holdings Maintenance or from the Item Status
+screen by choosing Edit Item Attributes from the appropriate dropdown
+menu.
+
+screenshot of copy editor
+
+.Identification
+[width="99%",cols="30%,42%,28%",options="header",]
+|=======================================================================
+|Setting |Description |Notes
+|Status |Current status of the item |By default a new copy record is
+assigned a status of In Process. Item must be checked in to become
+Available or cataloguer can choose to change status to Available when a
+creating copy record. Some statuses, such as Checked Out and On Holds
+Shelf, are not editable. They can only be used by circulation functions.
+
+|Barcode |Current barcode of the item |The barcode cannot be updated in
+the Copy Editor. See link:#cat-replace[section_title]
+
+|Creation Date |Date on which the item was created |This field will be
+automatically filled when the record is saved.
+
+|Active Date |Date on which the item goes into circulation |This field
+is empty if an item is created with status of On Order or In Process. It
+is filled when it is checked in or out, or its status is edited to
+others.
+
+|Creator |Username of the user who created the item |This field will be
+automatically filled when the record is saved.
+
+|Last Edit Date |Date on which the item was last edited |This field will
+be filled/updated when the record is saved.
+
+|Last Editor |Username of the last user to edit the item |This field
+will be filled/updated when the record is saved.
+|=======================================================================
+
+.Location
+[width="99%",cols="30%,42%,28%",options="header",]
+|=======================================================================
+|Setting |Description |Notes
+|Location/Collection |Shelving/Copy Location for the item |Shelving
+locations belonging to the circulating library/branch and the
+organizations on a higher hierarchal level (library system, federation,
+or Sitka) are displayed in the dropdown list. Multi-branch libraries may
+create system level shelving locations for all branches to share.
+
+|Circulating Library |Library currently circulating the item. |
+
+|Owning Lib : Call Number |Owning library of Call Number and Call Number
+label |Call Number, aka Volume, is a separate record. Call Number cannot
+be updated in the Copy Editor. See
+link:#add-holdings-title-records[section_title]
+
+|Copy Number |The copy number of the item |This is an optional field.
+Libraries may use it to identify duplicate copies under one title.
+|=======================================================================
+
+.Circulation
+[width="99%",cols="30%,42%,28%",options="header",]
+|=======================================================================
+|Setting |Description |Notes
+|Circulate? |Indicates whether the item can circulate or not |Leave it
+as "YES", unless the item is with a circulating collection (shelving
+location), but should not be circulated. If the shelving location's
+Circulate? attribute is "NO", this field will have no effect. But the
+"NO" value in this field will block circulating when the shelving
+location's Circulate? is "YES".
+
+|Holdable? |Indicates whether the item is holdable or not |Leave it as
+"YES", unless the item is with a holdable collection (shelving
+location), but holds should not be allowed on this particular item. If
+shelving location's Holdable? is "NO", this field will have no effect.
+But the "NO" value in this field will block holds when shelving
+location's Holdable? is "YES".
+
+|Age-based Hold Protection |Allows libraries to restrict holds to be
+picked up at a range of libraries |Sitka provides two sets of rules:
+x_month_within_single_branch and x_month_among_multi_branch. The former
+allows holds to be picked up at the item's circulating library only for
+x months, while the latter at libraries sharing the same parent with the
+circulating library, e.g. all branches of a library system or all
+single-branch libraries within a federation. In general, use the former
+if you are a single_branch library and want to restrict holds to your
+own library, or if you are a branch of a multi-branch library system and
+want to keep the holds at your own branch. Use the latter if you are a
+multi-branch library system and allow items to fill holds picked up at
+all your branches, but not to go out of your system.
+
+|Floating? |This functionality must be configured by Sitka |If Sitka has
+not configured floating groups for you, leave the field blank.
+
+|Loan Duration |Indicates whether an item uses the Short, Normal, or
+Long loan duration attached to its circulation modifier or shelving
+location set up in the circulation policy. |Each circulation
+modifier/shelving location may have three loan durations, corresponding
+to these three values. Use 'Normal' if only one loan period is used.
+Please contact Co-op support if you need multiple loan durations for one
+circulation modifier/shelving location.
+
+|Fine Level |Indicates whether an item uses the Low, Normal, or High
+fine level attached to its circulation modifier or shelving location set
+up in the circulation policy. |Each circulation modifier/shelving
+location may have three fine levels, corresponding to these three
+values. Use 'Normal' if only one fine level is used. Please contact
+Co-op support if you need multiple fine levels for one circulation
+modifier/shelving location.
+
+|Circulate as Type |Media type |When circulation policy is controlled by
+the media type in MARC records, this field can be used to override the
+MARC media type for individual items. It can also be used for statistics
+purpose.
+
+|Circulation Modifier |An identifier used for applying circulation
+policies and/or statistical purposes |A shared list of circulation
+modifiers displays in the dropdown list for all libraries. Each library
+selects circulation modifiers to use and for each selected circulation
+modifier the library may define its own circulation policy.
+|=======================================================================
+
+.Miscellaneous
+[width="99%",cols="30%,42%,28%",options="header",]
+|=======================================================================
+|Setting |Description |Notes
+|Alert Message |This message will show up when the item is retrieved or
+checked in or out |
+
+|Deposit? |Indicates whether the checking out item requires a deposit or
+not |
+
+|Deposit Amount |Amount required as a deposit for the item |When the
+item is checked out a bill for this amount is automatically created in
+the patron account.
+
+|Price |Price of the item |The price entered is used when the system
+generates lost or damaged bills for the item.
+
+|OPAC Visible? |Indicates whether the item is visible in the OPAC or
+not. |Leave it as 'YES', unless the item is with an OPAC visible
+collection (shelving location), but should not be displayed on OPAC. If
+OPAC Visible? is "NO" for the shelving location, this field will have no
+effect. But the "NO" value in this field will hide the item, if OPAC
+Visible? is "YES" for the shelving location.
+
+|Reference? |Indicates whether the item is reference or not |This flag
+can be used for setting up circulation policies or statistics purpose.
+
+|Quality |Indicates the quality of the item |Quality is used to
+determine whether an item can be used to fill a hold. By default, only
+Good items will be used to fill holds. Co-op support strongly recommends
+leaving the quality of the item as Good for all items, unless you want
+to block holds on the item.
+|=======================================================================
+
+The Statistics Column is filled with the copy statistical categories
+created by your library or federation. For information on creating copy
+statistical categories see link:#lsa-statcat[section_title]
+
+[[cat-edit-holding]]
+Editing holdings
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+In Evergreen, the call number is kept in a separate record, called
+volume or call number record. (These two terms are used interchangably
+in this document.) Call number can not be edited on Copy Editor. Items
+under the same title with the same call number share the same call
+number record. Copy records and volume records can be edited at several
+places.
+
+You may edit items and call numbers on Item Status screen if you know
+the item's barcode. Go to Search > Search for Copies by Barcode F5 OR
+Circulation > Show Item Status by Barcode F5 OR Cataloguing > Display
+Item F5. Scan or type in the barcode. Once the item is displayed,
+highlight it.
+
+To edit the copy record, click Actions for Cataloguers > Edit Item
+Attributes. The item will be loaded into Copy Editor. Edit the fields
+that you want to and click Apply after each editing. Click Modifiy Copy
+when all editing is done.
+
+To edit the call number, click Actions for Cataloguers > Edit Volumes.
+The call number is loaded in a popup window. Edit, then click Modify to
+save.
+
+screenshot of volume editor
+
+________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Tip*
+
+Evergreen does not allow two identical call numbers for one title, one
+library. You will be prompted if an existing identical call number is
+detected. You may select Auto-Merge on Volume Collision checkbox to
+avoid the prompt. The copies will be put under one call number.
+
+Since copies and call numbers are separate records, their
+owning/circulating library may be different. Item's circulating library
+should match where it is usually located.
+________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+You may edit an item and/or its call number after finding it on the
+catalogue. Simply click Edit beside the barcode on the record details
+screen.
+
+screenshot of copy editor
+
+You may edit call number and barcode on this screen. If you do not wish
+to edit any item attribute, click Re-barcode/Update Items,otherwise
+click Edit then Re-barcode to load the item in Copy Editor for further
+editing.
+
+screenshot of copy editor
+
+You may edit copy and call number records on Holdings Maintenance
+screen. To edit a call number, highlight the line with call number and
+click Actions for Selected Rows > Edit Volumes.
+
+screenshot of edit volume
+
+To edit the copy record, highlight the line with barcode and click
+Actions for Selected Rows > Edit Items.
+
+screenshot of eidt copy
+
+____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Tip*
+
+You may edit multiple records of the same type displayed on the same
+screen at one time by highlighting all of them using Ctrl or Shift key
+and mouse click.
+
+screenshot of edit mutilpe records
+____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+[[cat-copy-templates]]
+Copy Templates
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=KWHbgTklduU[*Sitka Training Video - Copy
+Templates (3:41)*]
+
+link:#cat-create-template[Creating Copy Templates]
+
+link:#cat-use-template[Using Copy Templates]
+
+link:#cat-export-template[Exporting Copy Templates]
+
+link:#cat-import-template[Importing Copy Templates]
+
+Copy templates allow you to set up default values for selected item
+attributes. For example, all adult fiction items use the same shelving
+location and circulation modifier. You may set up a copy template for
+adult fiction with the appropriate shelving location and circulation
+modifier values. When you apply this template, the two fields will be
+automatically filled with the default values. Use of templates enhances
+item creation and helps ensure consistency in records.
+
+You can create a copy template directly under Admin > Local
+Administration > Item Attribute Editor OR you can create a copy template
+when editing an existing item record.
+
+On Copy Editor, select/enter value for each required item attribute
+sharing the same default value and click Apply for every edit. Once
+done, click Save.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+Enter a template name at prompt and click OK.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+Template is saved. Click OK.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+Back on Copy Editor, you can now see your new template from the dropdown
+menu. Click Close to exit the Copy Editor.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+To use a copy template when cataloguing/editing items, on Copy Editor,
+choose the template from the dropdown list as shown on the above screen
+and click Apply beside it. Those fields covered by the template will
+display with green coloured background.
+
+Templates are saved on Evergreen server, but only viewable by the staff
+account that created them. To share templates with other staff, you
+will need to export them and the other staff to load them into their
+accounts.
+
+To export copy templates, go to Copy Editor. Click on Export in the
+Template line on top of the screen. This will export all of your
+templates.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+Select where you will save the template on your computer, name the file
+and click Save.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+Click OK on the confirmation prompt.
+
+You could email the file to others, or save it to a flash drive and pass
+it to them, so that they can import the file to their Evergreen
+accounts. Alternatively, your colleagues may log into Evergreen with
+their accounts on your computer to import the templates.
+
+Load Copy Editor. Click on Import.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+Navigate to where the template file is located, select it and click
+Open.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+Choose "Yes" on the prompt to import the file.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Caution*
+
+If you choose "No", you will see the following prompt. The templates are
+not loaded, but may show up on the template dropdwn list. Re-load the
+Copy Editor. They will disappear.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+Click OK on the confirmation prompt.
+
+_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Tip*
+
+When importing copy templates, existing templates will be kept, new ones
+will be added to them. If a duplicate template is detected, Evergreen
+will prompt you to choose whether to replace the existing one.
+_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+[[batch-update-item-status]]
+Batch Updating via Item Status screen
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Ahry7DaRWyI[*Sitka Snippet Video - Batch
+Update Using Item Status (3:22 )*]
+
+As discussed in the Circulation chapter, the Item Status (F5) screen is
+a very useful interface for all library staff. Cataloguers can perform
+multiple tasks from this screen. The example below demonstrates updating
+shelving location on multiple items. You can batch update any editable
+field in item records following this procedure. See
+link:#circulation-item-status[section_title] for more details. Press F5
+on your keyboard or use the dropdown menu to access Item Status screen.
+Scan all barcodes into Barcode field or use Upload From File if your
+barcodes are saved in a file. Select the barcodes you wish to edit using
+the Shift or Ctrl on your keyboard. Select Actions for Cataloguers >
+Edit Item Attributes. The Copy Editor window opens. Note all the
+barcodes, different call numbers and shelving locations are displayed.
+Select required shelving location and click Apply, just as if editing
+one record. Click Modify Copies at bottom right of screen. This will
+modify all the shelving locations on your selected set of items.
+
+[[cat-replace]]
+Replacing a barcode
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=6BHhcjFRRs4[*Sitka Snippet Video -
+Replace Item Barcode (0:58)*]
+
+The simplest way to replace an item's barcode is to use Replace Barcode
+function on the Circulation or Cataloguing dropdown menu. You will be
+prompted to enter the old barcode and then the new barcode. Replace
+Barcode function is also available on Holdings Maintenance screen.
+
+The Edit function (the link beside item's barcode) on Record Details
+screen on the catalogue allows you to update barcode, too.
+
+You may also replace a barcode on the Item Status (F5) screen.
+
+Access the Item Status screen and scan or enter the existing barcode you
+wish to edit.
+
+Highlight the item row and select Actions for Cataloguers or Actions for
+Selected Items and chooseReplace Barcode.
+
+image:media/edit-7.png[screenshot of staff client]
+
+Scan or enter new barcode and click OK.
+
+image:media/edit-8.png[screenshot of staff client]
+
+Your item is displayed on Item Status screen with its new barcode, and
+the old barcode will no longer retrieve the item.
+
+image:media/edit-9.png[screenshot of staff client]
+
+[[cat-spine-labels]]
+Spine Labels
+~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+link:#spine-label-roll[Spine Labels - Single Label Roll]
+
+link:#spine-label-sheet[Spine Labels - Label Sheet]
+
+Open the Item Status interface.
+
+Circulation > Show Item Status By Barcode
+
+Scan the barcode(s) of all the items you would like to print spine
+labels for.
+
+Ensure the Trim List (20 rows) box is not checked or only 20 items will
+listed.
+
+Highlight all the line items.
+
+screenshot of spine labels
+
+Click Actions for Cataloguers or Actions for Selected Items and
+choosePrint Spine Label.
+
+screenshot of spine labels
+
+Use the Spine Label settings to adjust the label to match your physical
+label's dimensions. Click Re-Generate to see your changes.
+
+These fields are sticky by workstation so the values you set should
+appear by default.
+
+screenshot of spine labels
+
+Click Preview and Print.
+
+Click Print Page.
+
+screenshot of spine labels
+
+Depending on your printer settings the spine labels will automatically
+print to your spine label print or you will get a pop up asking you to
+select a printer.
+
+https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=CYVJ-TBuhlA[*Spine Labels - Label Sheet
+(1:40)*]
+
+Open the Item Status interface.
+
+Circulation > Show Item Status By Barcode
+
+Scan the barcode(s) of all the items you would like to print spine
+labels for.
+
+Ensure the Trim List (20 rows) box is not checked or only 20 items will
+listed.
+
+Highlight all the line items.
+
+screenshot of spine labels
+
+Click Actions for Cataloguers or Actions for Selected Items and
+choosePrint Spine Label.
+
+screenshot of spine labels
+
+Click Preview and Print.
+
+screenshot of spine labels
+
+Open your spine label template in a work processor.
+
+Contact https://bc.libraries.coop/request-support/[Co-op Support] if you
+require assistance setting up a template.
+
+Click inside the document so the cursor appears in the middle of the
+first "box".
+
+In Evergreen highlight the first label and copy ( +Ctrl+ +C+ ) the text.
+
+screenshot of spine labels
+
+Paste ( +Ctrl+ +P+ ) the label into the template.
+
+Repeat steps 8 and 9 until all the labels appear in the template.
+
+Adjust the formatting, fonts, etc. of the labels as desired.
+
+Print the page on your label stock.
+
+[[cat-transfer]]
+Transferring holdings
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+There are times when you need to move copy records from one title record
+to another, or move copies from one volume to another under the same or
+another title record. This lesson will demonstrate the steps required to
+achieve a transfer. The critical step is to ensure that you first mark
+the destination record. In some cases you may also need to first create
+a volume record. Co-op support recommends you read through the process
+first before starting, as each scenario has different characteristics.
+
+When you want to transfer all items under one call number/volume to
+another title or another branch under the same title, you may use
+Transfer Volume. Evergreen will transfer both call number and all copies
+under it to the new title or branch.
+
+Find the destination or target record and go to Holdings Maintenance.
+Highlight your library or branch, right click and select Mark Library as
+Volume Transfer Destination. Or you may click Actions for Selected Rows
+> Mark Library as Volume Transfer Destination.
+
+image:media/edit-4.png[screenshot of staff client]
+
+Find the volume record you need to transfer on Holdings Maintenance.
+Highlight it, right click and select Transfer Volumes to Previously
+Marked Library.
+
+image:media/edit-4-1.png[screenshot of staff client]
+
+Confirm the transfer and click Transfer.
+
+image:media/edit-3.png[screenshot of staff client]
+
+Refresh the screen to see the change, if not automatically done.
+
+__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Tip*
+
+To do the transfer step, you may also find the item(s) on Item Status
+(F5) screeen. Click Actions for Catalogurs > Transfer Volumes to
+Previously Marked Library. Both call number and copies will be
+transferred to the previously marked destination. You may transfer
+mulitple records at one time by highlighting all of them.
+
+If the destination title/branch has a volume with the same call number
+label, the copies will be merged into that volume.
+
+Holds under the title, volume or copy will not be transferred with the
+holdings. They need to be manually transferred to the destination
+record.
+__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+Sometimes you may need to transfer copy records only from one volume to
+another, e.g. transferring a copy from reference collection to
+circulating collection using a different call number, or transferring
+one copy from one branch to another that already has a voume and copy.
+
+To transfer a copy record to another volume, find your target record in
+the catalogue, and go to Holdings Maintenance screen.
+
+Find your target volume on the record and right-click on it and select
+Mark Volume as Item Transfer Destination. Or you may select Actions for
+Selected Rows > Mark Volume as Item Transfer Destination.
+
+Go to the catalogue and find the record containing the copy you wish to
+transfer and go to Holdings Maintenance. Highlight the record you wish
+to transfer. Select Actions for Selected Rows > Transfer Items to
+Previously Marked Volume. Alternatively, you may do this transfer step
+by scanning the item barcode into Item Status (F5)screen and making the
+same choice from Actions for Cataloguers menu. The screenshot below is
+from Item Status screen.
+
+image:media/edit-2.png[screenshot of staff client]
+
+Confirm the transfer details and click Transfer.
+
+______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Tip*
+
+You may transfer multiple copies to a previously marked volume on the
+Item Status (F5) screen by scanning all copies into the screen,
+selecting all to highlight, then choosing Actions for Cataloguers >
+Transfer Items to Previously Marked Volume.
+______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+Sometimes you may need to transfer copies only to a title/branch that
+does not yet have a volume record or you wish to use a different call
+number label. For example, you want to transfer one of the two copies
+from one branch to another that does not have a copy. In this scenario
+you will need to first create a zero copy volume record (a volume record
+without any copy record under it) on the destination library/branch.
+
+Find the destination record in the catalogue and go to Holdings
+Maintenance. Highlight the library/branch and right click to select Add
+Volumes or select Actions for Selected Rows > Add Volumes
+
+Add your call number without a barcode, then click either Create with
+Defaults or Create then Edit to create the volume record.
+
+Back on Holdings Maintenance screen, highlight this volume record and
+Mark as Item Transfer Destination as described above.
+
+Find the copy record to be transferred either via Holdings Maintenance
+or Item Status screen as above described, and select Transfer Item to
+Previously Marked Volume.
+
+______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Tip*
+
+Depending on your workflow, you can use the transfer function to
+transfer Pre-Cat records to MARC records. You may need to first create a
+volume record on the destination title record, or at minimum mark a
+volume as Item Transfer Destination, then go to Item Status (F5) screen
+to transfer your Pre-Cat item to the destination record.
+
+You may edit the Circulating Library field on Copy Editor to move a copy
+to another branch. But the call number's owning library will remain
+unchanged. On Holdings Maintenance screen, the item will be displayed
+under the call number's owning library.
+______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+[[cat-del-holdings]]
+Deleting holdings
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=7fFNsdy1Ktg[*Sitka Snippet Video -
+Delete Copies Via Item Status (3:35)*]
+
+https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=1GMSj74nCqU[*Sitka Snippet Video -
+Delete Copies Via Copy Buckets (3:20)*]
+
+When adding items to the catalogue, you need to have a bibliographic
+record first, then you create a volume and copy record. When you delete
+holdings you need to follow the reverse order. You need to delete copy
+records first. By design and Sitka's configuration, Evergreen will also
+attempt to delete the volume and bibliographic record. These records
+will be deleted if they are not used by other copies/volumes. If you
+delete your library's last copy, the volume record will be deleted
+together with the copy. If this is also the last copy for the title (no
+other libraries have a copy), the bibliographic record will be deleted,
+too. So for most cases, you just need to delete the copy records only.
+If possible, Evergreen will delete the volume and bibligraphic records
+automatically. Occasionally you may want to delete an "orphan" volume
+(without any copy) or bibliographic (without any volume) record.
+
+If you have the item in hand, the quickest way to delete an item is to
+scan the item into Item Status screen, accessible a couple of ways.
+
+Select Search > Search for copies by Barcode, or select Cataloguing >
+Display Item (B), as shown here. Alternatively, press F5 on your
+keyboard.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+Select the item (s) and choose Actions for Cataloguers > Delete Items.
+
+Click OK.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+In this example the alert for last copy is configured. Make appropriate
+choice based on workflow.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+Click OK. Item, volume and MARC record are all deleted in this example,
+because there was only one copy and volume record attached to this MARC
+record.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+You may also delete copy records from the Holdings Maintenance view.
+
+Find the title on the catalogue and display it on record details screen
+by clicking the title link on the result list.
+
+Select Actions for this Record > Holdings Maintenance
+
+Click on your item barcode row and select Actions for Selected Rows >
+Delete Items. Note that in this example there are 11 consortial items
+attached to this MARC record.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+Confirm deletion at prompt by clicking Delete. Item is deleted. In this
+case your library’s volume record is also deleted, as Evergreen has been
+configured to do so. This Sitka wide setting helps keep the consortial
+database free of orphaned volume records. The MARC record, with other
+consortial holdings, is left intact.
+
+_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Tip*
+
+If the item being deleted is the sole copy on this MARC record, the
+volume and MARC record will be automatically deleted as explained above.
+If you have Evergreen configured to alert on last copy,
+link:#lsa-library-settings[Alert on empty bib records], the alert would
+be presented. The alert and the effect of deleting the sole copy on a
+MARC record are not affected by how you delete the last copy.
+
+You may also delete copy records by utilizing buckets. The advantage to
+this method is that you can keep a record of items deleted by not
+emptying or deleting the bucket. Please see
+link:#working-copies-copybucket[section_title] for more information.
+
+It is Sitka best practice to review status and owning library of items
+to be deleted. Co-op support recommends you do this by configuring the
+column picker, see link:#start-column-picker[Column picker], to display
+status field and owning library field. If an item is not in an ideal
+state for deleting, for example checked out, you should not delete the
+item until that status is resolved. Mis-scans can result in another
+library's item presented on your screen. Confirming owning library is
+correct will prevent errors. Careful review of your screen for duplicate
+scans is also recommended.
+
+Transferring your last copy on a bibliographic record to another volume
+record on a different bibliographic record will also automatically
+delete your original volume record, due to the Sitka wide configuration
+mentioned above. If your volume and copy were the last holdings attached
+to the original bibliographic record, the bibliographic record is also
+deleted upon item transferring.
+_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+Occasionally you may want to delete a volume record without copies
+attached to it. For example, you may have created a volume record, but
+did not add a copy to it. To delete it, you need to find the title. Go
+to Holdings Maintenance. Highlight the "orphan" volume record, select
+Actions for Selected Rows > Delete Volumes. If this is the last volume,
+the bibliographic record will be deleted, too.
+
+You may have created/imported a MARC record, but did not use it for your
+copy. In such a scenario you may delete the record. Find the title on
+the catalogue, select Actions for This Record > Delete Record. The
+record will be deleted.
+
+If you do not see any copies under the record, but are prompted that the
+record can not be deleted, very likely there are "orphan" volume records
+still under the title. You need to go to Holdings Maintenance to locate
+and delete the volume records. The MARC record will be deleted when you
+delete the last volume.
+
+____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Tip*
+
+Deleted MARC records can be retrieved and undeleted if you know the
+record's database id. Go to the dropdown menu Cataloguing > Retrieve
+Title via Database ID. Type in the record id. Once the record is
+displayed (with red coloured background), select Actions for This Record
+> Undelete Record to undelete it.
+
+Co-op support regularly cleans up volume records without copies and
+bibliographic records without copies or volumes.
+____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+[[copy-alert]]
+Copy Alerts
+-----------
+
+This lesson explains when you might use a copy alert, how to create one
+and how to remove one. It also illustrates what copy alerts look like
+in the Item Status screen, at checkin, and checkout.
+
+Copy alerts are a useful type of alert for a physical copy of an item.
+ For example, you might create a copy alert when one piece of a
+four-part kit is missing. You might use a copy alert when you are
+checking out an item to a patron and notice that the spine label needs
+to be replaced. You might create a copy alert when you notice that an
+item has been damaged. When the item is checked in or out, the alert
+will pop up on the screen.
+
+Select Search > for copies by Barcode, or use the keyboard shortcut F5.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+Scan in the item barcode.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+Select the row, and under Actions for Selected Items, select Edit Item
+Attributes.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+The item will be loaded into Copy Editor. Add an Alert Message, click
+Apply and Modify Copies.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Tip*
+
+Copy alerts must be manually removed. Follow the same process to remove
+a copy alert.
+________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Tip*
+
+It is possible to add or remove copy alerts to multiple items by
+scanning them into the Item Status screen. At Step 3, instead of
+selecting one item, you can select all of the items you wish to change
+by highlighting the first item in the list, holding down the Shift key
+and clicking on the last item. To select several, non-sequential items,
+hold down the Ctrl key and click on the items you wish to select.
+_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+If you scan this item in the Item Status screen, you will see the copy
+alert.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+When this item is checked out, the copy alert will look like this:
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+When this item is checked in, the copy alert will look like this:
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+[[copybucket]]
+Copy Buckets
+------------
+
+https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=4W-zw-jieos[*Sitka Snippet Video - Copy
+Buckets (3:48)*]
+
+Buckets is the name for a batch change functionality in Evergreen, or
+for a function that groups records in one place. Batch changes allow
+you to group together many records and enact changes on them all at
+once, instead of individually editing them. Buckets can also be used to
+create pull lists. Buckets allow you to track and work with your
+materials in arbitrary ways and more easily collaborate with others.
+
+This chapter will demonstrate a variety of ways in which you can manage
+your copies with Buckets.
+
+Currently there are copy and title record buckets. You may work on copy
+records with Copy Buckets and MARC records with Record Buckets.
+
+Some possible uses for buckets are batch editing items, deleting items,
+and grouping like items temporarily to change their status or to create
+bibliographies and pull lists. While you can batch edit records a
+variety of ways in Evergreen, using common Windows functions such as
+select all and edit, buckets are useful for keeping records together
+over a period of time. For example, if you scan 20 items into the Item
+Status screen you can batch edit or delete from there by selecting all,
+but you have to enact those changes right then while records are all
+together on the screen. By utilizing Evergreen’s bucket functionality,
+you can create a bucket and add records to that bucket, and they stay
+there until you are ready to work with them, whether that be immediately
+or days later. Adding items to a bucket is like creating and saving a
+query. The record being in a bucket does not affect normal library
+functions such as circulation, as being in a bucket is not a status.
+
+Buckets can be shared or private, and are associated with a login.
+
+_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Tip*
+
+Deleted records are not automatically removed from buckets. It is
+recommended that you always display Deleted? field in Bucket View.
+
+When a bucket is retrieved, all information about the records in it is
+transferred to the workstation. It consumes the computer's resources. It
+is recommended that a copy bucket contain no more than a few hundred
+records.
+_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+[[bucket-add-copy]]
+Adding Copy Records to Copy Buckets
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+You may create a copy bucket by going to the dropdown menu Edit > Copy
+Buckets. Click New Bucket. You may also create a new bucket when
+attempting to add an item to a bucket.
+
+image:media/bucket-27.png[screenshot of staff client]
+
+To add items to a bucket, select or create a bucket in the Bucket View
+first. Scan item barcodes into the box in the Pending Copies pane shown
+on the above screen. Select Add All or Add Select to move pending items
+to the selected bucket in the lower pane. Use Ctrl or Shift with mouse
+clicking to select multiple items.
+
+Copy record is now in the selected bucket.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+You may also add copy records to a bucket when they are displayed on
+some other screens, such as Holdings Maintenance, Item Status, Check In
+and Items Out in patron accounts. Add Items to Buckets is included in
+the actions list on these screens.
+
+To add a copy record to a copy bucket from the Holdings Maintenance
+screen, highlight the item and choose Actions for Selected Rows > Add
+Items to Buckets.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+You can either add to an existing bucket, or a new bucket.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+To add copy records to a copy bucket on the Item Status (F5) screen.
+From the Item Status screen select required record(s) and choose Actions
+for Cataloguers > Add to Item Bucket, as shown below, or choose Actions
+for Selected Items > Add to Item Bucket.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+__________________________________________________________________________________
+*Tip*
+
+You may highlight multiple items and add all of them to a copy bucket at
+one time.
+__________________________________________________________________________________
+
+[[working-copies-copybucket]]
+Working with Copies in a bucket
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+Once you have your records in a bucket there are a variety of functions
+you can do from within that bucket.
+
+One of the most common functions is to batch edit records. This example
+demonstrates batch editing the shelving location of a handful of copy
+records.
+
+Access your Copy Bucket view by choosing Edit > Copy Buckets, or
+Cataloguing > Manage Copy Buckets.
+
+Select appropriate bucket from drop down menu.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+When bucket is displayed, click Edit Item Attributes.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+The Copy Editor window opens. Note all the barcodes, different call
+numbers and shelving locations are displayed.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+Select required shelving location and click Apply, just as if editing
+one record.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+Click Modify Copies at bottom right of screen.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+All your items’ shelving locations have been changed.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Tip*
+
+This screenshot shows some of the other functions you can do from within
+a Copy Bucket. If you are deleting items it is good practice to display
+Item Status field from the link:#start-column-picker[Column picker,] and
+confirm suitable status of items to be deleted.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+[[copybucket-remove-record]]
+Removing a Copy from a Bucket
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+To remove a record from a bucket, on Bucket View, select the item and
+click Remove Selected from Bucket.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+You may move some items to the pending area by selecting them and
+clicking Add Selected beside Remove Selected from Bucket. You may
+temporarily remove these items from the bucket to apply changes to the
+remaining items, then move these items back to the bucket once the
+editing is done. Or you may retrieve another copy bucket and add the
+items to it.
+
+[[copybucket-retrieve-shared]]
+Retrieving Shared Buckets
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=KX3EmaiY4Og[*Sitka Snippet Video -
+Shared Buckets (2:00)*]
+
+Access copy bucket management screen by going to Edit > Copy Bucket.
+
+In drop down menu beside Choose a bucket… select Retrieve shared bucket.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+Enter bucket number as told to you by the bucket creator and click OK.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+The requested bucket is displayed. Note bucket number and owning library
+is displayed.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+You are now able to work with the records in the bucket.
+
+_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Tip*
+
+Bucket numbers are assigned by Evergreen. Bucket number and owner are
+displayed whenever a bucket is retrieved.
+_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+[[import]]
+Adding Bibliographic Records to the Database
+--------------------------------------------
+
+When there is no matching MARC record for your item, you may import one
+from the Z39.50 sources or the files supplied by your vendors. Or you
+may create a new MARC record if you can not find one from other sources.
+
+[[MARC_Z39.50]]
+MARC Records via Z39.50 Interface
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=nkjOfMfUyFc[*Sitka Training Video -
+Z39.50 (5:20)*]
+
+It is good practice and Sitka policy to check the Evergreen database for
+existing records before importing a record. You may search the catalogue
+first. Or you can configure the Z39.50 screen to search the Evergreen
+database as well as multiple Z39.50 targets at once. If searching
+Evergreen via the Z39.50 screen and you find a record, it is best
+practice and Sitka policy to then find that record in the catalogue and
+attach your holdings to it. If you have confirmed that there is no
+record in Evergreen that matches the item in your hand, but have found a
+record in another database, simply import the new record into Evergreen
+and then attach holdings.
+
+[[Import_Z39.50]]
+Importing Records via Z39.50 Interface
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
+
+To access Z39.50 interface, select Cataloguing > Import Record from
+Z39.50
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+Select single or multiple pre-configured Z39.50 targets from the list.
+Note that most free targets do not have a User name or Password field.
+Some free targets and the subscription services held by some Sitka
+libraries require login. Once you have made your choices, click Save as
+Default to save the services you usually search and any user names and
+passwords you have entered. They will be automatically selected the next
+time you open the Z39.50 screen.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+Fill in preferred search criteria and click Search. Note that the active
+search fields will change depending on the targets you select. Different
+targets may support different search types. For instance, Keyword and
+Subject will only be active if the local catalogue is selected. When you
+select multiple targets to search, an active box may apply to only one
+target.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+Search results are displayed in the lower pane. You may click on Hide
+Top Pane to make more space for the result list. You may Fetch More
+Results, if applicable. Information about each retrieved record appears
+on a separate summary line, with various columns of information. If a
+cover image is available, it will display as well. The Service column
+indicates where the record was found. If “native-evergreen-catalog” is
+listed in this column, the record is in Evergreen. You may view MARC
+records, choose to import or overlay MARC records. This example
+demonstrates importing a record.
+
+To import a record, choose the record from the results list that you
+would like to import. You should view the record first by choosing MARC
+View. When you are sure you have chosen the correct record to import,
+click Import.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Tip*
+
+Sitka has profiled certain fields, primarily 9xx fields, to be
+automatically stripped when records are imported through Z39.50. The
+default fields that are stripped are 906, 923, 925, 936, 948, 955, 959,
+963. Please contact Co-op support if you would like to see additional
+fields automatically stripped.
+________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+The record opens in the MARC Editor. From here you can edit fixed and
+bibliographic fields. Note that you may also select Fast Item Add and
+input call number and barcode data from this screen. Once your edits are
+complete, click Import Record.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+Copy Editor will be loaded for you to edit the item record.
+
+Once the item record is saved, the imported MARC record and the newly
+created item record will be displayed on Record Details screen.
+
+If you did not utilize Fast Item Add as described above, the Copy Editor
+will not be loaded. Instead, the newly imported record will be displayed
+in a new tab. You may now attach holdings as described in
+link:#add[???].
+
+[[Overlay_Z39.50]]
+Overlaying Records via Z39.50 Interface
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
+
+There are times when it is necessary to overlay an existing MARC record
+in Evergreen with a better MARC record from a Z39.50 target. This lesson
+will demonstrate the steps required to achieve an overlay. Overlaying a
+MARC record replaces an existing MARC record and leaves all holdings,
+and corresponding holds, active circulations, bills, and fines intact.
+As overlay affects all libraries sharing a MARC record it is critical
+that this procedure be done judiciously and correctly. Please refer to
+Sitka’s cataloguing policy, Co-op support, or your library’s cataloguing
+mentor, if in place, for more information about this process and its
+effect on the shared database.
+
+You must first identify the MARC record in Evergreen, which you wish to
+be overlaid. You do this by “marking” it for overlay. The
+marked-for-overlay effect is temporary for a login session, and only one
+record at a time can be marked. When you mark another record, the
+previous record is unmarked. Once a record is marked, it stays marked
+until it is overlaid, or another record is marked, or you log out of
+Evergreen. Therefore, you can mark and overlay one record at a time,
+following through the entire process to completion before moving on to
+another record.
+
+Select Cataloguing > Search the Catalogue, Search > Search the Catalogue
+or press F3 to search Evergreen for the record that needs to be
+overlaid. It is best practice to start with a fresh search screen so
+that all prior searches are cancelled. This ensures the correct title
+record is opened and marked.
+
+Click on title link to display the record details. It is important that
+you ensure the record is fully loaded on screen and displaying title
+information for the correct record in the top Record Summary area.
+
+Select Actions for this Record > Mark for Overlay. Record is now
+“marked”. You will see "Record with TCN xxxxxxxx Marked for Overlay"
+displayed at the bottom of the screen.
+
+staff client screenshot
+
+https://goo.gl/kMu9iX[*Sitka Snippet Video - Overlay via Z39.50 (4:23)*]
+
+Go to Import Record from Z39.50 to find a target record as described in
+link:#Import_Z39.50[section_title]. This record should be a fuller and
+better catalogued record than the one you are overlaying. You may select
+potential records on the list based on the summary. Click on MARC View
+to see the full MARC record. Go back to Result View to highlight your
+selected target, then click Overlay. You are then given the opportunity
+to edit the record before overlaying.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+The record opens in the MARC Editor. From here you can edit fixed and
+bibliographic fields. Note that you may also select Fast Item Add and
+input call number and barcode data from this screen. Once your edits are
+complete, click Overlay Record. Below screen shows the MARC record in
+Flat Text Editor.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+Next, you are asked to confirm that the marked record is the one you
+want to overlay. You can view the record at this time. Confirm that this
+is the correct record by clicking Overlay.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+You have successfully overlaid the record. The Copy Editor will be
+loaded if you have chosen to Fast Add Item, or you will see the
+bibliographic record displayed in a new tab.
+
+_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Tip*
+
+You may search the Evergreen database by searching Local Catalogue on
+the Z39.50 interface. On the result list, you may highlight a record and
+mark it as the overlay target by using the Mark Local Result as Overlay
+Target button. Before you do so, you need to view the full record to
+make sure this is the correct record to be overlaid. If you wish to
+check holdings, you may use the Show in Catalgoue button to display the
+record in the catalogue in a new tab.
+_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Caution*
+
+If the record that you wish to overlay contains local information, e.g.
+tag 590 or 690, you need to manually add these tags to the record you
+intend to import. You may add the tags before overlaying. Or, you may
+import the record first, then merge the two records. When merging the
+records, the two records will be displayed side-by-side on screen, which
+makes it easier to copy over the local tags from the non-lead record.
+________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+[[marc_batch_import]]
+MARC Batch Import
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+[[upload-marc-import]]
+Import MARC Records
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
+
+If the title records you need are not already in the Evergreen database
+it is possible to upload vendor-supplied MARC files into Evergreen. Each
+file may contain one or more MARC records. During the uploading process,
+Evergreen matches each record in the file with existing records in
+Evergreen based on pre-defined match points called Record Match Sets.
+Records without matches may be imported directly into the catalogue.
+Records with matches must be examined by cataloguers. Due to the nature
+of Sitka's shared database, the Co-op suppport strongly advises against
+allowing Evergreen to select a merge target and cautions you to adhere
+to instructions for selecting a match as outlined in this chapter.
+
+During the importing process, all records in the file are first uploaded
+to the server and kept outside the catalogue as a queue, which is
+viewable on the MARC Batch Import/Export > Inspect Queue screen.
+Cataloguers can view both the incoming and existing matching records to
+decide which one to use. You may merge the records with either the
+incoming or existing record as the lead while keeping some MARC tags in
+both records. Overlay/Merge Profile decides how two records are merged.
+
+_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Caution*
+
+Do not load a MARC file of more than 1000 records, as the importing
+process can time out. If you have more than 1000 records, please break
+into multiple files.
+_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+Holding records can be created if the incoming MARC records contain
+holding information in pre-defined format. Contact Co-op support about
+the acceptable format if you want to load holding records.
+
+All records in a queue can be exported to a CSV file or printed in
+non-MARC format (emailing is not available yet). All records imported
+from a single queue can be added to a Record Bucket.
+
+____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Tip*
+
+There are some settings, namely Record Display Attributes,Record Match
+Sets, Merge/Overlay Profiles and Import Item Attributes on this screen
+that are reserved for Sitka server administration. You should not
+attempt to edit them as they affect all bibliographic records.
+
+Record Display Attributes set what fields will display on Inspect Queue
+screen, once a file of records have been loaded. Important descriptive
+MARC tags and control numbers are selected to display.
+
+Record Match Sets are profiles set up by Sitka to allow for different
+match points to be used when loading records. The default profile is
+SitkaMatch. It matches on the 901c (record id), 010a (LC Control
+Number), 020a (ISBN), 022a (ISSN), or 035a (System Control Number). It
+is used in the majority of record loads. The other profiles are only
+used to load special records. Please contact Co-op support for which
+profile to use if your records require a set of different match points
+to load.
+
+Merge/Overlay Profiles control how the incoming and existing MARC
+records are merged. Two profiles have been created for all Sitka
+libraries to use: Merge Using INCOMING Record and Merge Using EXISTING
+Record.
+
+* Merge Using INCOMING Record: all tags in the INCOMING record will be
+brought into the final record. Tags: 092, 590, 595, 690, 852 and 856 in
+the ORIGINAL record will be preserved in the final record. The rest will
+be removed.
+* Merge Using EXISTING Record: all tags in the ORIGINAL record will be
+kept. Tags: 092, 590, 595, 690, 852 and 856 in the INCOMING record will
+be brought into the final record. The rest will be removed upon merge.
+
+These profiles ensure local data in these six fields in a merged MARC
+record is never overwritten, and holding records (in tag 852) can be
+loaded to either the existing MARC record or with the incoming record.
+
+Import Item Attributes are profiles set up by Sitka to allow importing
+of item records with vendor supplied MARC records. The vendor will need
+to send item level information in a local MARC tag and subfields (eg.
+9xx or 852), and this information can be mapped into item records when
+the bibliographic records are loaded. Please contact Co-op support if
+you are interested in loading item records with your bibliographic
+records.
+____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+[[importing_upload]]
+Uploading MARC Record Files
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
+
+Select Cataloguing > MARC Batch Import/Export
+
+MARC batch import interface
+
+The MARC File Upload screen opens.
+
+You may create a new queue for the file you are to upload or append the
+file's records to an existing queue. To create a new queue, type in a
+name for your file in the box beside Create a New Upload Queue. To
+append records to an existing queue, choose a queue from the dropdown
+list beside Add to an Existing Queue.
+
+________________________________________________________________
+*Caution*
+
+Do not use "/" or "\" (slash or backslash) in import queue name.
+________________________________________________________________
+
+MARC upload interface
+
+Leave SitkaMatch in Record Match Set box.
+
+_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Caution*
+
+The NoMatch profile matches records on tag 901$c only, and should only
+be used after a false match is detected using SitkaMatch as described
+below. Sitka cataloguing policy strives to avoid record duplication so
+Sitka policy requires batch imports use SitkaMatch first.
+_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+Choose a Holdings Import Profile from the dropdown list if your MARC
+records include holdings information and you wish to load it.
+
+______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Caution*
+
+You need to contact Co-op support for holding information format before
+asking your vendors to include it in the MARC records.
+______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+Select a Record Source from the dropdown. The default is oclc, but
+choose the one that best matches your file (eg. ULS, Whitehots etc.)
+Contact Co-op support if you need to load records for non-physical
+items, such as an e-record collection like ebrary.
+
+You do not need to choose a Merge Profile now.
+
+Check Import Non-Matching Records box to automatically import records
+without matches into the catalogue.
+
+______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Caution*
+
+Co-op support strongly advises that you do not select other import
+options. These options allow Evergreen to automatically merge records
+before you inspect them. It is best practice to inspect the potentially
+merged records first.
+______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Tip*
+
+If you want to view your incoming records first without importing any,
+you may leave Import Non-Matching Records box unchecked. You will be
+able to view all records in the file on Inspect Queue and import
+all/selected records with/without matching records there.
+______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+You do not need to select any of the checkboxes in Copy Import Actions
+now.
+
+Click Browse... to choose the source MARC file on your computer, then
+click Upload. Depending on the size of the file, it may take a while for
+the uploading to finish. Once it is finished, records will be displayed
+in Inspect Queue view. You may continue to examine and import records in
+the queue as described below. Or you may come back later to find the
+queue to examine and import the records.
+
+______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Tip*
+
+Records in a queue are saved on the server, but outside the catalogue.
+By importing, you bring the records into the catalogue.
+______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+[[importing_merge]]
+Importing and Merging Records from Queues
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
+
+If you want to import records from MARC files already uploaded, go to
+Cataloguing > MARC Batch Export/Import, then click Inspect Queue. Click
+the queue that you wish to examine and import records from. The Queue
+Summary screen will open.
+
+If you continue to import records right after uploading the MARC file,
+the Queue Summary screen is loaded after you upload the file.
+
+The Queue Summary shows the total number of MARC records in the queue,
+and items contained in these records, if any, how many of them have been
+imported, and how many of them encountered an error when Evergreen
+attempted to import them.
+
+Queue Filter allows you to display only the selected type of records in
+the table below.
+
+A selected number of records (10, 20, 50, 100) are displayed per page.
+Use the dropdown list beside Records per Page to select your preferred
+number. Use Previous and Next to flip over the page.
+
+The records in the queue can be exported in non-MARC format via the
+method selected from the Export Queue As dropdown list. (Exporting via
+email is not currently functional.)
+
+If you imported items with the MARC records, you may view them by View
+Import Items.
+
+You may export non-imported records to a MARC file by clicking Export
+Non-Imported Records. You may work on these records and load them later.
+
+You may add all imported MARC records in the queue to a Record Bucket by
+using Copy to Bucket.
+
+MARC upload interface
+
+You can view both incoming and existing match records, if any, to
+determine which record to use. The links in View MARC column lead you to
+the incoming records, while records in the Matches column link to
+existing records. A blank in the Matches column means no match record
+has been found.
+
+Click the blue coloured View MARC link to view the incoming record. You
+may edit it before importing by clicking Edit. Once editing is complete,
+click Save Changes. Click Return to go back to the Record Queue screen.
+MARC upload interface
+
+On Record Queue screen click the blue coloured Matches link to view the
+match record. This takes you to the following Import Matchesscreen.
+
+On the Import Matches screen, you will see the match record's ID number
+and some non-MARC information. Click View MARC. The existing MARC record
+is displayed in view mode. You can not edit it. Once done, click Return
+to go back to the Import Matches screen. MARC upload interface
+
+_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Note*
+
+Match Score is the total score from all matched fields specified in the
+Record Match Set.
+
+This list shows the matching points and the scores assigned to each
+point of SitkaMatch. Match scores are used to indicate how well two
+records are matched. For example, if two records contain the same value
+in tag 901$c, highly likely they are matches. So tag 901$c is assigned a
+very high score. If the incoming and existing records match on tag 010$a
+and 020$a, the match score will be 600.
+
+image:media/upload-7.png[MARC upload interface]
+_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+Upon inspecting both incoming and existing record(s), if the match
+record is a true match but a brief record, you may mark the match MARC
+record as a merge target by selecting the checkbox in front of the
+record in the Merge Target column. Click Back to Import Queue once done.
+
+image:media/upload-7a.png[MARC upload interface,scaledwidth=80.0%]
+
+If the match record in Evergreen is a true match but a full record,
+Sitka policy requires you to use the existing record instead of
+importing another. Do not import the record.
+
+However, if the incoming record contains local information in tags 092,
+590, 595, 690, 852 or 856 that you want to bring into the existing
+record, such as loading holding records to existing MARC records, you
+need to mark the match record as a merge target. In this scenario you
+would use the Merge Using EXISTING Record merge profile as described in
+next step. If you are interested in loading holdings/item information,
+please contact Co-op support to set it up.
+
+If you have marked a merge target, the record is shown as selected once
+you are back on the Record Queue screen.
+
+You may inspect other records on the list. Once finished inspecting the
+list, click Import Selected Records under Queue Actions.
+
+image:media/upload-8.png[MARC upload interface]
+
+You are prompted to select import options. Make your choices and click
+Import.
+
+MARC upload interface
+
+For Merge Profile, choose one of the following based on which record
+should be the lead.
+
+* Merge Using INCOMING Record: uses the incoming record as the lead.
+Information in existing record in tags 092, 590, 595, 690, 852
+(holdings) and 856 will be kept.
+* Merge Using EXISTING Record: uses the existing record in the catalogue
+as the lead. Information in the incoming record in tags 092, 590, 595,
+690, 852 (holdings) and 856 will be kept. Use this profile when you
+attach holdings in your MARC file to existing Evergreen MARC records.
+
+If you have marked a merge target, you do not need to select any further
+import options. The marked target will be merged. If you have not
+already imported non-matching records you can now select Import
+Non-Matching Records.
+
+___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Tip*
+
+Merge On Exact Match (901c), Merge On Single Match, and Merge On Best
+Match are designed to allow Evergreen to programmatically select the
+best match. Due to the nature of Sitka's shared database, Sitka support
+strongly advises against allowing Evergreen to select a merge target and
+cautions you to adhere to instructions for selecting a match as outlined
+above.
+___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+Do not use Best/Single Match Minimum Quality Ratio or Insufficient
+Quality Fall-Through Profile at this time.
+
+If you have On Order brief item records and wish to overlay them with
+full item records loaded via the MARC records, you need to select
+checkbox Auto-overlay On-order Cataloguing Copies. Evergreen will
+overlay the items having matching circulating library and On-order
+status.
+
+If you load items for multiple branches or a branch other than your
+working location, you need to select checkbox Use Org Unit Matching in
+Copy to Determine Best Match, too.
+
+_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Caution*
+
+The option Auto-Overlay In-process Acquisitions Copies should only be
+used if you are working with on-order line items created in the
+Acquisitions module. For more details please see
+http://docs.sitka.bclibraries.ca/Acq/current/html/copy_overlay.html[Auto-Overlay
+In Process Acquisitions Copies]
+_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+Once the records are imported, the display is back on Queue Summary
+screen. You will see the Import Time column is filled in for the
+selected records. The imported record id is displayed in Imported As
+column.
+
+______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Tip*
+
+A record can be imported only once.
+
+Sitka has profiled certain fields, primarily 9xx fields, to be
+automatically stripped when records are imported through Batch Import.
+The default fields that are stripped are 906, 923, 925, 936, 948, 955,
+959, 963. Please contact Co-op support if you would like to see
+additional fields automatically stripped.
+______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+[[inspect-queue]]
+Managing Queues
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
+
+Click Cataloguing > MARC Batch Import/Export. The default screen is
+Import Records. Click Inspect Queue tab to manage and view existing
+queues used in MARC Batch Import.
+
+Under Inspect Queue you can click on an existing queue to view and
+import records that have already been queued for importing or simply
+view records that have already been imported.
+
+To manage the queues, you can batch delete from the Inspect Queue
+interface by checking the box in front of the queue name and then
+choosing Delete Selected.
+
+Inspect Queue interface
+
+[[cat-minimum-MARC]]
+Sitka’s Minimum MARC record
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+As there is an approved minimum level for original MARC records, the
+following may assist you when creating original MARC records in
+Evergreen. For more detailed information on MARC standards, the Library
+of Congress has the authoritative website at http://www.loc.gov/marc/
+
+Here is an example of a MARC record that meets and exceeds minimum
+cataloguing standards for a book in a series.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+*Standard Numbers.*
+
+_010_ Library of Congress Control Number (LCCN) is the control number
+for MARC records distributed by the Library of Congress. Can often be
+found in the Cataloging in Publication (CIP) information on verso page
+of a book. Can be useful searching number.
+
+_020_ International Standard Book Number (ISBN) is a unique number
+assigned to items by publisher. Can be 10 or 13 digit number. Sitka
+support and training team recommend searching Evergreen and Z39 targets,
+by both numbers, if present on item, before proceeding to original
+cataloguing. When cataloguing an item, if both numbers are present,
+enter both in separate _020_ tags.
+
+_022_ International Standard Serial Number (ISSN) is a unique number
+assigned to a serial title.
+
+_024_ Universal Product Code (UPC) is a twelve digit number often
+assigned to sound recordings and videos.
+
+_028_ are Publisher Control Numbers, formatted numbers used for sound
+recordings, printed music, and videorecordings.
+
+*Classification Numbers.*
+
+Evergreen does not display call numbers from the shared MARC record, but
+the data is useful for searching, matching, and assessing quality of a
+MARC record. Evergreen uses each library’s volume record for local call
+number display, and will give you the option to auto-fill your number
+from the MARC record if you want to use that call number as yours.
+
+_05X_ are standard classification (call) numbers that are, or can be,
+present in a MARC record. The most common are the __050__, which is the
+Library of Congress Classification Number (LCC), assigned by the Library
+of Congress, and the __055__, which is the Canadian LCC.
+
+_082_ is the Dewey Decimal Classification number (DDC).
+
+_090_ and _092_ are tags reserved for a library’s local call number.
+This data is not used by Evergreen for call number display, but you will
+often see data there from a different library whose system may use the
+MARC record for call number display.
+
+*Title.*
+
+_245_ tag contains all the important title information and General
+Material Designations (GMD). _245_ subfields _a_ and _b_ are title and
+sub-title respectively, _245c_ contains the statement of responsibility,
+and _245h_ is for approved GMDs. Note, for RDA records, the GMD is no
+longer used; instead the tags of 336, 337 and 338 are used (see below).
+
+*Edition Statement.*
+
+_25X_ tags contain important descriptive information about the item
+being described. This information includes edition statement, imprint
+and other publication source information.
+
+*Publication Information.*
+
+_260_ tag and subfields __a__, place of publication, __b__, name of
+publisher, and __c__, year of publication, contain critical publication
+information and should be as complete as possible. When assessing record
+matching the _260_ tag should always be considered. Note, for RDA
+records, the 264 tag (with a second indicator of 1) most often is used
+instead of the 260.
+
+*Physical Description of Item.*
+
+_300_ tag is used to physically describe an item as completely as
+possible.
+
+*Content, Media and Carrier type (RDA only).*
+
+_336, 337, 338_ tags are used for RDA records only. The fields of
+content, media and carrier collectively replace the GMD (245$h). For
+336, subfield $a is content term and $2 rdacontent. For subfield 337, $a
+is media term and $2 is rdamedia. For 338, $a is carrier term and $2 is
+rdacarrier. http://www.loc.gov/standards/valuelist/index.html[See here
+for appropriate RDA terms.]
+
+*Series Information.*
+
+_440_ and _490_ are used to describe relevant series. __440__ was
+officially made obsolete in 2008, but you will still find it used in
+records that predate 2008, but for correct, current series cataloguing
+use the _490_ tag.
+
+*Notes.*
+
+_5xx_ tags are useful, keyword searchable notes tags, which assist in
+description and retrieval of items. Use the _500_ tag for a note that
+cannot be placed in any other _5xx_ tag as per MARC standards.
+
+*Subjects.*
+
+_6xx_ contain subject headings that follow standards for personal,
+topical, geographical, and genre terms. Use _690_ for local,
+non-standard subject headings.
+
+Hovering your mouse over a MARC tag in MARC Edit view presents a short
+description of the tag and its intended use. You can also hover over a
+subfield and retrieve textual information about the subfield’s intended
+use.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+[[cat-new-MARC]]
+Creating New MARC Records
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+It is best practice, and Sitka policy, to search Evergreen, Z39.50
+sources, or, in some libraries, a vendor file of MARC records, before
+using a MARC record template for original cataloguing. You can create
+new MARC records in Evergreen by using MARC templates that exist in
+Evergreen. Original cataloguing should be done in Evergreen only if
+there is no record available in any of these previous sources.
+
+For information about working with MARC records see link:#marcedit[???].
+
+To access MARC templates select Cataloguing > Create New Marc Record.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+The MARC Template screen opens. Click into drop down menu field to see
+available templates. Note you can select a workstation default here.
+Templates are available for book, music, audio, video and serial and are
+in both the AACR2 and RDA standards.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+Select appropriate template and click Load.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+A blank MARC record will load. In this example we have chosen a book
+template so MARC leader coding is for textual materials.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+Complete the MARC record as per Sitka policy. You can add and delete
+tags and subfields as required. See link:#marcedit[???].
+
+Click Create Record.
+
+The record is created and will open up in your tab in the current
+default view. If you did not utilize Fast Item Add, you may now attach
+holdings as described in link:#add[???].
+
+[[cat-nonphysical]]
+Cataloguing non-physical resources
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+Ordinary bibliographic records are only visible in the OPAC when
+holdings records are attached, but it is also possible to catalogue
+non-physical resources such as websites, online journals, or
+downloadable audiobooks. The steps below describe how to catalogue a
+non-physical resource so it appears in OPAC searches.
+
+______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Note*
+
+These instructions are for adding individual records. To upload a batch
+of records (e.g. from an e-book subscription) please contact Co-op
+support. For libraries that subscribe to _OverDrive_ Co-op support
+creates and updates bibliographic records automatically.
+______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+Locate, import, or create a bibliographic record as described in the
+preceding chapters.
+
+Open the record in MARC Edit view. Select Actions for this Record > MARC
+Edit.
+
+Add an 856 tag to the MARC record. Place the cursor in the desired
+location and press +CTRL+ +Enter+ to add an empty row. Enter the tag
+number (856). You must set the first indicator to 4, and the second
+indicator to 0 or 1. The indicators cannot be left blank. For
+information about indicators see
+http://www.loc.gov/marc/bibliographic/bd856.html.
+
+Add applicable subfields from the table below. Press +CTRL+ +D+ to add a
+new subfield ( +CTRL+ +I+ on MAC OSX).
+
+[width="99%",cols="16%,42%,14%,28%",options="header",]
+|=======================================================================
+|Subfield code |Description |Example |OPAC display
+|*$u* |Required; the URL or link to the resource
+|_http://www.linktoresource.ca_ |Appears as a link in the OPAC display;
+the link text is the URI unless subfield $y is specified
+
+|*$y* |Optional; a display label for the link |_Click for access_
+|Appears as the text of the link instead of the URL defined in $u
+
+|*$z* |Optional; a public note providing more information about the
+resource |_library card and password required_ |Appears in parentheses
+to the right of the link
+
+|*$9* |Required; your library code |BBI |Not displayed in the OPAC but
+required for the record to be included in searches scoped to your
+library
+|=======================================================================
+
+After the tag 856 is added, the record will be displayed as search
+result on OPAC for the library in $9. The image below shows a sample 856
+tag and the corresponding OPAC display. This record would appear in OPAC
+searches of the Bowen Island Public Library catalogue (BBI).
+
+image:media/transcendent-1.png[Sample 856 tag]
+
+image:media/transcendent-2.png[Screenshot of OPAC display of
+transcendent record]
+
+___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Tip*
+
+A separate 856 tag should be added for each library that catalogues the
+resource. Multi-branch libraries may add a single 856 using the code for
+the library system (e.g. SCRL, BCREK) if all branches are allowed to
+access the resource.
+
+Evergreen creates an invisible call number for each tag 856 with
+subfield 9 with the code in subfield 9 as the owning library. This call
+number, like a copy record, is used for scoping the seach result to a
+selected library. To remove a non-physical record from your library's
+collection, you need to delete your library's tag 856. If your library's
+tag 856 is the only one, you may delete the MARC record. See
+link:#deleting-marc[Deleting MARC records] for more information.
+___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+[[marcedit]]
+Editing and Maintaining MARC records
+------------------------------------
+
+The appropriate title information displayed on OPAC, such as format
+icons for text, moving pictures and sound relies on correct MARC coding
+in the leader, and 007 and 008 fields, as do OPAC search filters, such
+as publication date, item type, or target audience. Bibliographic
+records matching and de-duplicating also rely on correct MARC coding and
+consistency in use and content in particular MARC tags, so the ability
+to edit and manage MARC records is key to maintaining database
+integrity.
+
+Evergreen allows you to edit MARC tags, sub-fields, and indicators, as
+well as an easy entry box to edit parts of the leader and 008 fields on
+a built-in form called __MARC Editor__. Besides, it also provides a text
+based editor, which allows you to easily add or remove tags, and/or edit
+the fields. But you need to pay close attention to the position of the
+tags, indicators and the spacing required to preserve the record
+structure.
+
+[[marcedit-editing-marc]]
+Editing MARC Records
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+To edit a MARC record, retrieve it on the catalogue. Once record is
+displayed on Record Details screen, select Actions for this Record >
+MARC Edit. screenshot of staff client
+
+________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Tip*
+
+You can set MARC Edit as default view by clicking Actions for this
+Record > Set bottom interface as Default. To revert to your default
+display from a different display, choose Actions for this Record > Reset
+Display.
+________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+MARC record is displayed. Use scroll bar on right to move record up and
+down on screen.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+Depending on your preference, you can select Stack subfields to change
+the way subfields are displayed.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+Now the subfields are in separate rows.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+To add or remove rows, or replace tags, click the Help button to find
+the keyboard shortcuts. Move the cursor to appropriate positon, then use
+the keyboard shortcut.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Caution*
+
+Ctrl + F6 and CTRL + F7 may erase the content in exisiting 006 or 007
+tag. It is strongly recommended you add these tags on the Flat-Text
+Editor.
+_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+To work with the data in a tag simply click or Tab into required field.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+To call up the diacritic palette you can use keyboard shortcut: CTRL S.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+To edit indicators, click or Tab into required field and right click to
+view correct indicators and enter appropriate data.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+Once your edits are complete, click Save Record.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+To access the Flat-Text Editor, select the checkbox in front of it. To
+switch back to the form editor, de-select it.
+
+_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Tip*
+
+On Flat-Text Editor, each line stands for a tag. The tags, indicators
+and their values are at fixed positions. If there is no value at a
+position, you will see "\" as a spacing taker. For positionally defined
+tags, such as 007 or 008, you will see "\" in the field content area,
+too. You need to replace it with the content you want to put in, when
+necessary.
+_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+[[cat-MARC-leader]]
+MARC Record Leader and MARC fixed field 008
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+Parts of the leader and the 008 can be edited in the _MARC Editor_ via
+the fixed field editor box displayed above the MARC record in default
+MARC Edit view, and at top of record in Flat-Text Editor view.
+Information about the leader and the 008 can be found on the Library of
+Congress’s MARC Standards page at http://www.loc.gov/marc/
+
+To edit the fixed fields, it is easiest to use default MARC Editor view
+and click on the name of the field. In Flat-Text Editor view, you must
+place the cursor at the correct position in the number to edit. When you
+click on the field name , e.g. Date1, what you type will appear in the
+box. When you click on the field box itself, you have to backspace your
+cursor to the very beginning of the box in order to type, because there
+are space takers in these positionally defined fields. Right-clicking in
+certain fields such as Type, BLvl, Form, Audn, and Lang will show a
+drop-down menu of possible choices.
+
+_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Tip*
+
+Co-op support advises that Evergreen's fixed field editor requires 4
+spaces be input into ills box that corresponds to position 18-21 in the
+008. Use your space bar to enter spaces required to meet this
+convention, or your edit to the illustrated box will not be saved in the
+008. Once the four spaces are filled, the value will automatically show
+up in the 008 and will be saved. Contact Sitka support if you have any
+questions.
+_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Tip*
+
+The format filter (eg. Books, E-Books, Audiobooks, Videos etc.) and
+format icons in the OPAC rely on accurate coding in the Leader, 008 and
+007. Please see the format filter and icon specifications in
+link:#marcedit-formatfilter-icons[section_title]
+_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+Retrieve and display record in MARC Edit view as described in
+link:#marcedit-editing-marc[section_title].
+
+Click into any box displayed in the fixed field editor. In this example
+we are editing the first position, the Type or Format box, to describe
+the format of the resource, textual material, by use of an “__a__”.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+Right-clicking in the box will show a list of possible values (eg. BLvl,
+Type, Form Audn, and Lang). Choose from this list to populate the box.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+You can press the Tab key or use the mouse to click through to each
+field, and can delete and add text as required by backspacing or
+highlighting existing text and over typing. Here the publication date is
+being edited; OPAC searches filtered by date rely on correct coding in
+the 008.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+Click Save Record.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+The OPAC icon for textual materials is displayed as in the example
+below.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+A correctly coded moving image record for a video or DVD would look like
+this in the MARC Edit view, with g entered in the Type field.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+The record would display in the catalogue with the movie icon and
+searches filtered by Item type, video recordings, would retrieve this
+record.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+[[marcedit-formatfilter-icons]]
+Format Filters and Format Icons
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+Format Filter Groups and Format Icons are configured at the Sitka level.
+
+* item_type (Type) is Leader position 06
+* bib_level (BLvl) is Leader position 07
+* item_form (Form) is 008 position 23
+* vr_format is 007 position 04
+* sr_format is 007 position 03
+
+The format filter is used by the OPAC to allow staff and patrons to
+limit their search by material format. The following table shows the
+fixed fields associated with each format filter value.
+
+.Format Filters
+[width="100%",cols="25%,75%",options="header",]
+|=======================================================================
+|Label |Fixed Fields
+|*All Audiobooks* |item_type(i)
+
+|*All Books* |item_type(a,t) AND bib_level(a,c,d,m) but NOT
+item_form(a,b,c,f)
+
+|*All Videos* |item_type(g)
+
+|*Audiobooks (electronic)* |item_type(i) AND item_form(o,q,s)
+
+|*Audiobooks (physical)* |item_type(i) AND sr_formt(l,f)
+
+|*Books (electronic)* |item_type(a,t) AND bib_level(a,c,d,m) AND
+item_form (o,q,s)
+
+|*Books (large print)* |item_type(a,t) AND bib_level(a,c,d,m) AND
+item_form(d)
+
+|*Books (physical)* |item_type(a,t) AND bib_level(a,c,d,m) and NOT
+item_form (a,b,c,f,o,q,s)
+
+|*Kits and Mixed Materials* |item_type(o,p,k)
+
+|*Maps* |item_type(e,f)
+
+|*Music (CD, cassette)* |item_type(j)
+
+|*Music Scores* |item_type(c,d)
+
+|*Pictures* |item_type(k)
+
+|*Serials and Magazines* |bib_level(b,s)
+
+|*Serials and Magazines (electronic)* |bib_level(s) AND item_form(q,o,s)
+
+|*Software and Video Games* |item_type(m)
+
+|*Toys, Puzzles and Equipment* |item_type(r)
+
+|*Videos (electronic)* |item_type(g) AND item_form (o,q,s)
+
+|*Videos (physical)* |item_type(g) AND NOT item_form (o,q,s)
+|=======================================================================
+
+The format icons show in the search results and record display in the
+catalogue. The following table shows the fixed fields associated with
+each format icon.
+
+.Format Icons
+[width="100%",cols="25%,75%",options="header",]
+|=======================================================================
+|Label |Fixed Fields
+|*Video (shown if format, eg. vhs, dvd, is unknown)* |item_type(g) and
+NOT vr_format(v,s,b)
+
+|*E-video* |item_type(g) and item_form(o, s, q)
+
+|*DVD* |vr_format(v)
+
+|*VHS* |vr_format(b)
+
+|*Blu-ray* |vr_format(s)
+
+|*Audiobook (shown if format, eg. cassette, disc, is unknown)*
+|item_type(i) and NOT item_form(o,q,s) and NOT sr_format(a,b,c,d,e,l,f)
+
+|*E-audiobook* |item_type(i) and item_form(o,q,s)
+
+|*CD Audiobook* |item_type(i) and sr_format(f)
+
+|*Cassette audiobook* |item_type(i) and sr_format(l)
+
+|*Phonograph audiobook* |item_type(i) and sr_format(a,b,c,d,e)
+
+|*Book* |item_type(a,t) AND bib_level(a,c,d,m) and NOT item_form
+(a,b,c,d,f,o,q,r,s)
+
+|*E-Book* |item_type(a,t) AND bib_level(a,c,d,m) AND item_form (o,q,s)
+
+|*Large print book* |item_type(a,t) AND bib_level(a,c,d,m) AND
+item_form(d)
+
+|*Braille* |item_type(a) AND item_form(f)
+
+|*Kit or mixed material* |item_type(o,p)
+
+|*Map* |item_type(e,f)
+
+|*Music (shown if format, eg. cassette, disc, is unknown)* |item_type(j)
+and NOT sr_format(a,b,c,d,e,f,l)
+
+|*Phonograph music* |item_type(j) AND sr_format(a,b,c,d,e)
+
+|*CD music* |item_type(j) AND sr_format(f)
+
+|*Cassette music* |item_type(j) AND sr_format(l)
+
+|*E-music* |item_type(j) AND item_form(o, s, q)
+
+|*Music score* |item_type(c,d)
+
+|*Picture* |item_type(k)
+
+|*Serial or magazine* |bib_level(b,s) and NOT item_form (o, s, q)
+
+|*E-Serial or magazine* |bib_level(b,s) AND item_form (o, s, q)
+
+|*Software or video game* |item_type(m)
+
+|*Online* |bib_level(i) AND item_form (o, s, q)
+
+|*Toys, puzzles or equipment* |item_type(r)
+
+|*Picture* |item_type(k)
+
+|*Microform* |item_form(a,b,c)
+|=======================================================================
+
+[[merging-marc]]
+Merging Bibliographic Records in Evergreen
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+https://goo.gl/91kp4e[*Sitka Training Video - Merge Duplicate
+Bibliographic Records (7:31)*]
+
+This lesson will demonstrate merging bibliographic records in the
+catalogue. A common application for this functionality is to replace
+brief records with full records. You will only need to do this if you
+are unable to locate a full record in a Z39 target and therefore cannot
+overlay the brief record on import, or you need to preserve the local
+information in the record to be overlaid and want to import the record
+first and copy over the local information on the merging screen. The
+full record may have been added to the database by another Sitka
+cataloguer, or you may have created a MARC record in the database
+yourself.
+
+Any volume and copy records or holds associated with the brief record
+will be transferred to the full record upon merging.
+
+Create a bucket for the records you wish to merge (see
+link:#bucket-create-record-buckets[section_title] for detailed
+instructions). In the examples below the bucket is named __Horse
+Books__.
+
+Identify records to be merged and add them to the bucket (see
+link:#bucket-adding-records[section_title].
+
+Retrieve the bucket by selecting Edit > Record Buckets or Cataloguing >
+Manage Record Buckets.
+
+Click Merge All Records.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+Select one record as the Lead Record, which would be the better quality
+full record, and click Merge. In this example record # 100879689 is the
+Lead Record. Note that if you wish to edit the lead record, e.g. copying
+over local information from the non-lead record, you may select the Edit
+Bib radio button to do it before clicking Merge.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+The brief record has been subsumed by the full record, and all of the
+volumes, copies and holds associated with the brief record are now
+attached to the full record.
+
+____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Tip*
+
+Note some of the options in the record merge screen. You can remove a
+record from consideration here, view or edit the bibliographic record,
+and view attached holdings. If the non-lead record has tags for local
+information, such as 590 and 690, you need to add them to the lead
+record before merging.
+____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+[[deleting-marc]]
+Deleting MARC records (bibliographic or title records)
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+Due to cascading record deletion on sole copies, you may find you do not
+need to delete MARC records very often, as Evergreen does this for you.
+
+Remember that Sitka has Evergreen configured to always delete a MARC
+record when the only copy attached to it is deleted and you can only
+delete a MARC record if there are no holdings attached to it in the
+database. This may happen if you have imported a new MARC record in
+error, and have not attached any holdings to it, or some other error or
+conversion circumstance that leaves a MARC record in the database with
+no holdings attached.
+
+You can delete a MARC record directly from the catalogue view.
+
+Find the record in the catalogue and go to Record Details, and click on
+Actions for this Record > Delete Record.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+Confirm the deletion by checking box as indicated then click Delete
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+Click OK when prompted. Record is now deleted and inactive and only
+retrievable by a TCN (title control number) search or bibliographic
+record id (presented at deletion confirmation prompt).
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+You may also delete MARC records from a Record Bucket.
+
+_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Tip*
+
+If you delete a MARC record in error, you may immediately undelete it on
+screen by selecting Actions for this Record > Undelete Record.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+[[upload-marc-export]]
+Exporting MARC Records
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+There are times when you may want to export MARC records from Evergreen.
+Evergreen allows you to do so via the Record Bucket and the Batch MARC
+Import/Export interface. When you use the latter, you may include the
+holdings information in the MARC records. Based on Sitka's
+configuration, the holdings information will be in tag 852, including
+the copy's circulating library, shelving location, barcode, call number,
+status, and others saved in the copy record.
+
+MARC records can be exported from Evergreen in selected MARC and
+non-MARC format: MARC21, UNIMARC, MARCXML or Evergreen Record Entry. You
+need to choose one from the dropdown list. The exported records can be
+coded in either UTF-8 or MARC8.
+
+To export MARC records on Batch MARC Import/Export interface, click
+Cataloguing > MARC Batch Import/Export. The default screen is Import
+Records. Click Export Records tab to open the export interface.
+
+MARC upload interface
+
+If you want to export more than one record at a time, the records need
+to be saved in a Record Bucket or their IDs saved in a CSV file. If the
+CSV file contains other information than just record ids, specify which
+column is the record id by filling it into the Use Field Number box.
+Note that the field number starts from 0. If the second column in the
+CSV file is record id, the field number is 1.
+
+If you export one record only, you may type in the record ID directly on
+the Export interface.
+
+Once you have completed the above form, click the Retrieve Records
+button at the bottom. You will be prompted to browse the records, and
+then save them, or save them directly into a file.
+
+_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Caution*
+
+Holding records can be exported in tag 852, but this includes all item
+records across the Sitka consortium, not just your library's holdings.
+_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+To export MARC records from Record Bucket, go to Edit > Record Bucket.
+Retrieve the bucket containing the records that you wish to export.
+Click Export All Records to select the exported record format. You will
+be prompted to save the file.
+
+MARC upload interface
+
+[[bucket]]
+Record Buckets
+--------------
+
+This part of the lesson will demonstrate how to create and manage
+bibliographic record buckets. The steps used for copy buckets are
+similar. It is very important when working with buckets to ensure you
+are working with the correct type of record for the corresponding
+bucket. You cannot add copy records to bibliographic record buckets and
+vice versa.
+
+[[bucket-create-record-buckets]]
+Creating Record Buckets
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+There are two ways to create a bucket. You can either create a bucket
+first, without accessing any records, or you can access a record and
+choose to create the bucket from that view. We will demonstrate both
+methods here, beginning with creating a bucket independent of a record.
+
+Select Edit > Record Buckets or Cataloguing > Manage Record Buckets.
+
+image:media/bucket-1.png[screenshot of staff client]
+image:media/bucket-2.png[screenshot of staff client]
+
+Select New Bucket.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+Name the bucket and click OK.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+Click OK on the resulting confirmation dialogue.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+The Bucket View has changed to display your new bucket as the active
+bucket. Note the bucket is numbered, and creating owner identified.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+Note that all buckets created by this login are available in the drop
+down menu.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Note*
+
+The last option under Bucket Actions is Locate Z39.50 Matches. This
+feature allows you to search for replacement records via Z39.50 for all
+records in a bucket. If you are interested in this feature, please
+contact Co-op support.
+_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+You can also create a bucket from within a record. Search for, retrieve,
+and display any bibliographic record, then choose Actions for this
+Record > Add to Bucket.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+Select Add to New Bucket.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+Name the bucket and click OK. The results are the same as creating a
+bucket using the steps above, with the difference being the new bucket
+created on the fly now has a record in it.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+[[bucket-adding-records]]
+Adding Records to Buckets
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+Now that you have created a bucket, you can begin to add records.
+
+Search for, retrieve, and display any bibliographic record, then choose
+Actions for this Record > Add to Bucket.
+
+Select the appropriate bucket and click Add to Selected Bucket.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+If required, go back to the Record Bucket tab to confirm the action. You
+will see your bucket now contains the record.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+You can continue adding records as required.
+
+_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Tip*
+
+You may also add bibliographic records to a bucket via the F5 Item
+Status screen. Scan item barcodes into the screen, select all, choose
+Actions for Cataloguers or Actions for Selected Items and choose Add to
+Record Bucket.This will place all the bibliobgraphic records associated
+with the item records you scanned into a bucket.
+_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Tip*
+
+Note the column picker allows you to manipulate data display within the
+bucket.
+
+Clicking on List Actions > Save List CSV to File exports all column
+headers and displayed data to your computer in a text file format. This
+can be useful for creating bibliographies or similar lists.
+
+Clicking on List Actions > Print List CSV prints column headers and
+displayed data.
+_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+[[opac-catalogue]]
+Search the catalogue
+--------------------
+
+https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=lIEPR47y06E[*Sitka Training Video -
+Search the Catalogue (5:16)*]
+
+The Sitka catalogue can be accessed through the computers at your local
+library or online from any location via the Internet.
+
+For online access, visit your library's website and follow the link to
+their online catalogue, or go to
+ http://catalogue.libraries.coop/[http://catalogue.libraries.coop] for
+the BC Libraries Cooperative portal to the catalogue.
+
+[[opac-catalogue-basic-search]]
+Basic Search
+~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+The homepage for the Sitka catalogue allows you to search for books and
+other items at your library or libraries.
+
+The homepage contains a single search box for you to enter a search
+term.
+
+image:media/opac-basic-search-1.png[screenshot of OPAC basic
+search,scaledwidth=100.0%]
+
+You can select to search by:
+
+* **Keyword**—finds the terms you enter anywhere in the entire record
+for an item, including title, author, subject, and other information.
+
+* **Title**—finds the terms you enter in the title of an item.
+
+* **Journal Title**—finds the terms you enter in the title of a serial
+bibliographic record.
+
+* **Author**—finds the terms you enter in the author of an item.
+
+* **Subject**—finds the terms you enter in the subject of an item.
+Subjects are categories assigned to items according to a system such as
+the Library of Congress Subject Headings.
+
+* **Series**—finds the terms you enter in the title of a multi-part
+series.
+
+You can limit your search by format. Some of the more popular formats in
+the list are the following:
+
+* For **Books**, you can choose All Books, which includes regular print
+books, large print books, and e-books, All Audiobooks, which includes
+audiobooks on physical media and e-audiobooks, OR you can choose the
+individual format. The individual choices are: Books (physical), Books
+(large print), Books (electronic), Audiobooks (physical) or Audiobooks
+(electronic).
+* *Videos* will search all videos formats such as DVD, VHS, Blu-ray, and
+E-video.
+* *Videos (E-video)* will search for all E-videos including downloadable
+and streaming.
+* *Music* will search music on CD or other media.
+* *Serials/Magazines* will search on magazine, serial, or journal titles
+only.
+* *Software/Video Games* will search on games, databases, and other
+software.
+
+If you are using a catalogue in a library or accessing a library’s
+online catalogue from its homepage, the search will return items for
+your local library. If your library has multiple branches, the result
+will display items available at your branch and all branches of your
+library system separately. If your library participates in Interlibrary
+Connect the results may display items available across your federation.
+
+If you access the catalogue from
+http://catalogue.libraries.coop/[http://catalogue.libraries.coop], you
+may scope your search result to Sitka, regional libraries, a library
+system or a library branch by clicking into the In box on the catalogue
+homepage and selecting the target library from the drop down list. You
+will then be able to see how many copies of a title are available in all
+Sitka member libraries across Sitka, or within the regional libraries,
+or within the library system, or within the branch, depending on search
+scope selected.
+
+[[opac-catalogue-advanced-search]]
+Advanced Search
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+You can access the Advanced Search by clicking Advanced Search on the
+catalogue homepage or search results screen.
+
+The available search options are the same as on the homepage, but you
+may use one or more of them simultaneously. If you want to combine more
+than three search options, use Add Search Row button to add more search
+input rows. Clicking the X button will close the search input row.
+
+image:media/opac-advanced-search-1.png[screenshot of advanced search]
+
+The current search library is displayed in the Search Library box. If
+you accessed the catalogue from your library's homepage or catalogue
+URL, the default search library is your library or borrowing zone. If
+your library system has multiple branches or a borrowing zone that
+includes multiple libraries you can use the Search Library box to select
+different branches or libraries.
+
+If you access the catalogue from
+http://catalogue.libraries.coop/[http://catalogue.libraries.coop], your
+default search library is Sitka or the library you have selected on the
+homepage. You may use the Search Library box to select a different
+library or regional libraries, or all libraries in Sitka to search.
+
+By default, the search results are in order of greatest to least
+relevance. See
+link:#opac-catalogue-search-methodology-order-of-results[OPAC Order of Results].
+In the Sort Results box you may select to order the search results by
+relevance, title, author, or publication date.
+
+When the Limit to Available checkbox is checked search results are
+limited based on an item’s current circulation status. Titles without
+available items in the selected search library will not be displayed.
+
+When the Group Formats and Editions checkbox is checked all formats and
+editions of the same title are grouped as one result. For example, the
+DVD and the first and second print editions of __Harry Potter and the
+Chamber of Secrets__will appear together.
+
+When the Exclude Electronic Resources checkbox is checked electronic
+resources are not included in the search results.
+
+You can filter your search by:
+
+* *Format*
+* *Language*
+* *Audience*
+* *Literary Form*
+* *Publication Year*
++
+Publication year is inclusive. For example, if you set Publication Year
+Between 2005 and 2007, your result items will be published in 2005, 2006
+and 2007.
+* *Shelving Location*
++
+Shelving Locations that are not OPAC visible will not be displayed.
+
+[[opac-catalogue-numeric-search]]
+Numeric Search
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+You can access the Numeric Search by clicking on the Numeric Search tab
+on the Advanced Search screen.
+
+Use the drop-down menu to select ISBN, ISSN, Call Number, LCCN, TCN, or
+Item Barcode. Enter the information and click Search.
+
+image:media/opac-numeric-search-1.png[screenshot of numeric search]
+
+Searching by Call Number will take you to the Shelf Browser.
+
+image:media/opac-shelf-browser-1.png[screenshot of shelf browser]
+
+[[opac-catalogue-expert-search]]
+MARC Expert Search
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+You can access the Numeric Search by clicking on the Numeric Search tab
+on the Advanced Search screen.
+
+If you are familiar with the MARC standard, you may search by tag in the
+Expert Search. Enter the three-digit tag number, the subfield (if
+relevant), and the value or text that corresponds to the tag. For
+example, to search by publisher name, enter 260 b Random House. To
+search several tags simultaneously, use the Add Rowoption. Click Search
+to run the search.
+
+image:media/opac-expert-search-1.png[screenshot of expert search]
+
+[[opac-catalogue-browse]]
+Browse the Catalogue
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+You can access the browse search clicking Browse the Catalogue on the
+catalogue homepage or search results screen.
+
+Patrons and staff can browse records in the OPAC. The following fields
+are browsable: title, author, subject, and series. The browse is
+constructed by the term starting with. To browse the catalogue, click
+Browse the Catalogue, select a field to browse, and enter a keyword and
+click Browse. A list of results will appear. Click on the bolded text to
+view bibliographic records. You may move backward or forward through
+your results by clicking on Back or Next. Note your results are
+alphabetical, with results prior to your search term, and after, listed.
+
+image:media/browse-1.png[screenshot of advanced search]
+
+[[opac-catalogue-search-tips]]
+Search Tips
+~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+You do not need to enter an author's last name first, nor do you need an
+exact title or subject heading as all searches are keyword search.
+Evergreen is also forgiving about plurals and alternate verb endings, so
+if you enter __dogs__, Evergreen will also find items with __dog__.
+
+* Do not use an AND operator to join search terms.
+** An AND operator is automatically used to join all search terms. So, a
+search for __golden compass__will search for entries that contain both
+__golden__**and**__compass__.
+** Boolean operators such as __and, or, not__are not considered special
+and are searched for like any other word. So, a search for __golden and
+compass__will not return the title __golden compass__. Putting it
+another way, there are no __stop__words that are automatically ignored
+by the search engine. So, a title search for __the and or not__of (and
+in any order) yields a list of titles with those words.
+
+* Don’t worry about white space, exact punctuation, or capitalization.
+** White spaces before or after a word are ignored. So, search for
+_golden compass_ gives the same results as a search for __golden
+compass__.
+** A double dash or a colon between words is reduced to a blank space.
+So, a title search for _golden:compass_ or __golden--compass__is
+equivalent to __golden compass__. However, space matters in this case.
+No result for _golden : compass_ or __golden -- compass__.
+** Punctuation marks occurring at the front or end of a word are
+removed.
+** Diacritical marks, &, or | located anywhere in the search term but
+not within a word are removed. Words linked together by . (dot) are
+separated into two words. So, a search for __|golden.compass&__is
+equivalent to __golden compass__.
+** Upper and lower case letters are equivalent. So, _Golden Compass_ is
+the same as __golden compass__.
+
+* Enter your search words in any order. A search for _compass golden_
+gives the same results as a search for __golden compass__. Adding more
+search words gives fewer and more specific results.
+** This is also true for author searches. Both __David Suzuki__and
+_Suzuki, David_ will return results for the same author.
+
+* Use specific search terms. Evergreen will search for the words you
+specify, not the meanings, so choose search terms that are likely to
+appear in an item description. For example, the search __luxury
+hotels__will produce more relevant results than __nice places to stay__.
+
+* Search for an exact phrase using double-quotes. For example, __“golden
+compass”__.
+** The order of words is important for an exact phrase search. _“golden
+compass”_ is different than __“compass golden”__.
+** White space, punctuation and capitalization are removed from exact
+phrases as described above. So a phrase retains its search terms and its
+relative order, but not special characters and not case.
+** Two phrases are joined by AND, so a search for __“golden compass”
+“dark materials”__is equivalent to __“golden compass” *and* “dark
+materials”__.
+** To prevent
+link:#opac-catalogue-search-methodology-stemming[stemming], use double
+quotes around a single word or a phrase. So, a search for _parenting_
+will also return results for _parental_ but a search for _“parenting”_
+will not.
+
+* Use * (asterisk) as a wildcard to truncate search terms, e.g. _comp*
+golden_ may return the same results for _compass golden_ and more.
+
+* Exclude a term from the search, using _-_ (minus) . For example,
+_vacations –britain_ will search for materials on vacations that do not
+make reference to Britain.
+** Two excluded words are joined by __AND__. So, a search for _-harry
+-potter_ is equivalent to _-harry_ *and* __-potter__.
+** A + (plus) leading a term has no role and is removed. So, _+golden_
+_+compass_ is equivalent to __golden compass__.
+
+You can form more complex searches using the Advanced Search features.
+You can also click the Advanced button under the search box to build
+complex searches using Boolean operator OR to connect your terms.
+
+If no results were returned from your search, you will see Keyword
+Search Tips for expanding or altering your search.
+
+[[opac-catalogue-search-methodology]]
+Search Methodology
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+A search for _dogs_ will also return hits with the word _dog_ and a
+search for _parenting_ will return results with the words _parent_
+and__parental__. This is because the search uses stemming to help return
+the most relevant results. That is, words are reduced to their stem (or
+root word) before the search is performed.
+
+The stemming algorithm relies on common English language patterns - like
+verbs ending in _ing_ - to find the stems. This is more efficient that
+looking up each search term in a dictionary and usually produces
+desirable results. However, it also means the search will sometimes
+reduce a word to an incorrect stem and cause unexpected results. To
+prevent a word or phrase from stemming, put it in double-quotes.
+
+Understanding how stemming works can help you to create more relevant
+searches, but it is usually best not to anticipate how a search term
+will be stemmed. For example, searching for _gold compass_ does not
+return for _golden compass_ because the search does not recognize _gold_
+as a stem of __golden__.
+
+Use the wildcard * (asterisk) at the end of the word to truncate search
+term.
+
+By default, the results in the Sitka catalogue are listed in order of
+relevance, similar to a search engine like Google. The relevance is
+determined using a number of factors, including how often and where the
+search terms appear in the item description, and whether the search
+terms are part of the title, subject, author, or series. The results
+that best match your search are returned first rather than results
+appearing in alphabetical or chronological order.
+
+In the Advanced Searchscreen, you may select to order the search results
+by relevance, title, author, or publication date before you start the
+search. You can also re-order your search results using the Sort by
+dropdown list on the search result screen.
+
+[[opac-catalogue-search-results]]
+Search Results
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+The search results are a list of relevant works from the catalogue. If
+there are many results, they are divided into several pages. At the top
+of the list, you can see the total number of results and go back and
+forth between the pages by clicking the double arrow on top or bottom of
+the list or click the page number to go to that page directly. Here is
+an example:
+
+Information about the title, such as author, edition, publication date,
+call number, shelving location, status, etc., is displayed under each
+title. The icons below the title link indicate formats such as books,
+audio books, video recordings, and other formats. Hover your mouse over
+the icon, and a text explanation will show up in a small pop-up box.
+
+Clicking a title goes to the title details. Clicking an author searches
+all works by the author. If you want to place a hold on the title, click
+Place Hold to the right of the title information.
+
+Above the results list there is a Limit to Available checkbox. Checking
+this box will filter out those titles with no available copies in the
+library or libraries at the moment. Usually you will see your search
+results are re-displayed with fewer titles
+
+The Sort by dropdown list is beside the Limit to Available button.
+Clicking an entry on the list will re-sort your search results
+accordingly.
+
+If you have selected Group Formats and Editions with your search, your
+search results are grouped by various formats and editions of the same
+title. Multiple format icons may be lit up.
+
+You may refine your search results by Topic, Place, and Genre. Selecting
+one of these links on the left side of search results page narrows down
+the search results to that subject, author, or series.You may also
+refine your search by clicking the hyperlink labelled Refine My Orignal
+Search at top of search results. Refining a search this way allows you
+to add search filters such as Publication Date, Format, Language, etc.,
+to your original search.
+
+The number of available copies and total copies are displayed below the
+title details. If you are using a catalogue inside a library or
+accessing a library’s online catalogue from its homepage, you will see
+how many copies are available in that library. If the library belongs to
+a multi-branch library system you can see how many copies are available
+in all branches. If your library participates in a larger borrowing zone
+you will see the available copies at the library and the larger zone.
+
+If you are searching multiple branches or libraries you will see the
+libraries with copies listed.
+
+image:media/opac-search-results-5.png[image,scaledwidth=100.0%]
+
+Click on a title to view a detailed record of the title, including
+descriptive information, location and availability, and options for
+placing holds.
+
+The record shows details such as the cover image, title, author,
+publication information, and an abstract or summary, if available.
+
+The Record Details view shows how many copies are at the library or
+libraries you have selected, and whether they are available or checked
+out. It also displays the Call number and Copy Location for locating the
+item on the shelves. Clicking on Text beside the call number will allow
+you to send the item's call number by text message, if desired. Clicking
+the location library link will reveal information about owning library,
+such as address and open hours.
+
+Below the local details you can open up various tabs to display more
+information. You can select Reviews and More to see the book’s summaries
+and reviews, if available. You can select Shelf Browserto view items
+appearing near the current item on the library shelves. Often this is a
+good way to browse for similar items. You can select MARC Record to
+display the record in MARC format. If your library offers the service,
+clicking on Awards, Reviews, and Suggested Reads will reveal that
+additional information.
+
+You can search for additional items by an author, one of the subjects in
+the record or other works in the same series. Clicking the author,
+subject or series will start a new search in the catalogue. You can do
+this from the results page, or from within the record details view, as
+shown below.
+
+When you are viewing a specific record, you can always go back to your
+title list by clicking the link Search Results on the left of the page.
+
+If you have selected Group Formats and Editions with your search, your
+search results are grouped by various formats and editions of the same
+title under My Search Results. You can always go back to this page by
+selecting the link to Return to Grouped Search Results.
+
+You can start a new search at any time by entering new search terms in
+the search box at the top of the page, or by selecting the Another
+Search, Basic Search,or Advanced Search link at top of search results,
+depending on what screen you are on when wanting to do another search.
+
+[[opac-holds]]
+Placing Holds
+-------------
+
+Holds can be placed on a particular title or specific volume. If the
+item is available, it will be pulled from the shelf and held for you. If
+all copies at your local library are checked out, you will be placed on
+a waiting list and you will be notified when items become available.
+
+__________________________________________________________________
+*Note*
+
+Some libraries do not allow holds to be placed on available items.
+__________________________________________________________________
+
+[[opac-placing-holds]]
+Title and Volume Holds
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+Holds can be placed using the Place Hold link in the search results view
+or on the title details page. Using either of these links means that any
+copy attached to the record will fill your hold. This is generally the
+best method when requesting a book, as your hold will be filled by any
+copy of the title record you are viewing.
+
+If you want a specific issue of a magazine or a specific DVD in a set,
+you can select to place a Volume hold in the item details view just
+below.
+
+If you are not already logged into your account you will be prompted to
+login.
+
+If your library is multi-branch or participates in reciprocal borrowing
+you can chose your pickup location.
+
+You may choose to be notified by phone, text message, or email. The
+phone number set up and email in your account will automatically show
+up. If you select the Yes, by phone or Yes, by textcheckbox, you can
+supply a different phone number for this hold only. The notification
+method will be selected automatically if you have set it up in your
+account preferences. However, you may choose your method on this screen,
+overriding any default set up in your account.
+
+Once you have clicked Submit a message will appear confirming your hold
+was sucessfully placed or indicating that your hold could not be placed.
+
+You can view and cancel a hold at anytime. Before your hold is captured,
+which means an item has been held waiting for you to pick it up, you can
+edit, suspend or activate it. You need to log into your account to do
+this.
+
+[[opac-catalogue-search-results-metahold]]
+Placing Holds on Multiple Records of the Same Title
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+If you've selected Group by Formats and Edition when doing a search, you
+may place a hold on multiple records of the title but of different
+formats or editions by clicking Place Hold to the right of the meta
+record.
+
+You may select the acceptable formats on the placing hold screen.
+
+[[opac-account]]
+My Account
+----------
+
+You can access information about your account from any page in the
+Evergreen catalogue by selecting the My Account link at the top right of
+the page. Your account information includes contact information, items
+you have checked out or on hold, fines, account preferences, note left
+by the library (if any) and lists, a place for you to keep reading lists
+or other lists of items. Each of the sections in the My Accountarea is
+described in this chapter.
+
+[[opac-account-logging-into-your-account]]
+Logging into Your Account
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+Click on the My Accountlink on any search page.
+
+Enter your username or your library barcode.
+
+If this is your first time logging in, your username will be your
+library card number. You have the option to change your username on the
+Account Preferences screen.
+
+Enter your password.
+
+You should have been given a password when you received your library
+card.
+
+________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Note*
+
+If you do not have or cannot recall your password please contact your
+local library to have the password reset or use the
+link:#opac-forgot-password[Forgot Your Password] link.
+________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+Click on the Login button.
+
+[[opac-forgot-password]]
+Resetting Your Password
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=L03pBsN5u0c[*Sitka Snippet Video -
+Password Reset (1:20)*]
+
+If you have an email address recorded in your library account you can
+use the Forgot Your Password? link in the event that you forget your
+password.
+
+Click on the Forgot Your Password? link.
+
+Enter your username or barcode into the appropriate field. Note you must
+enter only one value, this is an either or choice, as some people only
+use their barcode to access their account, while others only ever use a
+user name.
+
+Click Submit.
+
+Check your email account for the Library Account Password Reset Request
+email.
+
+________________________________________
+*Note*
+
+Reset emails are sent every two minutes.
+________________________________________
+
+Open the link provided in the Library Account Password Reset Request
+email.
+
+Enter your new password in the password reset form in the browser.
+
+You must enter the password twice to ensure that you do not make a
+mistake. If the passwords match, you will then be able to log in to your
+library account with the new password.
+
+__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Note*
+
+Please contact your local library if you do not receive the Library
+Account Password Reset Request email or if you continue to be unable to
+login to your account.
+__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+[[opac-account-summary]]
+Account Summary
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+The default view when you login to your account is the Account Summary
+page. This view gives you an overview of items checked out, items on
+hold and any fines you may have. You can access any of these screens by
+clicking on relevant tab.
+
+image:media/opac-account-1.png[image,scaledwidth=100.0%]
+
+If your library subscribes to Overdrive addtional information will
+display.
+
+image:media/opac-account-2.png[image,scaledwidth=100.0%]
+
+[[opac-account-preferences]]
+Account Preferences
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+Select the Account Preferences tab at the top of the My Account area to
+access your preferences.
+
+You can change the username and password that you use to log in to your
+library account as well as the email address the library uses to contact
+you in the Personal Information tab by clicking the Change link next to
+the item.
+
+image:media/opac-account-preferences-1.png[image,scaledwidth=100.0%]
+
+Depending on your library's policy, you may request a change to your
+address by submitting a new address in your account. Library staff will
+verify it and update your account.
+
+If you need to make a change to other information, such as your phone
+number, please see the library staff.
+
+The Notification Preferences tab is where you set your preferences for
+holds notification. You can choose to be contacted by email, phone or
+text message.
+
+This is also where you can opt-out of receiving courtesy and overdue
+email notices using the Receive Overdue and Courtesy Emails setting.
+
+____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Caution*
+
+Un-checking this box means your library will not send you any emails for
+items coming due or overdue. You are still responsible for returning
+items on time and paying any applicable fines.
+____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+image:media/opac-account-preferences-2.png[image,scaledwidth=100.0%]
+
+The Search and History Preferences tab allows you to configure how many
+search results are displayed per page on your catalogue searches, your
+preferred pick up location if a member of a multi branch library,
+whether you want to keep a history of your check outs and holds, and who
+you allow to use your library account on your behalf. The check out and
+holds history is not retroactive, it takes effect once you choose to
+retain your history. You may also choose to disable a warning about
+adding items to a temporary list.
+
+[[opac-message-center]]
+Messages
+~~~~~~~~
+
+https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=4BBH95Xppgs[*Sitka Snippet Video -
+Patron Message Center (1:35)*]
+
+Select the Messages tab at the top of the My Account area to display any
+messages library staff have added to your account.
+
+image:media/opac-messages-1.png[image,scaledwidth=100.0%]
+
+An indicator will also appear in the upper right corner when you have
+new messages.
+
+image:media/opac-messages-2.png[image,scaledwidth=100.0%]
+
+You can set messages to read or unread, or delete them by selecting the
+message(s) and then choosing the desired action from the Action for
+selected messages menu and clicking Go.
+
+Unread messages appear with the subject bolded. Click on the subject to
+read the message.
+
+image:media/opac-messages-3.png[image,scaledwidth=100.0%]
+
+[[opac-account-items-checked-out]]
+Items Checked Out
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+Select the Items Checked Outtab at the top of the My Account area to
+display all of the items you currently have checked out.
+
+You can sort the list by Title, Author, Renewals Left, Due Date,
+Barcode, or Call number by clicking on the blue text. The first click
+sorts the list ascending, a second click sorts the list descending, and
+a third click returns the list to its orginal order.
+
+If you wish to renew items select the items you wish to renew and click
+Go beside Renew Selected Titles.
+
+Select the Check Out History tab to display a list of items that you
+have previously checked out.
+
+_________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Note*
+
+Check out history will only display if it has been enabled in your
+Search and History Preferences
+_________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+You can sort the list by Title, Author, Checkout Date, Due Date, Date
+Returned, Barcode, or Call number by clicking on the blue text. The
+first click sorts the list ascending, a second click sorts the list
+descending, and a third click returns the list to its orginal order.
+
+If you wish to delete individual titles from the list select the items
+you wish to delete and click Go beside Delete Selected Titles.
+
+[[opac-account-holds]]
+Holds
+~~~~~
+
+Select the Holdstab to display a list of items you have holds (reserves)
+on.
+
+You can sort the list by Title, Author, and Format by clicking on the
+blue text. The first click sorts the list ascending, a second click
+sorts the list descending, and a third click returns the list to its
+orginal order.
+
+You can use the checkbox beside each hold to select the hold and the
+Action for selected holds dropdown list to suspend, activate, or cancel
+the selected holds. You may set an activation date when you suspend your
+hold or leave the date blank and manually activate it later. A suspended
+hold will not lose its hold queue position.
+
+The Active column shows whether your hold is currently active.
+
+The Status column shows whether or not your hold is currently available
+for pickup.
+
+_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Note*
+
+Your position in the hold queue is indicated by the first number in the
+status column. For example "3 holds on 1 circulating copy" indicates you
+are third in the hold queue.
+_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+Clicking the Edit link will bring you to the hold editing screen, where
+you may suspend the hold, if not already captured, or change the
+activation date or cancellation date. If your library has multiple
+branches you may also change the pick up location.
+
+Select the Holds History tab to display a list of items that you have
+previously had on hold.
+
+______________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Note*
+
+Holds history will only display if it has been enabled in your Search
+and History Preferences.
+______________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+[[opac-account-fines]]
+Fines and Payments
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+The Fines and Payments tab, at bottom of the Account Summary screen,
+displays any fines or fees that you have accrued and the payments you
+have made. You can pay your fines at the library.
+
+[[opac-account-my-lists]]
+My Lists
+~~~~~~~~
+
+The My Lists section allows you to create, edit, share, and remove lists
+of items.
+
+Lists are lists of items that can be used for a number of purposes. For
+example, you can use lists to keep track of what books you have read, if
+you have not chosen to retain your checkout history, books you would
+like to read, to maintain a class reading list, to maintain a reading
+list for a book club, to keep a list of books you would like for your
+birthday, etc. There are an unlimited number of uses.
+
+You can see the lists you have created in the My Lists section of the My
+Account area.
+
+Best practice is to log in to your account and create a list. Select the
+My Lists tab at the top of the My Account area. In the My Account area,
+click on My Lists. In the Create New List section, enter a name for your
+list into the text box. You may also enter an optional description.
+Decide if you would like to share the contents of the list with other
+users, and click the Submit button.
+
+You can also create a temporary list from search results.
+
+If you are logged into your account, hover over Add to my list and
+select Temporary List.
+
+If you are not logged into your account click on Add to my list.
+
+A warning will appear indicating that you are adding to a temporary
+list.
+
+A number of actions can be performed on saved lists from within the My
+Lists section.
+
+*Lists can be shared:*
+
+By default, all lists are private, and you must explicitly instruct the
+system to allow others to view the contents of a list by clicking Share
+beside the list name.
+
+You can give the address (URL) of your list to anyone you want to share
+it with. In the My Listssection there is a HTML View link for every
+shared list. Click on that link and bookmark the resulting web page page
+in your browser or copy and paste the address (URL) to share your list
+as required.
+
+You can un-share a list by clicking Hide.
+
+*Lists can be deleted:*
+
+If you no longer need a list you can delete it by clicking Delete List.
+
+*Lists can be downloaded:*
+
+You can export your list to a comma delimited file by selecting Download
+CSV and following your computer's prompts to save the file on your
+computer.
+
+Log in to the online catalogue by clicking the My Account button. Search
+the catalogue for the item you would like to add to your list. Hover
+over Add to my list and select the list you would like to add the item
+to.
+
+_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Note*
+
+If you select a default list in the My List section that list will
+appear first in the list of lists.
+_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+You can also move items from a temporary list to a permanent list by
+selecting the titles in the temporary list and then clicking on the
+drop-down menu labeled Actions for these items and making the
+appropriate choice.
+
+In your account, select the My Lists tab. Click on the name of the list
+you would like to remove the item from. The items in the list will
+appear. Select the item you would like to remove from the list, click on
+Actions for these items, select Remove from list and click Go.
+
+You can place a hold on an item from your list by selecting the item,
+and choosing Place hold in the Actions for these items menu.
+
+You can annotate your lists by using the Notes feature. Click on one of
+your lists to open it and display the contents. A Notes column will
+appear, with an Edit hyperlink beside it. Click Edit, enter your note
+and click Save Notes. Your note will display in your view of your list.
+If the list is shared, the note will also display in title record on the
+webpage used to access your shared list.
+
+image:media/opac-my-lists-10.png[image,scaledwidth=100.0%]
+
+[[opac-eresource]]
+Integrated Electronic Resources
+-------------------------------
+
+Electronic resources are usually hosted by separate suppliers outside
+the library. Most of these resources have records in the library
+catalogue. Links leading to the suppliers' website are provided in these
+records. Some electronic resources can be integrated into the library
+catalogue, which allows users not only to view the records, but also to
+borrow and place holds on the resources on the library catalogue
+directly. Currently e-books and e-audio books from OverDrive are
+integrated. Users can borrow or place holds on these e-resources, and
+view their borrowed or on-hold items in their library account.
+
+When your search result includes an integrated e-book or e-audiobook
+from OverDrive, you may see the record is marked as electronic resource
+with a link going to the supplier's website.You will see two columns for
+Available Formats and Status. You may also see Place Hold on
+E-book/E-audiobook, or Check Out E-book/E-audiobook, depending on
+whether there is an available copy, instead of the Place Hold option on
+the right hand side of the results list.
+
+_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Tip*
+
+If you have already logged into your account when you do a search, you
+may see Go to E-items on Hold in a title on which you have placed a hold
+or Go to E-items Checked Out in a title already checked out to you.
+Clicking those links takes you to your account to view those items.
+_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+[[opac-check-out-eresource]]
+Checking Out E-resources
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+If there is an available copy under a title, you can click on Check Out
+E-book/E-audiobook on the search result list or record details screen.
+
+You will be prompted to log in with your library account, if you have
+not already done so.
+
+After logging in, click on the E-Items Checked Out tab in My Account.
+Click the Check Out button.
+
+Choose a format type and click Check out on the prompt. A successful
+message will be displayed which will be closed automatically. Click the
+Download button in the Formats column to download it.
+
+image:media/eresource-3.png[image,scaledwidth=100.0%]
+
+The current E-items Checked Out screen is displayed with the due
+date/time.
+
+image:media/eresource-4.png[image,scaledwidth=100.0%]
+
+[[opac-eresource-hold]]
+Placing Holds on E-resources
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+If all copies under a title are checked out, you will see a Place Hold
+on E-book/E-audiobook link on the result list or record details screen.
+
+image:media/eresource-5a.png[image,scaledwidth=100.0%]
+
+You will be prompted to log in with your library account, if you have
+not already done so.
+
+After logging in, you will be directed to the following screen.
+
+Click Place Hold and enter your email address. This address will be kept
+in the hold record at OverDrive separate from your library account. If
+you wish to use another email account to receive notification after
+holds have been placed, you need to update it in every pending hold.
+Click Place Hold again. Once the hold is placed you will receive a
+confirmation message and the E-items on hold screen will be displayed.
+
+[[opac-eresource-myacct]]
+Checked out and On Hold E-resources in My Account
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+You may view e-resources currently checked out to or on hold for you
+after you log into your account. The summary is displayed at top right
+of your screen.
+
+Click the E-items Checked Out tab to view the titles you have checked
+out and download a copy from there.
+
+Click the E-items on Hold tab to cancel an unwanted hold, check out a
+ready-for-pickup hold or suspend a pending hold. Just click the
+respective buttons and follow the on screen prompts.
+
+When suspending a hold, you have the option to suspend it for a limited
+period or indefinitely until you activate it again.
+
+If you wish to update the email address for hold notifications, you need
+to do it on OverDrive's website. Click Link to OverDrive Account to
+Change Preferences to access those settings.
+
+_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Tip*
+
+OverDrive allows users to keep some preference settings, such as
+preferred loan period. These preferences can be set up or updated on
+OverDrive's website only.
+_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+[[opac-mobileaccount]]
+Mobile PAC
+----------
+
+The Mobile PAC is designed for users with mobile or smaller screen
+devices (eg. smart phones, tablets) as well as for users with dial-up or
+slower connections. You can search the catalogue using the Mobile PAC as
+well as log into Your Account to manage items checked out, items on
+hold, and fines. You can also place holds using the Mobile Catalogue. A
+link called Mobile Catalogue at the bottom of the catalogue provides
+access to the Mobile PAC.
+
+[[opac-searching-the-mobile-pac]]
+Searching the Mobile PAC
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+Click on the Mobile Cataloguelink at the bottom of the OPAC.
+
+The Mobile PAC provides a search box with a drop down to choose the
+desired index to search: keyword, title, author, subject or series.
+
+Enter your search term. You can also set your search parameters such as
+library or branch, availability, format, and sorting. Click on
+Searchafter you have entered your search term(s).
+
+The search result screen shows the search results including
+availability, location, call number and cover images when available.
+
+Click on the title for more detailed information and to place a hold on
+the item.
+
+[[opac-mobilepac-account-information]]
+Mobile PAC Account Information
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+Choose Log in to see account details at top of the page to log into your
+account.
+
+Login in with username (or barcode) and password.
+
+You can work in 4 views: fines owing, items checked out including a
+summary of overdue items, holds placed, and search the catalogue.
+Clicking on any of the tabs will expand the view. In the expanded view
+of items checked out you can renew items, and in the expanded view of
+holds you can cancel or suspend holds.
+
+[[report-introduction]]
+Reports overview
+----------------
+
+Only users with reporting permissions (granted by Sitka Support on
+libraries' request) can access the Reports interface, but the output can
+be visible to all staff accounts. Any staff requesting reporting
+permissions must sign and submit the Reporter Privacy Agreement see
+https://bc.libraries.coop/support/sitka/reporter-privacy-waiver/
+
+The Reports interface is accessed from the Admin menu, under Local
+Administration > Reports.
+
+Screenshot of Admin menu
+
+Reports are owned by the account used to create them, though the owner
+can allow other people to view and copy (template only) them if he/she
+shares them with other staff in the library, other libraries in the
+federation, or the whole Sitka Consortium.
+
+Evergreen has very powerful reporting functionalities. It is possible to
+report on almost every field in every table in the database. Connections
+between tables are pre-made on the Reports interface. Some views are
+also provided to group together records meeting certain conditions. For
+details refer to link:#report-database[Commonly used tables and views in
+Evergreen Database].
+
+The ultimate goal of reporting is finding the records in the database
+which meet the requirements. Sometimes the result records are processed
+to some extent before they are included in the output, such as counting
+and displaying the count of the records found instead of showing the
+records themselves. The requirements include two parts: the conditions
+used to extract the records and the information to be displayed in the
+result file.
+
+Evergreen is designed to achieve the above goal by creating a template
+first. The template specifies the fields to be displayed in the result
+file (Displayed Fields) and the fields on which conditions can be
+applied (Filter Fields). For example, in an overdue template, Due Date
+in the circulation record should be a filter field so that a date can be
+given in order for the reporting program to compare and decide whether a
+checkout is overdue; while patron's names may be displayed fields so
+that staff may know who has the overdue item. In short, a template
+simply contains a list of displayed fields and a list of filter fields.
+The template can be used for multiple times. For example, the
+afore-mentioned overdue template can be used to run a report to capture
+circulation records with Due Date before 2012-01-01. It can also be used
+to capture circulations with Due Date before 2012-02-15.
+
+Once a template is ready, the next step is assigning values to the
+filter fields, for example, giving 2012-01-01 to the Due Date field.
+This process is commonly known as defining a report, or running a report
+or setting up a report. The process also schedules the report's run-time
+and frequency (one time only or on regularly basis), selects the result
+file format(s) and designates output file receivers, if preferred. The
+information provided during this step is saved in a file called "Report"
+on Evergreen. This file contains the template information and the value
+for each filter. Unfortunately, most of these contents are neither
+viewable nor editable after the file is saved.
+
+When a report starts to run, the program goes through the database and
+gathers the records that meet the conditions into a file in the selected
+format(s). This is the Output file that contains the result records.
+
+The three types of files created during the above procedure need to be
+kept separately in different folders on the Reports interface. Before
+anything, you must create at least one Template, Report, and Output
+folder as described in link:#folder[???].
+
+This chapter focuses on the movements on the Reports interface while
+demonstrating how to create reports in Evergreen. Once you understand
+how to navigate around the Reports interface, you can create your own
+reports from scratch or take advantage of Sitka's pre-packaged report
+templates. Some background knowledge of Evergreen database and database
+terminology are at the end of this chapter.
+
+[[folder]]
+Folders
+-------
+
+There are three main components used on the Reports inferface:
+Templates, Reports, and Output. Each of these components must be stored
+in a folder. Folders can be private (accessible to your login only) or
+shared with other staff at your library, other libraries in your
+federation, or with the whole Sitka Consortium. It is also possible to
+selectively share only certain folders and/or subfolders.
+
+____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Caution*
+
+A shared subfolder must be created in a shared folder. The sharing scope
+of the subfolder should be within the sharing scope of the parent
+folder. For example, a subfolder shared with Sitka Consortium should
+only be in a parent folder shared with Sitka. It should not be in a
+folder shared with your library only. Though creating shared subfolders
+in unshared folders or a subfolder with the sharing scope exceeding its
+parent's is not blocked by Evergreen, serious consequences will be
+caused by such folders. You must be cautious when creating shared
+subfolders.
+____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+There are two parts in the folders pane. The My Folders section contains
+folders created with your Evergreen account. Folders that other users
+have shared with you appear in the Shared Folders section under the
+username of the sharing account. You can only view the contents or clone
+the templates in the shared folders, but not make any change in the
+shared folders. The cloned template can only be saved into your own
+folder.
+
+Screenshot of reports interface
+
+[[report-folder-creating]]
+Creating Folders
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+Whether you are creating a report from scratch or working from a shared
+template you must first create at least one folder.
+
+The steps for creating folders are similar for each reporting function.
+It is easier to create folders for templates, reports, and output all at
+once at the beginning, though it is possible to do it before each step.
+This example demonstrates creating a folder for a template.
+
+Click on Templates in the My Folders section.
+
+Screenshot of staff client report interface
+
+Name the folder. Select Share or Do not share from the dropdown menu.
+
+Screenshot of staff client report interface
+
+If you want to share your folder, select who you want to share this
+folder with from the dropdown menu.
+
+Screenshot of staff client report interface
+
+Click Create Sub Folder, and then OK on the confirmation prompt.
+
+Screenshot of staff client report interface
+
+Next, create a folder for the report definition to be saved to. Click on
+Reports.
+
+Screenshot of staff client report interface
+
+Repeat steps 2-5 to create a Reports folder also called Circulation.
+
+Finally, you need to create a folder for the report’s output to be saved
+in. Click on Output.
+
+Screenshot of staff client report interface
+
+Repeat steps 2-5 to create an Output folder named Circulation.
+
+__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Tip*
+
+Using a parallel naming scheme for folders in Templates, Reports, and
+Output helps keep your reports organized and easier to find.
+__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+The folders you have just created, will now be visible by clicking the
+arrows in My Folders. Bracketed after the folder name, is the name of
+with whom the folder is shared. For example, Circulation (BNCLF) is
+shared with the North Coast Library Federation. If it is not a shared
+folder, there will be nothing after the folder name. You may create as
+many folders and sub-folders as you like.
+
+Screenshot of staff client report interface
+
+[[report-managing-folder]]
+Managing Folders
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+Once a folder has been created, you can change the name, delete it,
+create a new subfolder, or change the sharing settings. This example
+demonstrates changing a folder name; the other choices follow similar
+steps.
+
+Click on the folder that you wish to rename.
+
+Screenshot of staff client report interface
+
+Click Manage Folder.
+
+Screenshot of staff client report interface
+
+Select Change folder name from the dropdown menu and click Go.
+
+Screenshot of staff client report interface
+
+Enter the new name and click Submit
+
+Screenshot of staff client report interface
+
+Click OK.
+
+Screenshot of staff client report interface
+
+You will get a confirmation box that the Action Succeeded. Click OK.
+
+Screenshot of staff client report interface
+
+[[create-template]]
+Creating Templates
+------------------
+
+Once the folders are ready, you can create or clone a template.
+Templates allow you to run a report more than once, without building it
+anew every time by changing definitions (such as values for the filters)
+to suit current requirements. For example, a template counting patrons
+with a registration date within a time frame can be used to find out the
+number of patrons registered within the last month or the last ten days.
+Another example is a shared template that reports on circulation
+statistics at a given library. This can be used by other libraries by
+selecting their own library as the circulating library when they run the
+report.
+
+Creating a template is complex. It requires some understanding of the
+Evergreen database and how Evergreen handles various records when
+performing tasks on the staff client. You may refer to the last section
+of this chapter for some background knowledge. Bear in mind, that a
+template includes a list of displayed fields, the information you will
+see in the result, and a list of filter fields which enables you to set
+up the conditions for your target records. Generally you do not record
+your conditions in the template. For example, in an overdue template,
+you do not record 2012-01-01 as the due date. Instead, you just make the
+Due Date field in the circulation record as a filter field. When setting
+up the report with this template, you will be given the chance to put in
+2012-01-01 as the due date.
+
+It can be useful to plan out your report on paper before getting started
+with the reporting tool. The first thing to decide is the source table.
+You can choose only one starting source table for each template. If you
+need information from other tables, follow the link in the source table
+to those tables. Grouping together related fields and identifying the
+key fields will help you select the correct __source__.
+
+We will take a report on circulation statistics as an example to show
+you how to create the template. In circulation statistic reports,
+libraries usually want to know how many circulations were done within a
+selected time period. When an item is checked out on the staff client, a
+record is created in the circulation table. You want a count of the
+number of circulation records created within the time period. So, the
+Circulation table is likely the source with which you want to start.
+
+You may wish to break down the number of circulations by items' shelving
+locations to see the circulations by different types of materials (or
+the patrons' profile groups). In this case, the count of circulation
+records and the shelving location (or patron profile) are the potential
+displayed fields. For the filter fields, you need to limit the
+circulations done within a time period, so checkout date should be a
+filter. You probably want to count the circulations done at your library
+only as you are part of a consortium, or for all the branches of your
+library system. (In such a case, you may want to see the checkout
+library in the result, too.) So, the circulating library will be another
+filter.
+
+With the above analysis, we will build the template from scratch in the
+following section to demonstrate the procedure on the template creating
+screen.
+
+[[create-template-choosing]]
+Choosing Displayed Fields
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+Click on the My Folder template folder where you want the template to be
+saved.
+
+Screenshot of staff client report interface
+
+Click on Create a new Template for this folder.
+
+Screenshot of staff client report interface
+
+You can now see the template creating interface. The upper half of the
+screen is the Database Source Browser, where you view the available
+tables in the database, the fields in each table, and the available
+transforms for the selected field. You select fields for your template
+here. The lower half is the Template Configuration, which displays your
+selected Displayed Fields and Base Filters and/or Aggregate Filters in
+the template.
+
+We will select the displayed fields for our template first. So make sure
+Displayed Fields is selected.
+
+The top left hand pane contains the database Sources drop-down list.
+This is the list of tables available as a starting point for your
+template. Commonly used sources are Circulation (contains circulation
+records that may be used for circulation statistics and overdue
+reports), ILS User (contains patron records that may be used for patron
+reports), and Item (contains copy records that may be used for reports
+on collection or items with special status).
+
+Screenshot of staff client report interface
+
+The Enable source nullability checkbox below the sources list is for
+specifying the join type between linked source tables. In most cases, it
+should be left unchecked by default. See
+link:#report-evergreen-database-nullability[for how to use Enable source
+nullability checkbox.]
+
+The relationship between tables can be found by displaying Relationship
+field (using the Column Picker) in the low Source Specifier pane.
+
+Select Circulation in the Sources dropdown menu. Note that the Core
+Sources for reporting are listed first, however it is possible to access
+all available sources at the bottom of this dropdown menu.
+
+Screenshot of staff client report interface
+
+___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Caution*
+
+One template can have only one starting source table. If you need
+information from other tables you should follow the links made by the
+Reports interface to those tables. The reporting program can not put two
+pieces of isolated information together into one record in the result.
+When you change a starting table all your existing selected fields will
+be removed.
+___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+Click on Circulation to retrieve all the fields and links, which will be
+displayed in the middle pane. The Field Name column contains the label
+of each field. The Data Type column shows what type of data is in the
+field. For details of data type see link:#template-terminology[Template
+Terminology]. Note that the Source Specifier (above the middle and right
+panes) shows the path that you took to get to the specific field.
+
+Screenshot of staff client report interface
+
+When you select a field in the middle pane, the available data
+transforms of the selected field are displayed in the right pane.
+Transforms specify how data should be processed before they are
+displayed/compared. Refer to link:#template-terminology[Template
+Terminology] for details of Transforms for each data type.
+
+For our example template, select Circ ID in the middle Field Name pane,
+and Count Distinct from the right Field Transform pane. You are counting
+the number of circulation records.
+
+Screenshot of staff client report interface
+
+Click Add Selected Fields underneath the Field Transform pane to add
+this field to your report output. Note that Circ ID now shows up in the
+bottom left hand pane under the Displayed Fields tab.
+
+Screenshot of staff client report interface
+
+Circ ID will be the column header in the report output. You can rename
+default display names to something more meaningful. To do so in this
+example, select the Circ ID row and click Alter Display Header.
+
+Screenshot of staff client report interface
+
+Double-clicking on the displayed field name is a shortcut to altering
+the display header.
+
+Type in the new column header name, for example _Circ count_ and click
+OK.
+
+Screenshot of staff client report interface
+
+Add other data to your report by going back to the Sources pane and
+selecting the desired fields. In this example, we are going to add
+Circulating Item > Shelving Location to further refine the circulation
+report.
+
+In the top left hand Sources pane, expand Circulation. Depending on your
+computer you will either click on the + sign or on an arrow to expand
+the tree.
+
+Screenshot of staff client report interface
+
+Click on the + or arrow to expand Circulating Item. Select Shelving
+Location.
+
+Screenshot of staff client report interface
+
+In the Field Name pane select Name.
+
+Screenshot of staff client report interface
+
+In the upper right Field Transform pane, select Raw Data and click Add
+Selected Fields. Use Raw Data when you do not wish to transform field
+data in any manner.
+
+Screenshot of staff client report interface
+
+Name will appear in the bottom left pane. Select the Name row and click
+Alter Display Header.
+
+Screenshot of staff client report interface
+
+Enter a new, more descriptive column header, for example, __Shelving
+location__. Click OK.
+
+Screenshot of staff client report interface
+
+Note that the order of rows (top to bottom) will correspond to the order
+of columns (left to right) on the final report. The results will be
+sorted by the columns in this order, too. Select Shelving location and
+click on Move Up to move Shelving location before Circ count. The result
+will be sorted by Shelving Location first.
+
+Screenshot of staff client report interface
+
+Return to the Sources pane to add more fields to your template. Under
+Sources click Circulation, then select Check Out Date/Time from the
+middle Field Name pane.
+
+Screenshot of staff client report interface
+
+Select Year + Month in the right hand Field Transform pane and click Add
+Selected Fields
+
+Screenshot of staff client report interface
+
+Check Out Date/Time will appear in the Displayed Fields pane. In the
+report it will appear as a year and month (YYYY-MM) corresponding to the
+selected tranform.
+
+Select the Check Out Date/Time row. Click Alter Display Header and
+change the column header to __Check out month__.
+
+Screenshot of staff client report interface
+
+Move Check out month to the top of the list using the Move Up button, so
+that it will be the first column in an MS Excel spreadsheet. Now, the
+report output will sort by the checkout month first, then by shelving
+locations.
+
+Screenshot of staff client report interface
+
+________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Tip*
+
+Note the Change Transform button in the bottom left hand pane. It has
+the same function as the upper right Field Transform pane for fields
+that have already been added.
+
+Screenshot of staff client report interface
+________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+[[create-template-filters]]
+Applying Filters
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+Without filters, all records in the database will be in the result,
+which is seldom desired, especially in Sitka's context where libraries
+share the same database. So some filters should be applied to keep out
+the unwanted records.
+
+The following procedure shows how to add filters to the example
+template:
+
+Select the Base Filters tab in the bottom Template Configuration pane.
+
+For this circulation statistics example, select Circulation > Check Out
+Date/Time > Year + Month and click on Add Selected Fields. You are going
+to filter on the checkout month.
+
+Screenshot of staff client report interface
+
+Select Check Out Date/Time. Click on Change Operator and select In list
+from the dropdown menu. This operator allows you to count circulations
+done within each month for several months by just one report.
+
+Screenshot of staff client report interface
+
+To filter on the location of the circulation select Circulation >
+Circulating library > Raw Data and click on Add Selected Fields.
+
+Screenshot of staff client report interface
+
+Select Circulating Library and click on Change Operator and select
+Equals. Note that this is a template, so the value for _Equals_ will be
+filled out when you run the report.
+
+Screenshot of staff client report interface
+
+For multi-branch libraries, you would select _Circulating Library_ with
+_In list_ as the operator, so you could specify multiple branch(es) when
+you run the report.
+
+Refer to link:#template-terminology[Template Terminology] for details of
+Transforms and Operators, and Aggregate and Non-aggregate filters.
+
+You may add a hint to the filter, e.g. explaining the function of the
+filter, what value is expected when setting up the report, etc. Select
+the filter and click Change Field Hint.
+
+Screenshot of staff client report interface
+
+In the above example, we added some instruction on how to fill up the
+filter when setting up the report. The hint will show up on the report
+creation screen. Below is how it looks like on the report creation
+screen.
+
+Screenshot of staff client report interface
+
+Once you have configured your template, you must name and save it. Name
+this template __Circulations by month for one library__. You can also
+add a description. In this example, the title is descriptive enough, so
+a description is not necessary. Click Save.
+
+Screenshot of staff client report interface
+
+Click OK.
+
+Screenshot of staff client report interface
+
+You will get a confirmation dialogue box that the template was
+successfully saved. Click OK.
+
+Screenshot of staff client report interface
+
+_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Tip*
+
+The bottom right hand pane is also a source specifier. By selecting one
+of these rows you will limit the fields that are visible to the sources
+you have specified. This may help to find out the source of the fields,
+e.g. a circulating library is from the circulation table or item table.
+Use +Ctrl+ +Click+ to select or deselect items.
+_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+Once a template is saved, it can not be edited anymore. To make changes
+you will need to clone it and edit the clone. This will ensure that the
+work you have done will not be lost. As mentioned before, creating a
+template is complex. The first try seldom gets the perfect result. Your
+subsequent changes may not always improve the result. You may need to
+refer back to your old version. Make changes step-by-step. Check the
+correctness of the result on each step. This may help you to find out
+the exact cause of the issue. After you have the desired template, you
+may delete all the interim ones.
+
+The above paragaphs described how to create a template from scratch with
+a very simple example. You may choose instead to use one of the generic
+templates created by the Sitka team to meet common reporting needs (see
+link:#shared-template[???]). However, knowing how a template is created
+will help you understand the report structure and is recommended as an
+introduction to editing template fields and filters.
+
+[[generate-report]]
+Generating Reports from Templates
+---------------------------------
+
+Now you are ready to run a report from the template you have created.
+
+Find the template you just created in the Template folder. In the My
+Folders section, click the arrow next to Templatesto expand this folder
+and select circulation.
+
+Select the box beside Circulations by month for one library. Select
+Create a new report from selected templatefrom the dropdown menu. Click
+Submit.
+
+Complete the first part of report settings. Only Report Name
+image:../media/1.png[image] and Choose a folder...
+image:../media/6.png[image] are required fields.
+
+image:../media/1.png[image] Template Name, Template Creator, and
+Template Description are for informational purposes only. They are hard
+coded when the template is created. At the report definition stage it is
+not possible to change them.
+
+image:../media/2.png[image] Report Name is required. Reports stored in
+the same folder must have unique names.
+
+image:../media/3.png[image] Report Description is optional but may help
+distinguish among similar reports.
+
+image:../media/4.png[image] Report Columns lists the columns that will
+appear in the output. This is derived from the template and cannot be
+changed during the report definition.
+
+image:../media/5.png[image] Pivot Label Column and Pivot Data Column are
+optional. Pivot tables are a different way to view data. If you
+currently use pivot tables in MS Excel it is better to select an Excel
+output and continue using pivot tables in Excel. Please note that Pivot
+tables are suitable to some result data only.
+
+image:../media/6.png[image] You must choose a report folder to store
+this report definition. Only report folders under My Folders are
+available. Click on the desired folder to select it.
+
+Select values for the Circulation > Check Out Date/Time. Use the
+calendar widget or manually enter the desired dates (always in YYYY-MM
+or YYYY-MM-DD format), then click Add to include the date on the list.
+You may add multiple dates with an InList operator by repeating the
+above step.
+
+The Transform for this field is Year + Month, so even if you choose a
+specific date (2009-10-20) it will appear as the corresponding month
+only (2009-10).
+
+Select a value for the Circulating Library.
+
+Complete the bottom portion of the report definition interface, then
+click Save.
+
+image:../media/1.png[image] Select one or more output formats. In this
+example the report output will be available as an Excel spreadsheet, an
+HTML table (for display in the staff client or browser), and as a bar
+chart. Please note that charts are suitable to some result data only.
+
+image:../media/2.png[image] If you want the report to be recurring,
+check the box and select the Recurrence Interval as described in
+link:#recurring-report[Recurring Reports]. In this example, as this is
+a report that will only be run once, the Recurring Report box is not
+checked.
+
+image:../media/3.png[image] Select Run as soon as possible for immediate
+output. It is also possible to set up reports that run automatically in
+the future.
+
+image:../media/4.png[image] It is optional to fill out an email address
+where a completion notice can be sent. The email will contain a link to
+a password-protected report output (staff login required). If you have
+an email address in your Local System Administrator account, it will
+automatically appear in the email notification box. However, you can
+enter a different email address or multiple addresses separated by
+commas.
+
+image:../media/5.png[image] Select a folder for the report's output.
+
+You will get a confirmation dialogue box that the Action Succeeded.
+Click OK.
+
+Once saved, reports stay there forever unless you delete them. When a
+report is deleted all the linked output files will be deleted, too.
+
+________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Caution*
+
+With version 2.8, report files are viewable and editable. You may view
+the contents of a report. You can generate a new report based on the
+past report file or re-schedule a recurring report. See
+link:#edit-report[Viewing/Editing/Rescheduling Reports] for details.
+________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Tip*
+
+The required value for filters should be in a format corresponding to
+the data transform. For example, for a call number field transformed to
+First Continuous Non-space string, you need to put in the call number
+prefix; for a field transformed to Count you need to give an integer.
+See link:#create-template-transforms[Template Terminolgoy] section for
+more on Data Transforms.
+
+Action corresponds to Operator used for filter fields. It specifies how
+the given value will be compared with the field value. See
+link:#create-template-operators[Template Terminolgoy] section for more
+on Operators.
+
+When creating a report, you may disable an unwanted filter in the
+template by choosing an appropriate value for it. For example, if a
+template lists items created within a time frame, specify a time frame
+between "1900-01-01" and "today" to cover the whole collection; select
+all copy statuses on the list to bypass the filter on item status.
+
+If the calendar widget is not provided for a date filter, key in the
+date in format yyyy-mm-dd.
+_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+[[view-output]]
+Viewing Report Output
+---------------------
+
+Once a report is finished, the output is stored in the specified Output
+folder and will remain there until manually deleted. Evergreen sends an
+email with a link to the output if an email address(s) is supplied when
+the report was set up.
+
+To view the report output in the staff client, open the reports
+interface from Admin (-) > Local Administration > Reports
+
+Click on Output to expand the folder. Select Circulation (where you just
+saved the __circulation report output__).
+
+View report output is the default selection in the dropdown menu. Select
+Recurring Monthly Circ by Location by clicking the checkbox and click
+Submit.
+
+Click on the report name in blue colour, you will see the template name
+and report description field.
+
+A new tab will open for the report output. Select either Tabular Output
+or Excel Output. If Bar Charts was selected during report definition the
+chart will also appear.
+
+Tabular output looks like this:
+
+If you want to manipulate, filter or graph this data, Excel output would
+be more useful. Excel output looks like this in Excel:
+
+[[recurring-report]]
+Running Recurring Reports
+-------------------------
+
+Recurring reports are a useful way to save time by scheduling reports
+that you run on a regular basis, such as monthly circulation and monthly
+patron registration statistics. When you have set up a report to run on
+a monthly basis, you may request an email informing you that the report
+has successfully run. You can click on the link in the email that will
+take you directly to the report output. You can also access the output
+through the Reports interface as described in link:#view-output[???].
+
+To set up a monthly recurring report, follow the procedure in
+link:#generate-report[Generating Reports from Templates] but make the
+changes described below.
+
+Select the Recurring Report check-box and set the recurrence interval to
+1 month.
+
+Do not select Run ASAP. Instead schedule the report to run early on the
+first day of the next month. Enter the date in YYYY-MM-DD format.
+
+Ensure there is an email address to receive completion emails. You will
+receive an email completion notice each month when the output is ready.
+
+Select a folder for the report’s output.
+
+Click Save Report. .
+
+You will get a confirmation dialogue box that the Action Succeeded.
+Click OK.
+
+With the above settings, you will get an email on the first day of each
+month with a link to the report output. By clicking this link it will
+open the output in a web browser. It is still possible to login to the
+staff client and access the output in Output folder.
+
+*Always use 'relative date' for recurring reports.*
+
+Date is a filter on nearly every template. When setting up a recurring
+report, always choose Relative Date, instead of Real Date for any date
+filter on the report creating screen. When using relative date the
+actual date will be calculated when the report runs. Unlike a real date,
+the actual value of relative date is adjusted according to the run time.
+For example, if the report runs at 2012-10-10 23:00, a relative date
+transformed to YYYY-MM of "1 month ago" will be Sept, 2012; while a
+relative date transformed to YYYY-MM-DD of '1 day ago" will be
+2012-10-09. When it runs at 2012-11-10 23:00 "1 month ago", it will be
+Oct, 2012, while "1 day ago" will be 2012-11-09. The date goes by
+calendar day or month.
+
+*How to stop an existing recurring report?.*
+
+To stop a recurring report, you may delete the pending output from
+Pending area in Output folder. You may also delete the report from
+Report folder. But deleting the report will delete all the output files
+generated by it, too.
+
+*How to make changes to an existing recurring report?.*
+
+Sometimes you may wish to make changes to a recurring report, e.g. the
+recurrence interval, generation date, email address to receive
+completion email, output format/folder or even filter values (such as
+the number of days overdue). You may do it by editing the report. See
+link:#edit-report[Viewing/Editing/Rescheduling Reports] for details.
+
+______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Tip*
+
+Report running interval should correspond to the date filter. For
+example, if the template filters on a date instead of month, a recurring
+report running with a monthly interval may miss a day or capture an
+extra day's data. So it works better if the filter can be transformed to
+month.
+
+Schedule your monthly report to run early next month, but not at the end
+of the current month.
+
+Once you have been on Evergreen for a year, you can set up your
+recurring monthly reports to show comparative data from one year ago. To
+do this select relative dates of 1 month ago and 13 months ago.
+______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+[[edit-report]]
+Viewing/Editing/Rescheduling Reports
+------------------------------------
+
+You may view or edit an existing report to change the values for
+filters, run-time, email reminder recipient, recurring interval, etc.
+With this function, you may generate a new report by editing and saving
+the report with a new name; change the condition or email reminder
+recipient of a recurring report; reschedule the run-time or
+run-frequency of a recurring report. For example, you may reschedule a
+recurring report to run on Mondays, instead of Thursdays.
+
+You may edit a report in Reports or Output folder.
+
+To view or edit a report in Reports folder, go to Reports folder to find
+the report that you wish to view/edit. Click View or Edit in the Edit
+column. We choose Edit in this example.
+
+To edit a report in Output folder, go to Output to find the report.
+Click the report name. The details of the report show up in the line
+below. Click Edit.
+
+The report is loaded on the report creation screen, where you make the
+required changes.
+
+To create a new report, you need to enter a new report name. Click Save
+As New at the bottom after finishing the editing. You can choose to
+create a one time or a recurring report.
+
+To modify an existing recurring report, click Save Report after
+finishing the editing. Note that Evergreen will update the pending
+output only. The existing output will remain as is.
+
+It is not possible to modify a completed one-time report. You need to
+enter a new report name and save it as a new report.
+
+When choosing View a report on the above two screens, the report will be
+displayed in non-editable mode.
+
+[[shared-template]]
+Shared Templates in SITKA_templates
+-----------------------------------
+
+The Sitka support team has created generic templates for commonly
+requested reports and shared them under the SITKA_templates folder. This
+chapter describes how to make local copies of these templates for
+routine reports or as a starting point for customization. When creating
+a new template it is a good idea to review the shared templates first:
+even if the exact template you need does not exist, it is often faster
+to modify an existing template than to build a brand new one. Reporter
+permissions are required to clone templates from the Shared Folders
+section and save them to My Folders.
+
+[[shared-SITKA-templates]]
+What's in SITKA_templates
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+The Sitka support team uses a dedicated staff account, SITKA_templates,
+to share ready-to-use templates. Below is what a Local System
+Administrator can see after going to the Reports interface, then follow
+the path to Shared Folders, click the arrow (or + sign) in front of
+Templates, and then SITKA_templates.
+
+From Acquisitions to Typical Week Stats are the subfolders containing
+various templates. Templates using the same source table are usually
+grouped together under one subfolder. These templates are created based
+on the anticipation that most libraries may need such reports. The
+Support Team tends to make these templates generic, which means they
+contain more information. Individual libraries may have slightly
+different requirements. You can remove the unwanted information when
+cloning the templates or choose appropriate values for some filters to
+disable them. These templates are usually referred to as Sitka standard
+templates.
+
+The following is a guideline of the templates for various kinds of
+reports. Please note that the Support Team regularly maintains the
+templates. The list below may not be the latest.
+
+*Overdue reports.*
+
+Find overdue reports in Circulation folder. There are templates
+capturing checkouts with due date within a selected time frame for all
+patrons or those without email address (phone list) or the due date is
+before a selected date. You may use these templates to set up your
+overdue reports capturing items which are at a certain number of days
+overdue.
+
+*Circulation statistics reports.*
+
+These templates are in Circulation folder. The regular circulation
+statistics can be grouped by various criteria: patron's home library,
+profile and/or stat cat; items' owning library and/or shelving location.
+There are two sets of templates: one set limit the circulation period by
+selected dates; the other selected month(s). The latter are for monthly
+recurring reports.
+
+Other circulation statistics related templates are:
+
+* non-catalogued circulation count
+* pre-catalogued circulation count
+* pre-catalogued circulation count for items with dummy title prefix of
+"ILL:" (ILL statistics via pre-catalogued circulation)
+* checkin count
+* in-house use count for non-catalouged items
+* in-house use count for catalogued items
+* in-house use count per title
+
+Other circulation related templates are:
+
+* lost and paid item list
+* lost with outstanding bills item list
+* claimed returned item list
+
+*Reports on collection.*
+
+These templates are in Holdings folder. You will find templates counting
+items or titles of your whole collection or catalogued within the
+selected time period (new title/items statistics). The numbers are
+grouped by shelving location and/or circulation modidfier.
+
+Another group of templates in Holdings folder are item/title lists for
+items meeting various criteria: having selected shelving location(s)
+and/or circulation modifier(s), copy stat cat, barcode prefix, call
+number prefix or within a call number range; or being catalogued (new
+title/item list), marked missing, lost or deleted within selected time
+period.
+
+In this folder, you will also find templates listing pre-catalogued
+items and items with certain circulation history (items with fewer
+circulation count for weeding report or more circulation count for
+popular title/item report).
+
+*Patron reports.*
+
+All patron reports are in Patrons folder. You may find templates
+counting patrons by profile group and/or patron stat cat, registered or
+expired/expring within a selected time period, or with circulation
+history within a selected time period.
+
+Another group of templates list selected information for patrons meeting
+some conditions such as: email list for all or those patrons having
+certain stat cat; names and barcode for patrons without circulation
+history within selected time frame; patrons born before a selected date
+(seniors list); patrons exceeding maximum fine limit.
+
+Besides, there is a template that counts patron's OPAC logins and
+another that summarizes the answers to patron survey question(s).
+
+*Reports on bibliographic information.*
+
+It is not easy to generate reports based on bibliographic information
+due to the bibliographic record structure. But a simple report that
+lists the values in a selected MARC tag and subfield for the whole
+collection is possible. And the bibliographic records can be limited by
+a selected value of a MARC tag and subfield. These templates are in
+Bibliographic Records folder.
+
+*Bills and payments.*
+
+You can find the templates listing the details of various kinds of
+payments made in a selected time period, and a template listing bills
+with negative balance.
+
+*Hold reports.*
+
+Holds related reports are in this folder, including reports for holds
+that have been long time outstanding (requested some time ago but not
+filled yet), cancelled, or have no eligible copies to be filled. There
+are other templates that count the total number of holds placed or
+fulfilled within a time span, and the hold count per title for popular
+titles.
+
+*Inventory.*
+
+The two templates in Inventory folder list items based on whether the
+item showed up (being scanned on shelves or returned) in the library
+while the inventory was taken. The result of the Inventory - un-scanned
+items are the potential missing items.
+
+*Library setting and policy related reports.*
+
+Find them in Library Configuration folder.
+
+*Other folders.*
+
+If your library uses the Acquisitions Module or the Booking Module, you
+may find related templates in the relevant folders.
+
+*Custom Templates folder.*
+
+If you open this folder, you will see a subfolder for your library
+federation with sub-subfolders for your library and other libraries
+within your library federation.
+
+These folders are created when the Support Team creates or customizes
+templates for individual libraries. The templates go to these folders
+when there are similar templates in the standard folders already, or the
+Support Team does not anticipate wide use of the templates. The Support
+Team tries to limit the number of templates in each standard folder so
+that staff may find the target template easily.
+
+[[shared-clone-template]]
+Clone a template from SITKA_templates
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+The steps below assume you have already created at least one Templates
+folder. If you have not done so, please see link:#folder[???].
+
+Access the Reports interface from the Admin menu under Local
+Administration > Reports
+
+Under Shared Folders expand the Templates folder and the SITKA_templates
+subfolder. To expand the folders click on the grey arrow or folder
+icon. Do not click on the blue underlined hyperlink.
+
+Click on the Circulation (SITKA) subfolder.
+
+Select the template you wish to clone. In this example, we are cloning
+the _Monthly Circulation by Shelving Location_ template. From the
+dropdown menu choose Clone selected templates, then click Submit.
+
+By default Evergreen only displays the first 10 items in any folder. To
+view all content, change the Limit output setting from 10 to All.
+
+Choose the folder where you want to save the cloned template, then click
+Select Folder. Only template folders created with your account will be
+visible. If there are no folders to choose from please see
+link:#folder[???].
+
+The cloned template opens in the template editor. From here you may
+modify the template by adding, removing, or editing fields and filters
+as described in link:#create-template[???]. Template Name and
+Description can also be edited. When satisfied with your changes, click
+Save.
+
+Click OK in the resulting confirmation window.
+
+[[shared-modify-template]]
+Modify a template
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+Once saved it is not possible to edit a template. To make changes, clone
+the template and change the clone.
+
+To modify a template, repeat the above steps 1-6. You will see the
+template open on Template Creating screen. Click Displayed Fields you
+will see all the displayed fields. To remove one, highlight it and click
+Remove Selected Field. You may move a field up or down the list, which
+will affect the sorting of the result records. You may also change the
+column label or the transform of the field by using respective buttons.
+See link:#create-template-transforms[Field Transforms] section for more
+information.
+
+_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Tip*
+
+Removing displayed fields usually does not affect the result set. But
+sometimes it does, esp. when the report displays the count of records by
+each group. Sometimes some fields may contain important information.
+Removing them may cause misunderstanding the results. Usually such
+fields are explained in the template Description. Be cautious when you
+delete such fields.
+
+If you are not clear where a displayed field is from, you may use the
+Source Browser to the right to display fields from the selected table
+only.
+_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+To add a displayed field, go to the Sources to open the source table to
+find the field or follow the links to the appropriate table which
+contains the field you want to display. Click the text in the Sources to
+display fields in the table in Field Name pane. Click the arrow in front
+of the text to display the linked tables in the Sources pane.
+
+Once find the field, select it in Field Name pane and the appropriate
+transform in Field Transform pane. Click Add Selected Fields.
+
+The below screenshot shows how to add Precat Dummy Title field. Find
+Circulating Item table, which is linked from Circulation. Click it
+(text) to display its fields in Field Name. Select Precat Dummy Title,
+and then Raw Data in Field Transform.
+
+____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Caution*
+
+You can not change the starting source table, but have to follow the
+links to tables in the Sources pane. Changing the starting table will
+remove all existing fields, meaning building a new template from
+scratch.
+____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+Select Base Filters or Aggregate Filters to add or remove filters. The
+steps are the same as adding or removing displayed fields. Be careful
+with filters as usually changing filter makes a difference in the result
+set.
+
+[[shared-example-report-create]]
+Examples of using Sitka's templates
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Caution*
+
+Please clone templates in SITKA_templates. and set up your reports from
+your own copy. This is to avoid any potential impact that may be
+resulted from changing the orignal templates. The Support Team regularly
+maintains these templates. Deletion may happen. Deleting a template will
+delete all linked reports and output files.
+______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+Below are a few screenshots showing you how to set up the reports based
+on some templates in SITKA_templates. Some explanation is added in the
+boxes with light coloured background.
+
+1. Setting up a monthly recurring report by using template: Monthly
+Circulation by Shelving Location (updated to include item's owning
+library) in Circulation folder:
+2. Setting up a weekly recurring report by using template: Overdues
+Within Time Span - for Patrons without Email in Circulation folder:
+3. Setting up a one-time report by using template: Circulation
+Statistics by One Patron Stat Cat within timespan in Circulation folder:
+4. Setting up a report by using template: Items List by Shelving
+Location in Holdings folder:
+5. Setting up a report by using template: Weeding - Items with few
+circulations since a selected month in Holdings folder:
+
+[[evergreen-database]]
+Commonly used tables and views in Evergreen database
+----------------------------------------------------
+
+You are creating/updating records when you work on Evergreen. Reporting
+means you extract some of these records from the database that meet your
+requirements. Understanding the Evergreen database and how records are
+created/updated when tasks are performed on the staff client, will help
+you when you create templates and set up reports on the Reports
+interface.
+
+There are various kinds of data used by Evergreen, such as patron's
+names, address, barcode, item's barcode, shelving location, status,
+price; checkout date, returned date, fines and bills and so on. This
+data must be organized in an efficient and effective way to make sure
+they can be stored and retrieved easily.
+
+Evergreen uses various tables to keep each type of records. You can
+visualize a table as an MS Excel Worksheet: a specified number of
+columns with unlimited number of rows. Each column is called a field in
+the database terminology and each row is a record. There are many tables
+in Evergreen database. Each contains a certain type of records. The
+fields in a record you see on the Staff Client may be from more than one
+tables. For example, in a patron record, you can find patron's names,
+address, phone number, barcode, profile, etc. all in one record. But in
+the database, patron's address, barcode, and profile are in separate
+tables. You do not need to know where these fields are from when editing
+a patron record on the Staff Client, but you have to know it when
+creating a template on the Reports interface.
+
+Since various information about one patron is saved in separate tables,
+there must be a mechanism of matching the information about one patron
+correctly to make sure all information is about the same patron. This is
+done via recording the patron id (a unique number in the main patron
+record) in every related table. So via recording the id of a record in
+another table, two tables are connected. The connections among many
+tables are pre-made by the Reports interface. You just need to follow
+the link to find the data saved in the related table. Below is a
+simplified diagram showing the connections among some commonly used
+tables/views on the Reports interface, which can be a guide for you to
+find various fields in different tables. Some explanation of these
+tables is after the diagram.
+
+image:media/database-1.png[Screenshot of reports interface]
+
+*ILS User (aka Patron or User):.*
+
+contains patron records. A patron's name, phone number, email address,
+and registration date can all be found in this table. Follow the links
+to the table Current Library Card to find a patron's current barcode,
+Circulation to find the circulation history, Home Library, Mailing
+Address, Physical Address, and Main Profile Group, etc. to find more
+information about the patron.
+
+*Item (aka Circulating Item):.*
+
+contains copy records. Item's barcode, creation date, active date, last
+edited date, last copy status change date and price are in this table.
+For related information like call number, circulating library, circ
+modifier, status, shelving location, etc., you need to follow the links
+to the respective table to find them. For title information you need to
+follow the Call Number table to the Bibliographic Record table to find
+it. Follow the link to the Circulation table to find an item's
+circulation history.
+
+Pre-catalogued item information such as dummy ISBN, title and author are
+also in this table. When a pre-catalogued item is checked out, an item
+record is created. If the barcode is already in the table and the item
+is not marked deleted, the item record will be updated with the new
+title, author, etc.
+
+*Bibliographic Record.*
+
+Contains title information. To find the basic bibliographic information
+such as title, author, ISBN, etc., follow the link to Simple Records
+Extract.
+
+*Circulation.*
+
+Contains circulation records, including pre-catalogued item
+circulations. When an item is checked out, a circulation record is
+created. When an item is renewed, the existing circulation record is
+closed and another record is created. Below are some important
+timestamps in this table.
+
+Checkout Date/Time: the time when an item is checked out
+
+CheckIn Date/Time: the effective date when the item is treated as
+checked-in
+
+CheckIn Scan Date/Time: the time when the check in action is taken
+
+Due Date/Time: For all daily loans the due time is 23:59:59 of the day
+in Pacific Time. Hourly loans have specific time with time zone
+information.
+
+Fine Stops Date/Time: the date when the Maximum Fine limit has been
+reached, or the item is returned, marked lost or claimed returned. After
+this date, the fine generator will not create new overdue fines for this
+circulation.
+
+Record Creation Date/Time: the date and time when the circulation record
+is created. For online checkout it is the same as Checkout Date/Time.
+For offline checkout, this date is the offline transaction processing
+date.
+
+Transaction Finish Date/Time: the date when the bills linked to this
+checkout have been resolved. For a regular checkout without bills this
+field is filled with the checkin time when the item is returned.
+
+___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Tip*
+
+The circulating_library field in this table refers to the checkout
+location. The circulating_library in the Item table refers to the item's
+owning library.
+___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+*Non-catalogued Circulation.*
+
+When a non-catalogued checkout is recorded, a record is created in this
+table. Non-catalogued item category can be found in the linked Non-Cat
+Item Type table.
+
+*In-house Use.*
+
+Contains the catalogued item in-house use records.
+
+*Non-catalogued In-house Use.*
+
+Contains the non-catalogued item in-house use records. Follow the link
+to Item Typeto find the non-catalogued item category.
+
+*Copy Transit.*
+
+When a copy is sent in transit, regardless of whether it is going back
+to its circulating library or going to fill a hold, a copy transit
+record is created in this table. Follow the link to Transit Copyto find
+the item information.
+
+*Hold Transit.*
+
+When a copy is sent in transit to fill a hold, a hold transit record is
+created in this table and the Copy Transit table. So this table contains
+a subset of records of the Copy Transit table. You may find hold
+information following the link to Hold Requiring Transit. Follow the
+link to Transit Copy to find the item information.
+
+*Hold Request.*
+
+When a hold is placed, a hold record is created in this table. You may
+find the hold receiver's information in Hold User. Requesting User is
+the person who takes the placing hold action. It can be the hold
+receiver or a staff member. Generally if the Hold User is different from
+the Requesting User, this is a staff-placed hold. Hold Copy Map equals
+Eligible Copies. Copies that can be used to fill the hold are in this
+table.
+
+____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Note*
+
+Target Object ID is shown as a link. But there is no linked table in the
+Source pane. The value in this field could be a bibilographic record id,
+a volume record id or a copy record id depending on the hold type.
+____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+Timestamps in this table:
+
+Capture Date/Time: The time when the hold achieves hold shelf or
+hold-in-transit status.
+
+Fulfillment Date/Time: the time when the on-hold item is checked out.
+
+Hold Cancel Date/Time: the time when the hold is cancelled.
+
+Hold Expire Date/Time: This could be the date calculated based on your
+library's default Hold Expire Interval or a selected date when placing
+the hold.
+
+Last Targeting Date/Time: The last time the hold targeting program
+checked for a target copy for the hold. It usually has the same time as
+the Hold Request Time. It is usually not useful for reporting, But it
+may serve as an indicator of whether the request time has been edited.
+
+Notify Time: when the email notice is sent out.
+
+Request Date/Time: Usually this is when the hold is placed. But it is
+editable on the staff client. So sometimes this may be the request time
+chosen by the staff.
+
+Shelf Expire Time: the date is calculated based on the Shelf Time and
+your library's Default Hold Shelf Expire Interval.
+
+Shelf Time: when the hold achieves On Hold Shelf status.
+
+Thaw Date: the activation date for a suspended hold.
+
+*Bills tables and views.*
+
+Scroll down to the bottom of the Source list. Hover your mouse over All
+Available Sources. A new list will pop up to the right. Move your cursor
+to the list and scroll down to Billing Line Item. This table contains
+all the billing line items such as each day's overdue fines and the
+grocery bills created manually. The records in this table are viewable
+on the Full Details screen on Bills in the staff client.
+
+Billable Transaction with Billing Location: this table contains the
+summary records of billings and payments. Most information in these
+records is displayed on Bills or Bills History screen. The records are
+updated when either the related billings or payments are updated.
+Transaction ID is the bill ID. It is also the circulation record ID for
+circulation bills. Transaction Start Time is the grocery bill creation
+time or circulation checkout time. Transaction Finish Time is when the
+bill is resolved.
+
+*Payments tables and views.*
+
+Payments: ALL contains all payment records. When a lump sum of payment
+is made on the staff client, one or more payment records are created
+depending on the number of bills it resolved or partially resolved. One
+bill may be resolved by multiple payments.
+
+Payments: Brick-and-mortar contains all payments made at the circulation
+desk.
+
+Payments: Desk: Cash/Check/Credit Card payment.
+
+Payments: Non-drawer Staff: Forgive/Work/Goods/Patron Credit payments.
+
+_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Tip*
+
+A view is a virtual table which contains records meeting defined
+requirements. The fields in a view can be from one or more tables.
+Before you use a view for your report, you need to make sure the view
+contains the type of records that you want to report on. For example,
+Overdue Circulation is a view which contains circulation records without
+checkin date and the due date past "today". It does not work for a
+report on last month's circulation statistics, but it makes an overdue
+report easier.
+
+By default, tables are often, but not always, joined by left join. Other
+join types may be available. Select the Enable nullability checkbox
+under the source list on Template Creation screen (before linked tables
+are displayed) to list all available join types. You may see None,
+Child, Parent, Default in Nullable column beside the table names. None
+means a inner join; Parent is a right outer join; Child left outer join.
+Default is unknown, but likely left outer join.
+_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+[[template-terminology]]
+Template Terminology: Data Types, Transforms, and Operators
+-----------------------------------------------------------
+
+The central column of the Database Source Browser lists Field Name and
+Data Type for the selected database table.
+
+Data Type is associated with each field. It tells what kind of
+information is stored in the field. The system handles the information
+differently based on the data type. Each data type has its own
+characteristics and uses:
+
+[width="100%",cols="25%,25%,50%",options="header",]
+|=======================================================================
+|Data Type |Description |Notes
+|Boolean |Contains either “true” or “false”. |Examples in Evergreen:
+“deleted” in item/patron record, “circulate?” in item record.
+
+|ID |Unique number assigned by the database to identify a record |IDs
+look like numbers, but the id data type is treated specially by the
+software for determining how tables are linked. Id is a good candidate
+field for counting records.
+
+|Integer |A number like 1, 2, 3. |Examples in Evergreen: "remaining
+renewal count" in circulation record, "claimed returned count" in patron
+record.
+
+|Interval |Time intervals, such as “2 weeks” and “6 months” |Examples in
+Evergreen: “loan duration” and "grace period" in circulation record,
+
+|Link |It is similar to the id data type. It is the id of a record in
+another table. |Examples in Evergreen: "user id" and "item id" in a
+circulation record. Link outputs a number that is a meaningful reference
+for the database but not of much use to a human user. You will usually
+want to drill further down the tree in the Sources pane and select
+fields from the linked table. However, in some instances you might want
+to use a link field. For example, to count the number of patrons who
+borrowed items you could do a count on the "user id" in the circulation
+record.
+
+|Money |Monetary amount |Examples in Evergreen: "price" in item record,
+"billing amount" in billing record.
+
+|Org_unit |Organizational unit. It is a number. It acts like link data
+type. |In Evergreen, libraries are organizational units. In Sitka
+context they are organized into a tree structure with consortium,
+library federations, libraries/library systems and branches for library
+systems. To filter on a library, make sure you choose the field having
+org_unit data type. To display a library, it is a better option to drill
+down to the org unit record to display the "name" of it.
+
+|Text |Text field. Usually it takes whatever is typed into the field.
+|Examples: "call number label" in call number record, "patron’s names".
+
+|Timestamp |A very detailed time such as 2007-11-25 17:54:26-07
+|Example: checkout time in circulation record, last status date in item
+record.
+|=======================================================================
+
+Transforms determine how data is processed when it is retrieved from the
+database. Different data types can be transformed differently. Not all
+transforms are available to a certain data type.
+
+*Raw Data.*
+
+To display the data exactly as it is stored in the database. It is
+available to all data types.
+
+*Date.*
+
+This transform presents a timestamp as a human-readable date in
+yyyy-mm-dd format. For example, timestamp 2007-11-25 17:54:26-07 will be
+displayed as 2007-11-25. Date is available to timestamp field.
+
+*Year + Month.*
+
+Presents a timestamp as the year and month in yyyy-mm format. For
+example, 2007-11-25 17:54:26-07 will be displayed as 2007-11. If
+filtering on a timestamp transformed to Year + Month, all days in the
+calendar month are included. It is available to timestamp field.
+
+*Upper Case/Lower Case.*
+
+Transforms text to all upper/lower case. They are only available for the
+text data type.
+
+*Substring.*
+
+This transform can be applied to filters, not display fields. It matches
+the given value with a continuous string of characters in the field. For
+example, if a given value is “123’ and the match is with a call number
+field, call numbers like ‘123.34’, ‘ANF 123.34’, ‘JNF 233.123’, etc.
+will be in the result list. Substring is only available to text data
+type.
+
+*First Continuous Non-space string.*
+
+The first word (or string of numbers and/or characters until the first
+spacing) in a field is returned by this transform. For example, this
+transform will return “E” from text “E DOR”, “E 123”, etc. This
+transform is available to the text data type.
+
+*Count.*
+
+This transform counts the records found. Though you can count by any
+field, very often id field is used. Count is available to text, integer,
+id, money, and timestamp.
+
+*Count Distinct.*
+
+This transform counts the number of records with unique value in the
+field. If two records have the same value in the field, they will be
+counted once only. A typical example of using Count Distinct is counting
+the number of active patrons who borrowed items at a library. Each
+patron can be counted once only but he/she may borrow multiple items.
+Transforming the patron id in circulation record with Count Distinct
+will result in the required number. Since each patron has a unique id,
+she/her will be counted once only. Count Distinct is available to text,
+integer, id, money, and timestamp.
+
+*Max.*
+
+It compares the values in the field of all result records and then
+returns the one record with the highest value. Max is available to text,
+integer, money, and timestamp. For timestamp the highest value means the
+latest date. For example, if a checkout date is transformed by Max, the
+returned date is the last checkout date.
+
+*Min.*
+
+It works the same way as Max except that it returns the lowest value.
+Min is available to text, integer, money, and timestamp.
+
+Note that each transform has either an Aggregate or Non-Aggregate output
+type.
+
+Whether an output is Non-Aggregate or Aggregate depends on whether the
+output value relies on a single record or several records. It is
+Non-Aggregate if the result is strictly from a single record, while it
+is Aggregate if it is from several records. For example, the value of
+Count transform of circulation id will increase by 1 whenever a record
+is found. So the output is Aggregate. The output of Max transform of
+checkout date is technically not aggregated, but there may be several
+records invovled before the highest value is deterrmined.
+
+When used as filters, non-aggregate and aggregate types correspond to
+Base and Aggregate filters respectively. To see the difference between a
+base filter and an aggregate filter, imagine that you are creating a
+report to find out the popular items that were circulated more than 3
+times last month. This would require a base filter to specify the month
+of interest and an aggregate filter on the count of circulation record
+on each item.
+
+Operators describe how two pieces of data can be compared to each other.
+They are used when creating filters in a template to determine which
+records should be included in the result. The record is included when
+the comparation returns "TRUE". The possible ways of comparing data are
+related to data type and data transforms. Below are some commonly used
+operators.
+
+*Equals.*
+
+Compares two operands and returns TRUE if they are exactly the same.
+
+*In List.*
+
+It is similar to Equals, except it allows you specify multiple
+parameters and returns "TRUE" if the field is equal to any one of the
+given values.
+
+*Not In List.*
+
+It is the opposite of In List. Multiple parameters can be specified.
+TRUE will be returned only when none of the parameters is matched with
+the value in the field.
+
+*Greater Than.*
+
+This operator returns TRUE if a field is greater than your parameter.
+For text fields, the string is compared character by character in
+accordance with the general rule that numerical characters are smaller
+than alphabetical characters and upper case alphabeticals are smaller
+than lower case alphabeticals; for timestamps “Greater Than” can be
+thought of as “later than” or "after".
+
+*Less Than.*
+
+This operator returns TRUE if a field is less than, lower than, earlier
+than or smaller than your parameter.
+
+*Between.*
+
+Two parameters are required by this operator. TRUE is returned when the
+field value is Greater Than or Equal to the smaller given value and Less
+Than or Equal to the bigger given value. The smaller parameter should
+always comes first when filling in a filter with this operator. For
+example: between 3 and 5 is correct. Between 5 and 3 will return FALSE
+on the Reports interface. For timestamp earlier date always comes first.
+
+*Is NULL or Blank.*
+
+Returns TRUE for fields that contain no data or blank string. For most
+intents and purposes this operator should be used when there is no
+visible value in the field.
+
+*Contains Matching Substring.*
+
+This operator checks if any part of the field matches the given
+parameter. It is case-sensitive.
+
+*Contains Matching Substring (Ignore Case).*
+
+This operator is identical to Contains Matching Substring, except it is
+not case-sensitive.
+
+[[serials-start]]
+Serials
+-------
+
+*Adapted with permission from original material by the
+http://docs.evergreen-ils.org/2.4/_serials_control_view.html[Evergreen
+Community]*
+
+This documentation is intended for users who will be ordering
+subscriptions, distributing issues, and receiving issues in Sitka
+Evergreen. The described processes have been tested by Sitka support in
+Sitka's shared environment and are the sole supported workflow for
+serials in Sitka Evergreen. Sitka support strongly recommends adherence
+to this prescribed workflow.
+
+[[serialsvideos]]
+Serials Videos
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+**Introduction to Serials**: This 2 minute video provides a brief
+overview of the serials module
+
+http://videos.cooperative.bclibraries.ca/serials_intro.htm[Click here to
+view the video]
+
+**Serials Tutorial in Sitka Evergreen**: This 10 minute video outlines
+the basic procedure for creating a subscription and receiving Issues.
+
+http://videos.cooperative.bclibraries.ca/serials_tutorial.htm[Click here
+to view the video]
+
+[[serialsadmin]]
+Administration
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+The following settings will need to be configured in the Library
+Settings Editor before you start using the Serials module.
+
+Click Admin > Local Administration > Library Settings Editor.
+
+image:media/lse.png[image]
+
+Search or scroll to find Serials: Default display grouping for serials
+distributions presented in the OPAC.
+
+image:media/enum.png[image,scaledwidth=100.0%]
+
+Click Edit.
+
+Edit the setting as follows.
+
+* Context: By default your library is selected.
+* Value: Enter enum to display issues by enumeration. This value will
+become your default setting for display issues in the OPAC.
+
+image:media/enum1.png[image]
+
+Click Update Setting.
+
+Search or scroll to find OPAC: Use fully compressed serials holdings..
+
+image:media/opac.png[image,scaledwidth=100.0%]
+
+Click Edit.
+
+Edit the setting as follows.
+
+* Context: By default your library is selected.
+* Value: Select True from the dropdown menu to view a compressed
+holdings statement.
+
+image:media/opac1.png[image]
+
+Click Update Setting.
+
+Search or scroll to find OPAC: Specify how items are ordered.
+
+image:media/order.png[image,scaledwidth=100.0%]
+
+Click Edit.
+
+Edit the setting as follows.
+
+* Context: By default your library is selected.
+* Value: Choose one of the following
+** desc: To sort from newest to oldest by active date
+** asc: To sort from oldest to newest by active date
+** call: To sort by call number
+
+image:media/sortorder.png[image]
+
+Click Update Setting.
+
+[[serials-copy-template]]
+Copy Template
+-------------
+
+[[serials-create-copy-template]]
+Create a Copy Template
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+__________________________________________________________________
+*Caution*
+
+You must create at least one template in order to receive serials.
+__________________________________________________________________
+
+A copy template enables you to specify item attributes that should be
+applied by default to all copies of serials. You can create one copy
+template and apply it to multiple serials or you can create multiple
+templates. For example, you may want to create one copy template for
+Popular Magazines and one template for Juvenile Magazines.
+
+Select Admin > Local Administration > Copy Template Editor.
+
+Click on New Copy Template.
+
+Enter parameters for your new copy template.
+
+____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Tip*
+
+*Name* - Enter a Name for the template.
+
+*Owning Library* - Select an owning library from the Owning lib drop
+down menu. This organization owns the copy template. A staff member with
+permissions at that organization can modify the copy template.
+
+*Circulate* - Click the box adjacent to Circulate if you want the item
+to circulate.
+
+*Holdable* - Check the box adjacent to Holdable if patrons can place
+holds on the item. *Important* Must also check the box for Mint
+Condition
+
+**OPAC Visible**- Check the box adjacent to OPAC Visible if you want
+patrons to be able to see the item in the OPAC after you receive it.
+
+*Loan Duration* - Select a loan duration rule from the drop down menu if
+all serial issues you will use this template for share the same Loan
+Duration, otherwise leave it blank and fill it in after the item is
+received..
+
+*Fine Level* - Select a fine level for the item from the drop down menu
+if all serial issues you will use this template for share the same fine
+rule, otherwise leave it blank and fill it in after the item is
+received.
+
+**Location**- Select a copy Location from the drop down menu.
+
+*Circulation Modifier* - Select a circ modifier from the drop down box.
+
+*Floating* - Do not select this as this must be left blank.
+
+*Deposit* - Check the box adjacent to Deposit if patrons must place a
+deposit on the copy before they can use it.
+
+*Reference* - Check the box adjacent to Reference if the item is a
+reference item.
+
+*Mint Condition* This box must be checked if serials are "holdable". If
+this box is not checked the copies will not be used to fill holds.
+
+*Age Protection* - Leave this field blank for your template. You may
+assign a Age Hold Protection rule after a serial issue is received if
+required.
+
+*Alert Message* - Enter a message in the Alert Message field if
+required. This message will appear every time the any serial item this
+template is used for is checked out to a patron.
+
+*Circ as Type* - Leave this field blank for your template.
+
+*Deposit Amount* - Leave this field blank for your template.You may
+assign a deposit price after a serial issue is received if required.
+
+*Price* -Leave this field blank for your template.You may assign a price
+after a serial issue is received if required.
+
+*Status* - This is an optional field.
+____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+Click Save.
+
+[[edit-copy-template]]
+Edit a Copy Template
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+You can make changes to an existing copy template. Changes that you make
+to a copy template will apply to any items that you receive after you
+edited the template.
+
+Select Admin > Local Administration > Copy Template Editor. Double-click
+in the row of the template you want to edit. The copy template will
+appear, and you can edit the fields. After making changes, click Save.
+
+[[serials-control]]
+Creating Serial Records
+-----------------------
+
+[[serial-control-view]]
+Serial Control View
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+The Serial Control view enables you to manage serials in a single tabbed
+interface. Serial Control view consists of five tabs.
+
+1. **Items: Used to receive issues.**.
+2. Units: Not currently used.
+3. Distributions: Can be used to create and manage distributions or
+streams. We recommend that you access this information under the
+Subscriptions tab.
+4. **Subscriptions: Used to create and manage subscriptions.**.
+5. Claims: Not currently used.
+
+[[managing-serials-records]]
+Managing Serials Records
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+link:#subscription[Create a Subscription]
+
+link:#distribution[Create a Distribution]
+
+link:#caption[Create Captions and Patterns]
+
+link:#pattern[Pattern Code Wizard]
+
+link:#issuance[Create an Issuance]
+
+link:#predictions[Generate Predictions]
+
+[[subscription]]
+Create a Subscription
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
+
+A subscription is designed to hold all information related to a single
+serial title. Therefore, each library is likely to have only one
+subscription per serial title.
+
+A subscription must be added to a catalogue record, so to start you must
+locate the record in the catalogue. If the record is not already in the
+catalogue, you can import it via any of your preferred methods (MARC
+import, Z39.50 search, etc.)
+
+Search the catalogue. (F3)
+
+image:media/3721_1.png[image]
+
+Select the bibliographic record for the magazine or periodical.
+
+image:media/searchresults.png[image,scaledwidth=100.0%]
+
+Click on the title to open the Record Detailsscreen.
+
+Click on Actions for this Record and select Serial Control View.
+
+image:media/cat1.png[image,scaledwidth=100.0%]
+
+Click on the Subscriptions tab.
+
+image:media/submpl.png[image]
+
+Select the branch that will own the subscription. (Your Library).
+
+Click on Actions for Selected Row, and select Add Subscription.
+
+Complete the subscription information.
+
+* Owning Library: This field is automatically populated with the library
+you selected in step 5.
+* Start Date: Use the calendar to select the date that the subscription
+begins, and click Apply.
+* End Date: Enter the date that the subscription ends. (**This date is
+required to generate renewal reports**)
+* Bibliographic Record Entry: This field is automatically populated with
+the record ID of the bibliographic record.
+* Expected Date Offset: *(Optional)* Enter the difference between the
+nominal publishing date of an issue and the date that you expect to
+receive your copy. For example, if an issue is published the first day
+of each month, but you receive the copy two days prior to the
+publication date, then enter -2 days into this field.
+
+Click Save.
+
+[[distribution]]
+Create a Distribution
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
+
+You must create a distribution to indicate:
+
+* Which branches should receive copies of a serial.
+* The number of copies that should be sent to each branch.
+
+To create a distribution:
+
+Click on the Distribution tab
+
+Click on New Distribution
+
+Complete the Distribution information.
+
+* Apply a new label to the distribution. Example: Magazine Title or
+Branch Code MPL. Click Apply.
++
+________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Note*
+
+If you are creating multiple distributions (multiple copies of each
+issue) the name of the label becomes more important. Multi branch
+libraries setting up a subscription at a system level will want to use
+the branch code as the label to easily determine which copy is sent to
+each branch.
+________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+* The holding library is filled in by default and is the library to
+which you attached the subscription.
+* Display Grouping should be set to Enumeration
+* Receive Unit Template: This is the template that should be applied to
+copies when they are received. Select a template from the drop down menu
+and click Apply.
++
+___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Note*
+
+If you have not yet created a serial copy template please refer to
+http://docs.sitka.bclibraries.ca/Sitka/draft/html/create-copy-template.html[35.1
+Create a Copy Template]
+___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+Click Save.
+
+_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Note*
+
+Instruction on how to setup a Routing List can be found here
+http://docs.sitka.bclibraries.ca/Sitka/current/html/serialsrouting.html[Serials
+Routing]
+_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+[[caption]]
+Create Captions and Patterns
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
+
+Caption and Pattern objects define the same material that would be
+described in an 853, 854, or 855 MARC tag. Here you define how your
+issues will be captioned and how often you get them.
+
+Click on the Captions and Patterns tab.
+
+Click the Add New button.
+
+Click Wizard.
+
+Alternatively you can copy and paste a Caption and Pattern string into
+the empty Pattern Code box. See link:#serial_pattern[section_title] for
+a list of pre-defined Caption/Pattern strings to choose from.
+
+______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Note*
+
+Sitka support has created pattern codes for many popular periodicals /
+magazines. Whenever possible please use the pattern codes created by
+Sitka support. If your periodical / magazine is not in the list, contact
+Sitka support, or create a pattern using the Pattern Code Wizard.
+______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+[[editcaption]]
+Edit Captions and Patterns
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
+
+If the publication pattern changes you will need to delete the current
+caption/pattern information and enter a new caption/pattern as well as a
+new "dummy issuance"
+
+Click the arrow beside the subscription
+
+Click the Captions/Patterns row beneath the subscription.
+
+Click the row with the Caption/Pattern #
+
+Click in the "Pattern Code" box and paste the new pattern code, or click
+on the button for Pattern Code Wizard to create a new pattern string.
+
+Click on Modify Caption and Pattern
+
+Add an Issuance as per link:#issuance[section_title]
+
+Make predictions as per link:#predictions[section_title]
+
+[[pattern]]
+Pattern Code Wizard
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
+
+Click on the Pattern Code Wizard button.
+
+Enumerations:
+
+* To add an enumeration, check the box adjacent to Use enumerations?
+* A field for the First level will appear. Enter the enumeration for the
+first level. A common first level enumeration is volume,vol., or "v".
+* Click Add Enumeration.
+* A field for the second level will appear. Enter the enumeration for
+the second level. A common second level enumeration is number, or “no.”
+* Enter the number of bibliographic units per next higher level.
+* Choose the enumeration scheme from the drop down menu.
+
+Calendar:
+
+* To use months, seasons, or dates in your caption, check the box
+adjacent to Use calendar changes?
+* Identify the point in the year at which the highest level enumeration
+caption changes.
+* In the Typedrop down menu, select the points during the year at which
+you want the calendar to restart.
+* In the Point drop down menu, select the specific time at which you
+would like to change the calendar.
+* To add another calendar change, click Add Calendar Change. There are
+no limits on the number of calendar changes that you can add.
+* When you have finished the calendar changes, click Next.
+
+Chronology:
+
+* To add chronological units to the captions, check the box adjacent to
+Use chronology captions?
+* Choose a chronology for the first level. If you want to display the
+terms such as “year” and “month” next to the chronology caption in the
+catalogue, then check the box beneath Display in holdingfield.
+* To include additional levels of chronology, click Add Chronology
+Caption. Each level that you add must be smaller than the previous
+level.
+* After you have completed the chronology caption, click Next.
+
+Compress and Expand Captions
+
+* Select the appropriate option for compressing or expanding your
+captions in the catalogue from the Compressibility and Expandability
+drop down menu.
+* Choose the appropriate caption evaluation from the drop down menu.
+* Choose the frequency of your publication from the drop down menu. For
+irregular frequencies, you may wish to select Use number of issues per
+year:, and enter the total number of issues that you receive each year.
+* Click Next.
+
+Regularity Information
+
+* If needed, check box for Use specific regularity information.
+* Choose the appropriate information for combined, omitted or published
+issues.
+* If you selected Use number of issues per year: in the previous step,
+you will need to specify when the issues are published using the
+specific regularity information.
+* Choose the appropriate frequency and issue. Add additional rows as
+required.
+* Click Finish.
+
+Captions and Patterns
+
+* To complete the wizard, click Create Pattern Code.
+* Click Create Caption and Pattern.
+
+[[issuance]]
+Create an Issuance
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
+
+Issuance is a simple,uncompressed MFHD field 863.
+
+The Issuances function allows you to manually create an issue. Evergreen
+will use the initial issue to predict future issues. You need to create
+a “dummy” issuance that will be deleted after you have done your
+predictions. This should be created for the issue BEFORE your first
+issue.
+
+Click on the Issuances tab.
+
+Click on New Issuance.
+
+Complete the Issuance information
+
+* Label: Enter a name for this issuance.
+* Date Published: Enter the date for the issue before the first one in
+your subscription. For example, if your subscription starts in January
+2014, enter a pub. date for the December 2013 issue.
+* Click the Wizard button. Enter Holding code information [Enumeration
+and Chronology].
+* Click on Compile.
+* When finished, click Save.
+
+[[predictions]]
+Generate Predictions
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
+
+Open the Subscriptions tab.
+
+Click on the subscription row.
+
+Click Actions for Selected Row and select Make Predictions.
+
+A pop up box will ask you how many items you want to predict. Enter the
+number, and click OK.
+
+A confirmation message will appear. Click OK.
+
+Delete first Issuance
+
+* Click on the arrow beside the subscription
+* Click on the arrow beside Issuances.
+* Right Click on the “dummy” issuance you created and choose Delete
+Issuance.
+
+[[serials-receive]]
+Receiving Serials
+-----------------
+
+[[serial_receive]]
+Receive serials
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+Receiving serials is done through the Serials Control View.
+
+Go to the Items tab.
+
+image:media/38_1.png[image,scaledwidth=100.0%]
+
+Click on Refresh
+
+To receive items, click the Receive radio button. Items that have yet to
+be received are displayed in the top half of the screen the. Recently
+received items are displayed in the bottom half of the screen.
+
+Select the issue that you want to receive.
+
+Select the current working unit. Click Set Current Unit, located in the
+lower right corner of the screen. A drop down menu will appear. Select
+Auto per item.
+
+* Auto per item - Use this if you want to assign a barcode to each item
+individually.
+* New Unit - Use this if you want to assign the same barcode to each
+item within a unit. (Binding Process)
+* No Unit - Use this if you do not want to assign a barcode to the item.
+Please note that this selection will not create a copy on the copy table
+and is not recommended.
+
+Click Receive/Move Selected.
+
+Enter a barcode and call number. You can scan the item barcode into the
+barcode field. Enter a rational call # for each item *(We recommend
+enumeration and/or chronology captions (ex V.22 No.1 Jan 2013 / January
+2013)*
+
+A message confirming receipt of the item appears. Click OK.
+
+* The screen refreshes. In the top half of the screen the item displays
+a received date. In the bottom half of the screen the item that you have
+just received is now at the top of the list of the received items.
+
+________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Tip*
+
+Serial Alerts at Receive Time - The new "Alerts" button on the Items tab
+displays the number of alert notes that are available for the selected
+items, and clicking this button opens a window which displays all
+applicable alert notes, sorted by type . Notes can also be edited or
+deleted from this window.
+________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+[[serial-batch_receive]]
+Batch Receive Serials
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+It is also possible to receiving multiple copies of a serial using the
+Serials Batch Receive interface.
+
+________________________________________________________________________
+*Caution*
+
+This procedure is for sites receiving multiple copies of the same issue.
+________________________________________________________________________
+
+Click on Actions for this record
+
+Select Serials Batch Receive
+
+Enter an identifier for a bibliographic record. ISSN or Database ID
+
+Click on Find Record
+
+Choose an Issuance
+
+Click Next
+
+Select Create Units for Receiving Items
+
+Enter Barcode,Call Number and Price.
+
+Click on Receive Selected Items.
+
+Click on Start Over to receive the next subscription, or close the tab.
+
+[[serials-opac]]
+OPAC
+----
+
+[[serials-search]]
+Searching for Serials in the OPAC
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+Searching for serials is the same process as searching for other items
+in the catalogue. Detailed search instructions can be found
+http://docs.sitka.bclibraries.ca/Sitka/current/html/opac-catalogue.html[Chapter
+27. Search the Catalogue]
+
+[[opac-display]]
+OPAC Serials Display
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+Bibliographic records that contain serials information will have a new
+section in the OPAC called Issues Held. The Issues Held tab contains an
+expandable holdings statement that details each issue in your
+collection.
+
+image:media/issues.png[image,scaledwidth=100.0%]
+
+___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Note*
+
+There are 3 settings in the Library Settings Editor that must be
+configured for your serials OPAC to display in this manner. For more
+information please refer to link:#serialsadmin[section_title]
+___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+[[serials-reports]]
+Reports
+-------
+
+[[serial_reporttemplates]]
+Serials Report Templates
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+An account with Reporter permissions is required to clone templates from
+the Shared Folders section and save them to My Folders.
+
+______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Note*
+
+For more information regarding reports and creating reports from
+templates please see
+http://docs.sitka.bclibraries.ca/Sitka/current/html/report.html[Part V.
+Reports]
+______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+*Subscription Titles by holding library for selected year:* provides a
+list of all current subscriptions, used for reviewing subscriptions.
+
+*Subscription Titles with End Date within Time Frame:* provides a list
+of subscriptions with an end date, used to generate titles for renewal
+
+___________________________________________________________________________________
+*Note*
+
+You must enter an end date in your subscriptions for this report to
+generate titles
+___________________________________________________________________________________
+
+*Serial Circulation Report:* provides circulation statistics for
+serials, used to generate circulation statistics for Serials.
+
+*Serials Claiming Items List:* provides a list of serials that have not
+yet been received, used for claiming missing issues.
+
+[[serials-special]]
+Special Issues
+--------------
+
+[[addissue]]
+Add an Issuance
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+The following instructions are for adding additional Issuances to an
+existing subscription. This process is used for unpredicted or special
+Issues.
+
+From the Serial Record --> Click on the Actions for this record button
+
+Select Alternate Serial Control
+
+Click on the subscription ID
+
+Open on the Issuances tab
+
+Click on the New Issuance button
+
+Enter the Label and Date Published
+
+Click on the Wizard button
+
+Click on the Create Holding Code button
+
+Click on the Save button
+
+You must now add an item to the Issuance
+
+Click on the Issuance you just created
+
+Click on the New Items button
+
+Enter Date Expected and click Create
+
+The item is now ready to receive. If you complete the Date Received
+field and change the status to received then it will receive the issue
+but it won’t create the associated copy record whereas if you leave it
+blank and receive the item through the Serials Control View or Batch
+Receive function you can create the Copy Record at that time.
+
+[[editissue]]
+Edit an Issuance
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+The following instructions are for entering "Special Issues" or for
+editing an existing Issuance
+
+From the Serial Control View --> Click on the Subscriptions tab
+
+Click on the arrow beside your library name
+
+Click on the arrow beside Issuances
+
+Click on the Issuance you would like to edit
+
+Edit the label / date published
+
+Click Modify Issuance
+
+[[deleteissuance]]
+Delete an Issuance
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+From the Subscriptions tab in Serials Control View
+
+Click on the arrow beside your library name
+
+Click on the arrow beside your subscription #
+
+Click on the arrow beside Issuances
+
+Right Click on the Issue you would like to delete, Select Delete
+Issuance
+
+[[serials-binding]]
+Binding Process
+---------------
+
+[[serialsbinding]]
+Binding Template
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+In order to "Bind" serials you must assign a **Bind Unit Template**. You
+can use the same template as your *Receive Unit Template* or create a
+new one. For more information about Copy Templates please see
+http://docs.sitka.bclibraries.ca/Sitka/draft/html/create-copy-template.html[35.1
+Create a Copy Template]
+
+Search the catalogue. (F3)
+
+Select the bibliographic record for the magazine or periodical.
+
+Click on the title to open the Record Detailsscreen.
+
+Click on Actions for this Record and select Serial Control View.
+
+Click on the Subscriptions tab.
+
+image:media/submpl.png[image]
+
+Click on the arrow beside your Library
+
+Click on the arrow beside your Subscription
+
+Click on the arrow beside your Distribution
+
+image:media/arrow1.png[image,scaledwidth=100.0%]
+
+Click on the Distribution Label
+
+In the Distribution window on the right hand side of the screen, Click
+on Bind Unit Template.Select your template from the list
+
+Click Apply
+
+Click Modify Distribution(s)
+
+Click Ok
+
+[[serialsbindunit]]
+Binding Units
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+Search the catalogue. (F3)
+
+Select the bibliographic record for the magazine or periodical.
+
+Click on the title to open the Record Detailsscreen.
+
+Click on Actions for this Record and select Serial Control View.
+
+Click on the Items tab.
+
+Click in the radial button for Bind
+
+Click on Set Current Unit
+
+Select New Unit This is will allow you to use 1 barcode for all items
+within the unit
+
+_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Note*
+
+If you want the item to be bound into an existing unit, select Recent
+and select the desired unit from the menu. To make a change in bound
+items, receive or bind the items into an already existing unit
+_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+Select the items to be bound
+
+Click on Receive/Move Selected
+
+Scan or Enter the barcode for the item
+
+Enter the callnumber for the item
+
+Click Ok
+
+[[serials-routing]]
+Routing
+-------
+
+[[serialsrouting]]
+Serials Routing
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+A routing list is made up of “users,” who will receive a copy of a
+serial before that copy hits its regular shelving location. .
+
+The following instructions assume that you have already setup a
+distribution as per
+http://docs.sitka.bclibraries.ca/Sitka/current/html/managing-serials-records.html#distribution[36.2.2
+Create a Distribution]
+
+________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Note*
+
+Depending on the status you have setup in the copy template editor, we
+suggest creating a copy template for "Routed" serials. The status for
+these items should be set to "In Process" or "Cataloguing". After the
+item has been routed around, it will need to be checked in to display a
+status of "Available"
+________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+Search the catalogue. (F3)
+
+Select the bibliographic record for the magazine or periodical.
+
+Click on the title to open the Record Detailsscreen.
+
+Click on Actions for this Record and select Serial Control View.
+
+Click on the Subscriptions tab.
+
+image:media/431_1.png[image]
+
+Click on the arrow beside your Library
+
+Click on the row with the Subscription #
+
+Click on the Distribution tab on the right hand side of the screen
+
+Click on the Hyperlinked Label
+
+Select the target stream by checking the box
+
+Click on Routing List For Selected Stream
+
+Choose the radio button beside barcode or deparment
+
+* Barcode - enter the user barcode
+* Department - free form text field
+
+Click on Add
+
+Repeat these steps for any additional Barcodes or Deparments
+
+You can re-arrange users in the list by dragging and dropping each
+numbered row.
+
+When you've got the list you want, click on Save Changes
+
+[[receiverouting]]
+Serials Batch Receive
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+___________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Caution*
+
+In order to view and print the Routing Slip, you must receive your
+serials by Serials Batch Receive
+___________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+Click on Actions for this Record
+
+Select Serials Batch Receive
+
+Make sure Create Units for Received Items is checked.
+
+Choose an Issuance from the drop down menu
+
+Click on Next
+
+Fill in the required information.
+
+* *Barcode* - Enter or Scan the item barcode
+* **Circ Modifier**- Select the appropriate Circ Modifier
+* **Call Numbe**r - Enter a Call Number
+* *Note* - Enter a Note (Optional)
+* *Copy Location* - Select the Copy Location
+* *Price* - Enter a Price (Optional)
+* **Routing List**- Make sure this box is checked
+* **Receive**- Make sure this box is checked
+
+Click on Receive Selected Items
+
+Print Routing List
+
+[[serials-caption]]
+Caption and Pattern Codes
+-------------------------
+
+[[serial_pattern]]
+Caption and Pattern Codes
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+Sitka support has created Caption and Pattern Codes for popular
+magazines and frequencies. Please copy and paste the whole string
+(Including Square brackets "[ ]") in the "Pattern Code" box.
+
+.Popular Caption and Pattern Codes
+[width="100%",cols="25%,25%,25%,25%",options="header",]
+|=======================================================================
+|Title |Database ID |Pattern Code |Notes
+|BC Business |108282856
+|[“2”,”0”,”8”,”1”,”a”,”v.”,”b”,”no.”,”u”,”12”,”v”,”r”,"i","(year)","j","(month)",”w”,”m”,”x”,”01”]
+|Monthly - 12 Issues/Year - With Enumeration captions
+
+|BC Home & Garden. |108225216 |["2","0","8","1","a","v.
+","b","no.","u","6","v","r","i","(year)","j","(month)","w","b","x","01","y","cm01/02","y","cm03/04","y","cm05/06","y","cm07/08","y","cm09/10","y","cm11/12"]
+|Bi-Monthly - 6 Issues / Year
+
+|BC nature. |108527928
+|["2","0","8","1","a","V.","b","No.","u","4","v","r","i","(year)","j","(season)","w","q","x","01"]
+|Seasonal - 4 Issues / Year Spring, Summer, Fall, Winter - with
+enumeration captions (V. No.)
+
+|BC outdoors sport fishing and outdoor adventure. |108419744
+|["2","0","8","1","a","v.","b","no.","u","var","v","r","i","(year)","j","(month)","w","m","x","01","y","cm01/02","y","cm03/04","y","cm11/12"]
+|9 Issues / Year - 7 Sport Fishing & 2 Hunting Editions - with
+enumeration captions (v. no.) modify issuance label to add "hunting or
+sports fishing"
+
+|Better homes and gardens. |108255191
+|[“2”,”0”,”8”,”1”,”a”,”v.”,”b”,”no.”,”u”,”12”,”v”,”r”,"i","(year)","j","(month)",”w”,”m”,”x”,”01”]
+|Monthly - 12 Issues/Year - with Enumeration captions
+
+|British Columbia history : Journal of the British Columbia Historical
+Federation. |108286944
+|["2","0","8","1","a","V.","b","No.","u","4","v","r","i","(year)","j","(season)","w","q","x","01"]
+|Seasonal - 4 Issues / Year Spring, Summer, Fall, Winter - with
+Enumeration captions (V. No.)
+
+|British Columbia magazine. |108304607
+|["2","0","8","1","a","V.","b","No.","u","4","v","r","i","(year)","j","(season)","w","q","x","01"]
+|Seasonal - 4 Issues / Year Spring, Summer, Fall, Winter - with
+enumeration captions (V. No.)
+
+|Canada's style at home. |108304570
+|["2","0","8","1","a","(year)","b","(month)","w","m"] |Monthly - 12
+Issues/Year - without enumeration captions
+
+|Canadian gardening. |108142330
+|["2","0","8","1","a","v.","b","no.","u","6","v","r","i","(year)","j","(season)","w","6","x","01","y","pm01,04,05","y","ps22,23,24"]
+|6 Issues/Year - January, April, May, Summer, Autumn, Winter
+
+|Canadian geographic. |108304606
+|["2","0","8","1","a","(year)","b","(season)","w","q"] |Seasonal - 4
+Issues / Year Spring, Summer, Fall, Winter - without enumeration
+
+|Canadian home workshop. |108286953
+|["2","0","8","1","a","v.","b","no.","u","6","v","r","i","(year)","j","(season)","w","6","x","10","y","ps24,22","y","pm10,03,04,09"]
+|6 Issues/Year - October, Winter, March, Apr/May, Summer, September
+
+|Canadian house and home. |108286955
+|["2","0","8","1","a","v.","b","no.","u","12","v","r","i","(year)","j","(month)","w","m","x","01"]
+|Monthly - 12 Issues/Year - with enumeration captions (v. no.)
+
+|Canadian living. |108289179
+|["2","0","8","1","a","v.","b","no.","u","12","v","r","i","(year)","j","(month)","w","m","x","01"]
+|Monthly - 12 Issues/Year - with enumeration captions (v. no.)
+
+|Cooking light. |108304605
+|["2","0","8","1","a","v.","b","no.","u","12","v","r","i","(year)","j","(month)","w","m","x","01"]
+|Monthly - 12 Issues/Year - with enumeration captions (v. no.)
+
+|Cook's Illustrated. |108304588
+|["2","0","8","1","a","no.","i","(year)","j","(month)","w","m","y","cm01/02","y","cm03/04","y","cm05/06","y","cm07/08","y","cm09/10","y","cm11/12"]
+|Bi-Monthly - 6 Issues / Year - with enumeration caption (no.)
+
+|Country living. |108303839
+|["2","0","8","1","a","v.","b","no.","u","10","v","r","i","(year)","j","(month)","w","m","x","12","y","cm12/01","y","cm07/08"]
+|10 Issues/Year - Dec/Jan, July/Aug combined - with enumeration captions
+(v. no.)
+
+|Crafts 'n things. |108304801
+|["2","0","8","1","a","V.","b","No.","u","4","v","r","i","(year)","j","(season)","w","q","x","01"]
+|Seasonal - 4 Issues / Year Spring, Summer, Fall, Winter - with
+enumeration captions
+
+|Food network magazine. |108304833
+|["2","0","8","1","a","v.","b","no.","u","10","v","r","i","(year)","j","(month)","w","m","x","01","y","cm01/02","y","cm07/08"]
+|10 Issues/Year - Jan/Feb, July/Aug combined - with enumeration captions
+(v. no.)
+
+|Gardens west. |108219964
+|["2","0","8","1","a","v.","b","no.","u","9","v","r","i","(year)","j","(month)","w","m","x","01","y","cm01/02","y","cm07/08","y","cm11/12"]
+|9 Issues/Year - Jan/Feb, July/Aug, Nov/Dec combined
+
+|Hello! Canada |108221772
+|["2","0","8","1","a","No.","i","(year)","j","(month)","k","(day)","w","w"]
+|Weekly - 52 Issues/Year
+
+|Ladies' home journal. |108304836
+|["2","0","8","1","a","v.","b","no.","u","11","v","r","i","(year)","j","(month)","w","m","x","02","y","cm12/01"]
+|11 Issues/Year - Dec/Jan combined
+
+|Maclean's : Canada's national magazine. |108220410
+|["2","0","8","1","a","v.","b","no.","u","var","v","r","i","(year)","j","(month)","k","(day)","w","w","x","01"]
+|Weekly - 52 Issues/Year
+
+|Martha Stewart living. |108304837
+|["2","0","8","1","a","V.","b","No.","u","12","v","r","i","(year)","j","(month)","w","m","x","01"]
+|Monthly - 12 Issues/Year - with enumeration captions
+
+|Natural health. |108420801
+|["2","0","8","1","a","v.","b","no.","u","6","v","r","i","(year)","j","(month)","w","m","x","01","y","cm01/02","y","cm03/04","y","cm05/06","y","cm07/08","y","cm09/10","y","cm11/12"]
+|Bi-Monthly - 6 Issues / Year - with enumeration captions (v. no.)
+
+|O : the Oprah magazine. |108305645
+|["2","0","8","1","a","v.","b","no.","u","12","v","r","i","(year)","j","(month)","w","m","x","01"]
+|Monthly - 12 Issues/Year - with enumeration captions (v. no.)
+
+|Organic gardening. |108220197
+|["2","0","8","1","a","v.","b","no.","u","6","v","r","i","(year)","j","(month)","w","m","x","12","y","cm12/01","y","cm02/03","y","cm04/05","y","cm06/07","y","cm08/09","y","cm10/11"]
+|6 Issues/Year - D/J, F/M, A/M, J/J, A/S, O/N
+
+|Our Canada. |108528320
+|["2","0","8","1","a","v.","b","no.","u","6","v","r","i","(year)","j","(month)","w","m","x","12","y","cm12/01","y","cm02/03","y","cm04/05","y","cm06/07","y","cm08/09","y","cm10/11"]
+|6 Issues/Year - D/J, F/M, A/M, J/J, A/S, O/N
+
+|PC Gamer |30251314
+|["2","0","8","1","a","no.","i","(year)","j","(month)","w","m"] |Monthly
+- 12 Issues/Year - with enumeration captions (no.)
+
+|People weekly. |108142236
+|["2","0","8","1","a","v.","b","no.","u","var","v","r","i","(year)","j","(month)","k","(day)","w","w","x","01"]
+|Weekly - 52 Issues/Year
+|=======================================================================
+
+*Sample Sets of Serial Patterns*
+
+To use one of the following codes you must copy and paste all the text
+inside and including the square brackets [ ].
+
+*DAILY:*
+
+* Omitted Sunday. 6x a week, but not Sunday:
++
+|["2","0","8","1","a","no,","i","(year)","j","(month)","k","(day)","w","d","x","01","y","odsu"]
+
+*WEEKLY:*
+
+* Increments continuously without volume number:
++
+|["2","0","8","1","a","no.","i","(year)","j","(month)","k","(day)","w","w"]
+* Increments continuously with volume number:
++
+|["2","0","8","1","a","Vol.","b","No.","u","52","v","c","i","(year)","j","(month)","k","(day)","w","w","x","01"]
+* Restart with volume number:
++
+|["2","0","8","1","a","Vol.","b","no.","u","52","v","r","i","(year)","j","(month)","k","(day)","w","w","x","01"]
+
+*26 Times a year (and variations):*
+
+* 26 times a year. Increments continuously without volume:
++
+|["2","0","8","1","a","no.","i","(year)","j","(month)","k","(day)","w","e","x","01"]
+* 26 times a year. Increments continuously with volume:
++
+|["2","0","8","1","a","Vol.","b","no.","u","26","v","c","w","e","x","01"]
+* 26 times a year. Restart with volume:
++
+|["2","0","8","1","a","Vol.","b","no.","u","26","v","r","i","(year)","j","(month)","k","(day)","w","w","x","01","y"]
+* 26 times a year. Restart, year used as volume:
++
+|["2","0","8","1","a","Vol.","b","no.","u","26","v","r","w","e","x","01"]
+* 24 times a year. Restart, year used as volume:
++
+|["2","0","8","1","a","Vol.","b","no.","u","24","v","r","w","e","x","01"]
+
+*MONTHLY (and variations):*
+
+* Names of months without volume:
++
+|["2","0","8","1","i","(year)","j","month","w","m"]
+* Increments continuously without volume number:
++
+|["2","0","8","1","a","No.","i","(year)","j","(month)","w","m","x","01"]
+* Increments continuously with volume number:
++
+|["2","0","8","1","a","Vol.","b","no.","u","12","v","c","i","(year)","j","(month)","w","m","x","01"]
+* Restart without volume number:
++
+|["2","0","8","1","a","Vol.","b","No.","u","12","v","r","w","m","x","01"]
+* Restart with volume number:
++
+|["2","0","8","1","a","vol.","b","no.","u","12","v","r","i","(year)","j","(month)","w","m","x","01"]
+* 11 times a year. Increments continuously without volume number:
++
+|["2","0","8","1","a","No.","u","11","v","c","i","(year)","j","(month)","w","m","x","01","y","om08"]
+* 11 times a year. Increments continuously with volume number:
++
+|["2","0","8","1","a","Vol.","b","No.","u","11","v","c","i","(year)","j","(month)","w","m","x","01","y","om08"]
+* 11 times a year. Restart without volume number:
++
+|["2","0","8","1","a","No.","u","11","v","c","i","(year)","j","(month)","w","m","x","01","y","om08"]
+* 11 times a year. Restart with volume number:
++
+|["2","0","8","1","a","vol.","b","no.","u","11","v","r","i","(year)","j","(month)","w","m","x","01","y","om08"]
+* 10 times a year with volume number. Increments continuously and no
+issues in August and September:
++
+|["2","0","8","1","a","Vol.","b","no.","u","10","v","c","i","(year)","j","(month)","w","m","x","01","y","om08","y","om09"]
+* 10 times a year, without volume number. Increments continuously, no
+issues in August and September:
++
+|["2","0","8","1","a","no.","u","10","v","c","i","(year)","j","(month)","w","m","x","01","y","om08","y","om09"]
+* 10 times a year. Restart, year used as volume number (no issues in
+January and August):
++
+|["2","0","8","1","a","Vol.","b","No.","u","10","v","r","w","m","x","01","y","om01","y","om08"]
+* 9 times a year. Restart and year used as volume number:
++
+|["2","0","8","1","a","Vol.","b","No.","u","9","v","r","w","m","x","01","y","om06","y","om07","y","om08"]
+* 8 times a year. Restart and year used as volume number:
++
+|["2","0","8","1","a","Vol.","b","No.","u","8","v","r","w","m","x","01","y","om01","y","om03","y","om06","y","om08"]
+* 8 times a year. Increments continuously and year used as volume
+number:
++
+|["2","0","8","1","a","Vol.","b","No.","u","8","v","c","w","m","x","01","y","om01","y","om03","y","om06","y","om08"]
+* 7 times a year. Restart and year used as volume number:
++
+|["2","0","8","1","a","Vol.","b","No.","u","7","v","r","w","m","x","01","y","om01","y","om03","y","om06","y","om08","y","om11"]
+* 5 times a year. Restart on volume:
++
+|["2","0","8","1","a","vol.","b","no.","u","5","v","r","i","(year)","j","(month)","w","b","x","01","y","om09","y","om12"]
+* 5 times a year. Increments continuously on volume:
++
+|["2","0","8","1","a","vol.","b","no.","u","5","v","c","i","(year)","j","(month)","w","b","x","01","y","om09","y","om12"]
+* 5 times a year. Increments continuously on volume:
++
+|["2","0","8","1","a","no.","u","5","v","c","i","(year)","j","(month)","w","b","x","01","y","om09","y","om12"]
+
+*Bimonthly:*
+
+* Bimonthly. Restart with volume:
++
+|["2","0","8","1","a","vol.","b","no.","u","6","v","r","i","(year)","j","(month)","w","b","x","01"]
+* Bimonthly. Restart without volume:
++
+|["2","0","8","1","a","Vol.","b","No.","u","6","v","r","w","b","x","01"]
+* Bimonthly. Increments continuously without volume:
++
+|["2","0","8","1","a","no.","u","6","v","c","i","(year)","j","(month)","w","b","x","01"]
+* Bimonthly. Increments continuously with volume:
++
+|["2","0","8","1","a","vol.","b","no.","u","6","v","c","i","(year)","j","(month)","w","b","x","01"]
+
+*Three times a year:*
+
+* Three times a year without volume and increments continuously:
++
+|["2","0","8","1","a","No.","u","3","v","c","i","(year)","j","(month)","w","t","x","01"]
+* Three times a year with volume and increments continuously:
++
+|["2","0","8","1","a","Vol.","b","No.","u","3","v","c","i","(year)","j","(month)","w","t","x","01"]
+* Three times a year with volume and restart:
++
+|["2","0","8","1","a","Vol.","b","No.","u","3","v","r","i","(year)","j","(month)","w","t","x","01"]
+* Three times a year with volume and restart, starting in July:
++
+|["2","0","8","1","a","Vol.","b","no.","u","3","v","r","i","(year)","j","(month)","w","t","x","07"]
+* Three times a year with volume and restart, starting in August:
++
+|["2","0","8","1","a","Vol.","b","no.","u","3","v","r","i","(year)","j","(month)","w","t","x","08"]
+* Three times a year without volume with restart:
++
+|["2","0","8","1","a","Vol.","b","No.","u","3","v","r","w","t"]
+
+*Quarterly:*
+
+* Quarterly. Increments continuously and volume:
++
+|["2","0","8","1","a","vol.","b","no.","i","(year)","j","(month)","w","q","x","01"]
+* Quarterly. Increments continuously and volume, starting in July:
++
+|["2","0","8","1","a","vol.","b","no.","i","(year)","j","(month)","w","q","x","06"]
+* Quarterly. Increments continuously without volume:
++
+|["2","0","8","1","a","no.","i","(year)","j","(month)","w","q","x","01"]
+* Quarterly. Restart and volume number:
++
+|["2","0","8","1","a","Vol.","b","no.","u","4","v","r","i","(year)","j","(month)","w","q","x","01"]
+* Quarterly. Restart and year used as volume number:
++
+|["2","0","8","1","a","Vol.","b","No.","u","4","v","r","w","q","x","01"]
+* Quarterly. Restart and volume, starting in March:
++
+|["2","0","8","1","a","Vol.","b","no.","u","4","v","r","i","(year)","j","(month)","w","q","x","03"]
+* Quarterly. Restart and volume, starting in July:
++
+|["2","0","8","1","a","Vol.","b","No.","u","4","v","r","i","(year)","j","(month)","w","q","x","07"]
+* Quarterly. Restart and volume, starting in October:
++
+|["2","0","8","1","a","Vol.","b","No.","u","4","v","r","i","(year)","j","(month)","w","q","x","10"]
+
+*Half-yearly:*
+
+* Half-yearly. Increments continuously without volume number:
++
+|["2","0","8","1","a","no.","i","(year)","j","(month)","w","f","x","01"]
+* Half-yearly. Increments continuously with volume number:
++
+|["2","0","8","1","a","Vol.","b","no.","i","(year)","j","(month)","w","f","x","01"]
+* Half-yearly. Restart with volume number:
++
+|["2","0","8","1","a","Vol.","b","No.","u","2","v","r","w","f","x","01"]
+* Half-yearly. Restart without volume number:
++
+|["2","0","8","1","a","Vol.","b","No.","u","2","v","r","w","f","x","01"]
+
+*Annually:*
+
+* Annual report:
++
+|["2","0","8","1","i","(year)","w","a"]
+* Annual report. Increments continuously:
++
+|["2","0","8","1","a","no.","i","(year)","w","a","x","01"]
+* Annual report. Increments continuously with volume number:
++
+|["2","0","8","1","a","Vol.","b","No.","u","1","v","c","i","(year)","w","a","x","01"]
+
+[[booking]]
+Using the Booking Module
+------------------------
+
+With the Evergreen Booking Module you can reserve catalogued
+(bibliographic) or non-catalogued (non-bibliographic) items for a
+particular patron for a specified time period. This chapter will help
+staff create reservations, generate pull lists for reserved items,
+capture reserved resources, and pick up and return reservations.
+
+The Booking Module allows you to lend out non-bibliographic items. They
+are called resources in Evergreen. Almost anything you lend out can be
+entered as a resource. Laptops, projectors, cables, ski locks, bike
+locks, cameras, easels, meeting rooms, even staplers can be lent using
+the Booking Module.
+
+The Booking Module can also be used to reserve bibliographic items. For
+example, do you have a special program coming up that you need all the
+books on ducks for? You can reserve them for the specific day of your
+program to make sure they will come back and are not checked out when
+getting near to your program day.
+
+[[booking-tutorial]]
+Evergreen Booking Tutorial
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+[[booking-create]]
+Creating a Booking Reservation
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+Only staff members may create reservations. A reservation can be started
+from link:#booking-create-patron[a patron record,] or
+link:#booking-create-module[a booking resource]. To reserve catalogued
+items, you may start from link:#booking-create-search[searching the
+catalogue,] if you do not know the booking item's barcode.
+
+Retrieve the patron’s record.
+
+Select Other > Booking > Create or Cancel Reservations. This takes you
+to the Reservations Screen.
+
+screenshot of booking menu
+
+For non-catalogued items, choose a Bookable Resource Type and click
+Next. For catalogued items, enter the barcode in Enter the barcode of a
+catalogued, bookable resource box, then click Next beside the box.
+
+screenshot of reservation screen
+
+For non-catalogued resources, the Bookable Resource Type and the items
+associated with the type will appear.
+
+For catalogued items, the title and the item will display in the box.
+
+screenshot of reservation creation screen
+
+Select the date and time for the reservation in I need this resource...
+area. Click the date field. A calendar widget will be displayed for you
+to choose a date. Click the time field to choose time from the dropdown
+list.
+
+screenshot of booking menu
+
+____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Tip*
+
+If incorrect date and time is selected, the date/time boxes will appear
+in red. For example, if the time for which the reservation is set has
+already passed, the boxes will appear in red. There must be at least 15
+minutes between the creation of the reservation and the start time of
+the reservation.
+____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+For non-catalogued resources, patrons may specify special feature(s), if
+any, of the resource. With these attributes: allows you to do so. For
+example, if a patron is booking a laptop he/she can choose between PC
+and Mac and even choose a specific operating system if they need to.
+Click the drop down arrow to select your option from the list.
+
+screenshot of booking menu
+
+Select the pickup location from the dropdown list.
+
+screenshot of booking menu
+
+If there are multiple copies of the resource and any item listed is
+acceptable, click Reserve Any. To choose a specific item, select it and
+then click Reserve Selected.
+
+screenshot of booking menu
+
+A message will confirm that the action succeeded. Click OK on the
+prompt.
+
+The screen will refresh and the reservation will appear below the
+patron’s name at the bottom of the screen.
+
+screenshot of booking menu
+
+You need to know the barcode of the patron when you create a reservation
+for him/her from a booking resource.
+
+From the Booking menu, select Create Reservations
+
+screenshot of reservation screen
+
+Choose a Bookable Resource Type and click Next or enter the barcode of a
+catalogued resource and click Next.
+
+screenshot of booking menu
+
+For non-catalogued resources, a screen showing the Bookable Resource
+Type and the items associated with the type will appear.
+
+For catalogued resources, the title and item will appear.
+
+screenshot of booking menu
+
+Enter the user’s barcode in the Reserve to patron barcode box. The
+user’s existing reservations, if any, will appear at the bottom of the
+screen.
+
+screenshot of reservation screen
+
+Select the date and time for the reservation in I need this resource...
+area. Click the date field. A calendar widget will be displayed for you
+to choose a date. Click the time field to choose time from the dropdown
+list.
+
+screenshot of booking menu
+
+_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Tip*
+
+If incorrect date and time is selected, the date/time boxes will appear
+in red. For example, if the time for which the reservation is set has
+already passed, the boxes will appear in red. The times must be set
+correctly for the reservation to be created. There must be at least 15
+minutes between the creation of the reservation and the start time of
+the reservation.
+_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+For non-catalogued resources, patrons may specify special feature(s), if
+any, of the resource. The With these attributes: allows you to do so.
+For example, if a patron is booking a laptop they can choose between PC
+and Mac and even choose a specific operating system if they need to.
+Click the dropdown arrow to select your option from the list.
+
+screenshot of booking menu
+
+Select the pickup location from the dropdown list.
+
+screenshot of booking menu
+
+If there are multiple copies of the resource and any item listed is
+acceptable, click Reserve Any. To choose a specific item, select it and
+then click Reserve Selected.
+
+screenshot of booking menu
+
+A message will confirm that the action succeeded. Click OK on the
+prompt.
+
+The screen will refresh and the reservation will appear below the
+patron’s name at the bottom of the screen.
+
+screenshot of booking menu
+
+[[booking-pull-list]]
+Reservation Pull List
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+Reservation pull list can be generated dynamically on the Staff Client.
+
+To create a pull list, select Booking > Pull List.
+
+screenshot of pull list
+
+You can decide how many days in advance you would like to pull reserved
+items. Enter the number of days in the box adjacent to Generate list for
+this many days hence. For example, if you would like to pull items that
+are needed today, you can enter `1` in the box, and you will retrieve
+items that need to be pulled today.
+
+Click Fetch to retrieve the pull list.
+
+screenshot of pull list
+
+The pull list will appear. Click Print to print the pull list.
+
+screenshot of pull list
+
+[[booking-capture]]
+Capturing Items for Reservations
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+Reservations must be captured before they are ready to be picked up by
+the patron.
+
+________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Caution*
+
+Always capture reservations in Booking Module. Check In function in
+Circulation does not function the same as Capture Resources.
+________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+In the staff client, select Booking > Capture Resources.
+
+screenshot of capturing reservations
+
+Scan the item barcode or type the barcode then click Capture.
+
+screenshot of capturing reservations
+
+The message Capture succeeded will appear to the right. Information
+about the item will appear below the message. Click Print button to
+print a slip for the reservation.
+
+screenshot of capturing reservations
+
+____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Caution*
+
+Sitka Team strongly recommends printing the receipt or copying the
+reservation information. It is not possible to re-print the slip on the
+current Evergreen design.
+____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+[[booking-pickup]]
+Picking Up Reservations
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Caution*
+
+Always use the dedicated Booking Module interfaces for tasks related to
+reservations. Items that have been captured for a reservation cannot be
+checked out using the Check Out interface, even if the patron is the
+reservation recipient.
+___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+Ready-for-pickup reservations can be listed from Other > Booking > Pick
+Up Reservations within a patron record or Booking > Pick Up
+Reservations.
+
+screenshot of picking up reservations
+
+screenshot of picking up reservations
+
+Scan the patron barcode if using Booking > Pick Up Reservations.
+
+The reservation(s) available for pickup will display. Select those you
+want to pick up and click Pick Up.
+
+screenshot of picking up reservations
+
+The screen will refresh to show that the patron has picked up the
+reservation(s).
+
+screenshot of picking up reservations
+
+[[booking-return]]
+Returning Reservations
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+__________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Caution*
+
+When a reserved item is brought back, staff must use the Booking Module
+to return the reservation.
+__________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+To return reservations, select Booking > Return Reservations
+
+screenshot of returning reservations
+
+You can return the item by patron or item barcode. Here we choose
+Resource to return by item barcode. Scan or enter the barcode, and click
+Go.
+
+screenshot of returning reservations
+
+A pop up box will tell you that the item was returned. Click OK on the
+prompt.
+
+If we select Patron on the above screen, after scanning the patron's
+barcode, reservations currently out to that patron are displayed.
+Highlight the reservations you want to return, and click Return.
+
+screenshot of returning reservations
+
+The screen will refresh to show any resources that remain out and the
+reservations that have been returned.
+
+screenshot of returning reservations
+
+__________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Tip*
+
+Reservations can be returned from within patron records by selecting
+Other > Booking > Return Reservations
+__________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+[[booking-cancel]]
+Cancelling a Reservation
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+A reservation can be cancelled in a patron’s record or reservation
+creation screen.
+
+Retrieve the patron's record.
+
+Select Other > Booking > Create or Cancel Reservations.
+
+screenshot of cancelling
+
+The existing reservations will appear at the bottom of the screen.
+
+screenshot of cancelling
+
+Highlight the reservation that you want to cancel. Click Cancel
+Selected.
+
+screenshot of cancelling
+
+________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Tip*
+
+Use Shift or Ctrl on keyboard and mouse click to select multiple
+reservations if needed.
+________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+A pop-up window will confirm the cancellation. Click OK on the prompt.
+
+The screen will refresh, and the cancelled reservation(s) will
+disappear.
+
+screenshot of cancelling
+
+Access the reservation creation screen by selecting Booking > Create
+Reservations.
+
+Select any Bookable Resource Type, then click Next.
+
+Scan or type in the patron barcode in Reserve to Patron box then hit
+Enter.
+
+Patron's existing reservations will display at the bottom of the screen.
+
+Select those that you want to cancel, then click Cancel Selected.
+
+[[admin-booking]]
+Booking Module Administration
+-----------------------------
+
+This chapter describes how to create, edit and delete bookable
+non-bibliographic resources.
+
+_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Tip*
+
+Sitka default permissions allow staff members with Circulation
+privileges to create reservations on all catalogued items or bookable
+non-bibliographic resources, and to create bookable non-bibliographic
+resources.
+_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+[[admin-booking-tutorial]]
+Local System Administrator Booking Tutorials
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+[[MakeNon-CataloguedItemBookable]]
+Creating Bookable Non-Bibliographic Resources
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+Staff with the required permissions (Circulator and above) can create
+bookable non-bibliographic resources such as laptops, projectors, and
+meeting rooms.
+
+The following pieces make up a non-bibliographic resource:
+
+* link:#resource-type[Resource Type]
+* link:#resource-attribute[Resource Attribute]
+* link:#resource-v[Resource Attribute Values]
+* link:#resource[Resource]
+* link:#resource-m[Resource Attribute Map]
+
+You need to create resource types and resource attributes (features of
+the resource types), and add booking items (resources) to individual
+resource type. Each resource attribute may have multiple values. You
+need to link the applicable features (resource attributes and values) to
+individual item (resource) through the Resource Attribute Map. Before
+you create resources (booking items) you need to have a resource type
+and associated resource attributes and values, if any, for them.
+
+Select Admin > Server Administration > Booking > Resource Types.
+
+screenshot of resource type
+
+A list of current resource types will appear. Use Back and Next buttons
+to browse the whole list.
+
+screenshot of resource type
+
+_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Tip*
+
+You may also see cataloged items in the list. Those items have been
+marked bookable or booked before.
+_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+To create a new resource type, click New Resource Type in the top right
+corner, .
+
+screenshot of resource type
+
+A box will appear in which you create your new type of resource.
+
+screenshot of resource type
+
+* Resource Type Name - Give your resource a name.
+* Fine Interval - How often will fines be charged? This period can be
+input in several ways:
++
+____________________________________________________________________
+*Tip*
+
+** second(s), minute(s), hour(s), day(s), week(s), month(s), year(s)
+** sec(s), min(s)
+** s, m, h
+** 00:00:30, 00:01:00, 01:00:00
+____________________________________________________________________
+* Fine Amount - The amount that will be charged at each Fine Interval.
+* Owning Library - The home library of the resource.
+* Catalog Item - (Function not currently available.)
+* Transferable - This allows the item to be transferred between
+libraries.
+* Inter-booking and Inter-circulation Interval - The amount of time
+required by your library between the return of a resource and a new
+reservation for the resource. This interval uses the same input
+conventions as the Fine Interval.
+* Max Fine Amount - The amount at which fines will stop generating.
+
+Click Save when you have entered the needed information.
+
+The new resource type will appear in the list.
+
+screenshot of resource type
+
+Select Server Administration > Booking > Resource Attributes.
+
+Click New Resource Attribute in the top right corner.
+
+A box will appear in which you can add the attributes of the resource.
+Attributes are categories of descriptive information that are provided
+to the staff member when the booking request is made. For example, an
+attribute of a projector may be the type of projector. Other attributes
+might be the number of seats available in a room, or the computing
+platform of a laptop.
+
+screenshot of resource attribute
+
+* Resource Attribute Name - Give your attribute a name.
+* Owning Library - The home library of the resource.
+* Resource Type - Type in the first letter to list then choose the
+Resource Type to which the Attribute is applicable.
+* Is Required - (Function not currently available.)
+
+Click Save when the necessary information has been entered.
+
+The added attribute will appear in the list.
+
+_______________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Tip*
+
+One resource type may have multiple attributes. You may repeat the above
+procedure to add more.
+_______________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+One resource attribute may have multiple values. To add new attribute
+value, select Server Administration > Booking > Resource Attribute
+Values.
+
+Click New Resource Attribute Value in the top right corner.
+
+A box will appear in which you assign a value to a particular attribute.
+Values can be numbers, words, or a combination of them, that describe
+the particular aspects of the resource that have been defined as
+Attributes. As all values appear on the same list for selection, values
+should be as unique as possible. For example, a laptop may have a
+computing platform that is either PC or Mac.
+
+screenshot of resource attribute value
+
+* Owning Library - The home library of the resource.
+* Resource Attribute - The attribute you wish to assign the value to.
+* Valid Value - Enter the value for your attribute.
+
+Click Save when the required information has been added.
+
+The attribute value will appear in the list. Each attribute should have
+at least two values attached to it; repeat this process for all
+applicable attribute values.
+
+Add items to a resource type. Click Admin > Server Administration >
+Booking > Resources.
+
+Click New Resource in the top right corner.
+
+A box will appear. Add information for the resource.
+
+screenshot of resource
+
+* Owning Library - The home library of the resource.
+* Resource Type - Type in the first letter of the resource type's name
+to list then select the resource type for your item.
+* Barcode - Barcode for the resource.
+* Overbook - This allows a single item to be reserved, picked up, and
+returned by multiple patrons during overlapping or identical time
+periods.
+* Is Deposit Required - (Function not currently available.)
+* Deposit Amount - (Function not currently available.)
+* User Fee - (Function not currently available.)
+
+Click Save when the required information has been added.
+
+The resource will appear in the list.
+
+_______________________________________________________
+*Tip*
+
+One resource type may have multiple resources attached.
+_______________________________________________________
+
+Use Resource Attribute Maps to bring together the resources and their
+attributes and values. Select Admin > Server Administration > Booking >
+Resource Attribute Maps.
+
+Click New Resource Attribute Map in the right top corner.
+
+A box will appear in which you will map your attributes and values to
+your resources.
+
+screenshot of resource attribute map
+
+* Resource - Enter the barcode of your resource.
+* Resource Attribute - Select an attribute that belongs to the Resource
+Type.
+* Attribute Value - Select a value that belongs to your chosen attribute
+and describes your resource. If your attribute and value do not belong
+together you will be unable to save.
+
+Click Save once you have entered the required information.
+
+______________________________________________________________________________________
+*Tip*
+
+A resource may have multiple attributes and values. Repeat the above
+steps to map all.
+______________________________________________________________________________________
+
+The resource attribute map will appear in the list.
+
+Once all attributes have been mapped your resource will be part of a
+hierarchy similar to the example below.
+
+screenshot of hierarchy
+
+[[booking-editing]]
+Editing Non-Bibliographic Resources
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+Staff with the required permissions can edit aspects of existing
+non-bibliographic resources. For example, resource type can be edited in
+the event that the fine amount for a laptop changes from $2.00 to $5.00.
+
+Bring up your list of resource types. Select Admin > Server
+Administration > Booking > Resource Types.
+
+A list of current resource types will appear.
+
+Double click anywhere on the line of the resource type you would like to
+edit.
+
+The resource type box will appear. Make your changes and click Save.
+
+Following the same procedure you may edit Resource Attributes,
+Attributes Values, Resources and Attribute Map by selecting them on
+Admin > Server Administration > Booking menu.
+
+[[booking-deleting]]
+Deleting Non-bibliographic Resources
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+To delete a booking resource, go to Admin > Server Administration >
+Booking > Resources.
+
+Select the checkbox in front the resource you want to delete. Click
+Delete Selected. The resource will disappear from the list.
+
+Following the same procedure you may delete Resource Attributes Maps.
+
+You may also delete Resource Attribute Values, Resource Attributes and
+Resource Types. But you have to delete them in the reverse order when
+you create them to make sure the entry is not in use when you try to
+delete it.
+
+This is the deletion order: Resource Attribute Map/Resources -> Resource
+Attribute Values -> Resource Attributes -> Resource Types.
+
+[[inventory-inventory]]
+Sitka's Inventory Procedure
+---------------------------
+
+An Inventory Module is part of Evergreen's long term development plan.
+At the moment there is no dedicated inventory function. The following
+procedure was developed by the Sitka Team based on the current available
+resources and the experience of inventory projects done by libraries in
+the Sitka and the Evergreen community.
+
+Inventory in Evergreen involves staff checking in all items in a
+specific area and then running a report to list all the items that were
+not scanned.
+
+When items are checked in/out or edited the date and time is recorded in
+the Last Edit Date field of the items record. This field is used in the
+inventory reports to determine which items have been inventoried and
+which have not.
+
+[[running-inventory]]
+Running Inventory
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+The first step to running inventory is to chose the section of your
+library you will inventory. We recommend that you inventory a shelving
+location or particular call number range. There are several report
+templates you can use to aid you in preparing for your inventory.
+
+* SITKA_templates -> Collection -> Copy and Title Count -> Title and
+Copy Count by Shelving Location and Circulation Modifier
+* SITKA_templates -> Collection -> Copy List by Item Attributes -> Call
+Number : Copies with Call Numbers within a Range
+* SITKA_templates -> Collection -> Copy List by Item Attributes ->
+Shelving Location : Copies with Selected Shelving Locations
+
+______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Caution*
+
+For accuracy we suggest staff do not edit items without the physical
+copy on hand during the inventory period as eding an item will update
+the Last Edited Date field.
+______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Tip*
+
+Once inventory starts, any item found in an incorrect location should be
+checked in before it is shelved in the correct location.
+_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+In Evergreen go to Circulation > Check In Items.
+
+Check the items in.
+
+_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Tip*
+
+Staff can check for cataloguing issues while checking in items for
+inventory. To do so set up your Check In interface with the following
+columns:
+
+* Title
+* Shelving Location
+* Circulation Modifier
+* Call Number
+
+Staff can fix items right away or put them aside to be dealt with later.
+_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+If you do not have wi-fi available you can use Evergreen's Offline
+module to check items in for inventory.
+
+Open the Offline Module.
+
+Check in the items in the area you are inventoring. See
+link:#offline-check-in[section_title].
+
+Connect the computer to the internet and open the Evergreen Staff
+Client.
+
+Upload your check ins. See
+link:#offline-upload-transactions[section_title].
+
+Make sure you follow up on any exceptions that appear when the
+transactions are uploaded. See
+link:#offline-exceptions[simplesect_title]. These items will need to be
+pulled from the shelf and checked in with on the live staff client to
+resolve the exceptions.
+
+Scan every item barcode on shelf in the chosen area.
+
+Export the barcodes to a text file (Sitka team recommends using
+Notepad.) to a computer with Evergreen installed. The barcodes should be
+in one single spaced single column without extra space anywhere.
+
+Use Cut and Paste functions to break the big list of barcodes into
+smaller lists and save each list as an individual text file (suggest
+each list contains about 50 barcodes). Name your files in sequence, e.g.
+inventory001, inventory002..., so that it will be easy to follow when
+you upload the files.
+
+On Item Status (F5) screen of Evergreen, click Upload From File.
+
+You are prompted to browse your local computer to find the barcode
+files. Navigate to and select your first file and click Open.
+
+Every item on the list is retrieved and displayed. It may take a while
+if the list is long. Select all items by using Shift key together with
+mouse. Click Actions for Selected Items > Check in Items.
+
+Repeat steps 4-6 to check in items in all files.
+
+_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Tip*
+
+You may see prompt popups for items with special status, such as lost,
+missing, checked out, in-transit or routing to the holds shelf. Once you
+confirm the prompt, the loading will continue. But you need to follow up
+with items going on hold shelf and in-transit.
+_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+[[inventory-reports-lists]]
+Reporting on Inventory
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+There are two report templates in the SITKA_templates -> Inventory
+folder on the Report Interface.
+
+*Inventory - scanned items by shelving location*
+
+This report counts the items that have been checked in/out or otherwise
+edited (including being checked out, marked missing or lost) during the
+inventory period. The date when you started taking inventory should be
+entered as the Last Edited Date when running the report. The numbers are
+broken down by shelving locations.
+
+*Inventory - un-scanned items*
+
+This report generates a list of items that should be on the shelf but
+were not checked in/out or otherwise edited during the inventory period.
+When running the report use the date when you started taking inventory
+for the Last Edited Date, the shelving location(s) in which you took
+inventory and the "on shelf" statuses ReshelvingandAvailable.
+
+You can use this report to search for the listed items. You can also
+upload this report into the Item Status interface and set the items to
+Missing.
+
+[[lsa]]
+Local Administration Menu
+-------------------------
+
+[[lsa-overview]]
+Overview
+~~~~~~~~
+
+Many Evergreen configuration options are available under the Admin >
+Local Administration rollover menu.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+Items on this menu are visible to anyone logged into the staff client
+but usually require special permissions to edit. The following table
+describes each of the menu options and their required permission levels.
+Contact the Sitka support team if you have questions about settings that
+cannot be edited with a Local System Administrator (LSA) account.
+
+[cols=",,",options="header",]
+|=======================================================================
+|Menu option |Description |Permissions
+|Age Overdue Circs to Lost |To create a queue of ALL overdue items by
+selected patron profiles at selected libraries to be marked lost. It
+does not support date parameter. This feature is mainly for school
+libraries' end of term process. To automatically mark items lost when
+they are overdue for x days contact Sitka support. |LSA
+
+|link:#lsa-cash-reports[Cash Reports] |View summary report of cash
+transactions for selected date range |All staff
+
+|Circulation Limit Set |View circulation limit on combination of circ
+modifier and patron profile |Viewable to LSA. Contact Sitka Support for
+editing
+
+|link:#lsa-circ-policies[Circulation Policies] |View circulation
+policies |Viewable to LSA. Contact Sitka Support for editing
+
+|link:#lsa-closed[Closed Dates Editor] |Set library closure dates
+(affects due dates and fines) |LSA
+
+|link:#lsa-copy-locations[Copy Locations Editor] |Create and edit copy
+locations, also known as shelving locations |LSA
+
+|Copy Location Groups |Allows one or more shelving locations to be
+grouped together as a search location. |Sitka Support
+
+|link:#lsa-copy-location-order[Copy Location Order] |Change display
+order of copy locations on Holds Pull list, also known as shelving
+locations |LSA
+
+|link:#lsa-copy-template-editor[Copy Template Editor] |Admin settings
+for Serials |LSA/Serials staff
+
+|link:#lsa-not-print-attempt['Do Not Attempt Auto-Print' Setting]
+|Override default settings to block automatic receipt printing in
+selected staff client transactions; not yet documented |LSA
+
+|Field Documentation |Create custom notes describing individual staff
+client fields to library staff; currently applies only to the patron
+registration fields |Sitka support
+
+|link:#lsa-group-penalty[Group Penalty Thresholds] |Set library-specific
+thresholds for maximum items out, maximum overdues, and maximum fines
+|LSA
+
+|link:#lsa-hold-policies[Hold Policies] |View Hold Policies |LSA
+
+|link:#lsa-item-attribute-editor[Item Attribute Editor] |Hide/unhide
+field(s) on Edit Item Attributes screen |LSA
+
+|link:#lsa-library-settings[Library Settings Editor] |Detailed library
+configuration settings |LSA/Sitka supprt
+
+|link:#lsa-noncat[Non-Catalogued Type Editor] |Create and edit optional
+non-catalogued item types |LSA
+
+|Notifications / Action Triggers |Admin settings |Sitka support
+
+|Patrons with Negative Balances |Display a list of patron accounts with
+negative bill balances, to whom the library may owe refunds |All staff
+
+|link:#report-introduction[Reports] |Generate reports on any field in
+the Evergreen database |Staff with reporter permission (report output
+optionally visible to all staff)
+
+|Search Filter Groups |Not in use |Sitka support
+
+|Standing Penalties |_Admin settings_ |Sitka support
+
+|link:#lsa-statcat[Statistical Categories Editor] |Create and manage
+optional categories for detailed patron/item information |LSA
+
+|link:#lsa-survey[Surveys] |Create patron surveys to be completed at
+patron registration |LSA
+
+|link:#circ-transit[Transit List] |View items in transit to or from your
+library during selected date range |All staff
+
+|link:#lsa-work-log[Work Log] |List the most recent transactions
+processed at the selected workstation |All staff
+|=======================================================================
+
+[[lsa-cash-reports]]
+Cash Reports
+~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+Select Admin > Local Administration > Cash Reports.
+
+Select the start date and the end date that you wish to run a cash
+report for. You can either enter the date in the YYYY-MM-DD format, or
+click on the calendar icon to use the calendar widget.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+Select your library from the drop down menu. Click Submit.
+
+The output will show cash, check, and credit card payments. It will
+also show amounts for credits, forgiven payments, work payments and
+goods payments (e.g. food for fines initiatives, replacement copy for
+lost item, etc.). The output will look something like this:
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Tip*
+
+By clicking on the hyperlinked column headers (i.e. workstation,
+cash_payment, check_payment, etc.) it is possible to sort the columns to
+order the payments from smallest to largest, or largest to smallest, or
+to group the workstation names.
+___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+Customized payment reports can be created from the reports interface.
+Several shared templates are available under SITKA_templates > Payments.
+For instructions on using shared templates see
+link:#shared-template[???]
+
+[[lsa-circ-policies]]
+Circulation Policies
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+A user with LSA privileges can view your library's circulation policies.
+Changes to circulation policies can be requested through the Sitka
+support team.
+
+Select Admin > Local Administration > Circulation Policies.
+
+By default, your library is selected in the box after Context Org Unit
+(i.e. Checkout Library). The initial display will show all circulation
+rules at your library and the federation level. You can filter the
+display to show rules applied to just your library's items.
+
+Click Filter under Context Org Unit.
+
+In the popped up window, select Copy Circ Lib from the first dropdown
+list; Is from the second list and your library the third.
+
+Click Apply to limit display to just your library. screenshot of staff
+client
+
+The resulting screen provides a summary view of each circulation rule
+for your library, and more detail can be seen by clicking on the
+individual entries. screenshot of staff client
+
+____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Tip*
+
+Circulation policies define the loan duration, renewals, recurring fine
+rate, maximum fine amount, grace period and maximum items out rules for
+different combinations of User Permission Groups and Home Library, and
+Circ Modifiers for items belonging to one library or library system.
+Other item attributes may be used for more specific rules. Please
+contact Sitka support.
+
+The current circulation polices allow items to be checked out and
+renewed at any library in your library federation.
+____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+Select the individual circulation policy for viewing by double-clicking
+on the desired row.
+
+The circulation rules are typically attached to the Org Unit (checkout
+library), User Permission Group, and Copy Circ Library and Circulation
+Modifier of the items being circulated. For example, the rule below is
+for items with circulating library of BPRDP and circulation modifier of
+'book' to be checked out to PL Extended Loans patrons at any library of
+IslandLink Library Federation .
+
+Each circulation rule defines the Loan Duration, Renewal, Recurring
+Fine, Maximum Fine, Grace Period and whether the item is allowed to
+circulate at all. For example, circulation items falling under the rule
+below would have a loan duration rule of '35_1', a recurring fine rule
+of 'twentyfivecents' per day and a maximum fine amount of 'fivedollar'.
+
+A rule is 'turned off', if the Active box is unchecked.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+[[lsa-closed]]
+Closed Dates Editor
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=TunYvpzN1Uw[*Closed Dates Editor -
+Pacific Time Zone (2:57)*]
+
+https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=TI6D0e_f6Dg[*Closed Dates Editor -
+Mountain and Central Time Zones (4:35)*]
+
+These dates are in addition to your regular weekly closed days (see
+link:#server-hours[section_title]). Both regular closed days and those
+entered in the Closed Dates Editor affect due dates, fines, and
+targeting for holds:
+
+* *Due dates.*
++
+Due dates that would fall on closed days are automatically pushed
+forward to the next open day. Likewise, if an item is checked out at
+8pm, for example, and would normally be due on a day when the library
+closes before 8pm, Evergreen pushes the due date forward to the next
+open day.
+* *Overdue fines.*
++
+Overdue fines are not charged on days when the library is closed, unless
+your library chooses to charge via Library Settings Editor: Charge fines
+on overdue circulations when closed.
+* *Hold Targeting.*
++
+By default items at a closed library are not targeted for holds. This
+means that available items that patrons have placed holds on will not
+appear on the Holds Pull List until the next open day. If you wish items
+to be targeted when the library is closed to the public, perhaps staff
+are still working and would like to pull items for holds, you can use
+the library settings Target copies for a hold even if copy's circ lib is
+closed and Target copies for a hold even if copy's circ lib is closed IF
+the circ lib is the hold's pickup lib to override the default behaviour.
+
+___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Caution*
+
+Sitka libraries not in the Pacific time zone must off-set their closed
+dates to ensure correct behaviour. See the
+link:#lsa-closed-nonpst[Non-Pacific Time Zone] section below for
+details.
+___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+Select Admin > Local Administration > Closed Dates Editor.
+
+Select Add Multi-Date Closing if your closed dates are entire business
+days.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+Enter applicable dates and a descriptive reason for the closing and
+click Save. Check the Apply to all of my libraries box if your library
+is a multi-branch system and the closing applies to all of your
+branches.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+_______________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Tip*
+
+You can type dates into fields using YYYY-MM-DD format or use calendar
+widgets to choose dates.
+_______________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+If your closed dates include a portion of a business day, select Add
+Detailed Closing at link:#lsa-multi-day-select[step_title], then enter
+detailed hours and dates and click Save. Time format must be HH:MM.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+Sitka's Evergreen server is in the Pacific time zone. To ensure correct
+closed date behaviour Sitka libraries not in the Pacific time zone must
+off-set their closed date entries by using Add Detailed Closing for all
+closures.
+
+Select Add Detailed Closing.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+Enter start date and select All Day under start time. To compensate for
+the time zone difference, the end date/time should be 1am for libaries
+in the Mountain Time Zone or 2am for libraries in the Central Time Zone
+the day *after* the closure. The example below is for a one day closure
+on September 6, 2010 for a library in the Mountain Time Zone. Click Save
+when finished.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+[[lsa-copy-locations]]
+Copy Locations Editor
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=pOnxqdPSEYI[*Sitka Snippet Video - Copy
+Locations Editor (3:25)*]
+
+Select Admin > Local Administration > Copy Locations Editor.
+
+You can create new copy locations (aka shelving location), or edit
+existing copy locations. To create a new shelving location, type in the
+name, and select Yes or No for the various attributes: OPAC Visible,
+Holdable, Circulate, Hold Verify and Checkin Alert. Click Create a new
+copy location.
+
+Holdable means a patron is able to place a hold on an item in this
+location.
+
+Hold Verify, if set up, will generate a prompt when an item is captured
+for a hold.
+
+Checkin Alert will prompt staff to route the item to the location when
+checking in items with this location.
+
+Label Prefix and Label Suffix, if set up, will be automatically included
+when printing spine labels
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+In the bottom part of the Copy Locations Editor you can edit or delete
+existing copy locations. You cannot delete a location that contains
+items. In this example the copy location Adult Videos is being edited.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+image:../media/1.png[image] Click Translate to enter optional
+translations of copy location titles for OPAC display when patrons
+select other languages.
+
+image:../media/2.png[image] Text in the Label prefix and Label suffix
+fields will automatically be added to spine labels printed for items in
+the selected copy location. It does not affect OPAC or staff client
+display.
+
+___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Tip*
+
+Whether an item can be circulated, holdable or visible on OPAC is
+controlled by three factors: item status, shelving location and item
+attributes (the options in the Copy Editor). Evergreen follows the
+aforementioned sequence to check the value of each factor until it
+encounters a NO. An item can be circulated, holdable or visible on OPAC
+when all three factors are set to YES.
+___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Caution*
+
+After creating or deleting a copy location, log out of the staff client
+and clear the cache to ensure changes are reflected in the copy editor.
+This is not required for edits to existing copy locations.
+__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+This is where you see the shelving locations in the Copy Editor:
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Tip*
+
+The order of the shelving location name and library code can be reversed
+by setting up Admin > Workstation Adminstration > Copy Editor: Copy
+Location Name First
+________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+This is where the shelving location appears in the OPAC.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+[[lsa-copy-location-order]]
+Copy Location Order
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+This is the place where you specifiy the copy location order on Pull
+List of Hold Requests. Items are grouped together by Copy Location first
+on the list to ease the process of tracing items on shelves. You may
+adjust the order according to the layout of your library's shelves.
+
+Drag a Copy Location on the list to the proper position, then click
+Apply Changes.
+
+[[lsa-copy-template-editor]]
+Copy Template Editor
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+See link:#serials-create-copy-template[section_title] in Serials
+Adminsitration section.
+
+[[lsa-not-print-attempt]]
+'Do Not Attempt-Auto-Print' Setting
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+This is the place where you select receipt/slip type(s) to disable
+auto-print attempt for it. No printing will be attempted if the
+receipt/slip type is selected. Auto-print button on individual function
+screen is automatically disabled for the selected receipts/slips. The
+optional receipts/slips are: Checkout, Bill Pay, Transit Slip, Hold Slip
+and Hold/Transit Slip.
+
+Select/deselect one or more, then click Update Setting
+
+For multi-branch libraries, you may use the dropdown list of libraries
+to make your selection effective to the selected branch or your whole
+library system.
+
+___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Note*
+
+You may also remove receipt/slip type(s) from Library Settings Editor >
+Program: Disable Automatic Print Attempt Type List.
+___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+[[lsa-group-penalty]]
+Group Penalty Thresholds
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+Group Penalty Thresholds block circulation transactions for users who
+exceed maximum check out limits, number of overdue items, or fines.
+Settings for your library are visible under Admin > Local Administration
+> Group Penalty Thresholds. There are four penalties in use now.
+
+[cols=",",options="header",]
+|=======================================================================
+|Penalty |Effect
+|PATRON_EXCEEDS_FINES |Blocks new circulations and renewals if patron
+exceeds X in fines
+
+|PATRON_EXCEEDS_OVERDUE_COUNT |Blocks new circulations if patron exceeds
+X overdue items
+
+|PATRON_EXCEEDS_CHECKOUT_COUNT |Blocks new circulations if patron
+exceeds X items out
+
+|PATRON_EXCEEDS_LOST_COUNT |Blocks new circulations if patron exceeds X
+lost items
+|=======================================================================
+
+Accounts that meet or exceed penalty thresholds display an alert message
+when opened and require staff overrides for blocked transactions.
+
+patron account with circulation blocks
+
+[[lsa-group-inheritance]]
+Penalty threshold inheritance rules
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
+
+Local penalty thresholds are identified by Org Unit and appear in the
+same table as the Sitka defaults.
+
+group penalty threshold table
+
+Where there is more than one threshold for the same penalty Evergreen
+gives precedence to local settings. In this example BSQ patrons are
+blocked when owing $5.00 in fines (image:../media/2.png[image]) instead
+of the Sitka default of $9999.00 (image:../media/1.png[image]).
+
+Thresholds image:../media/3.png[image] and image:../media/4.png[image]
+are both for BSQ but apply to different user profile groups. Threshold
+image:../media/3.png[image] limits all patrons to a maximum of 9999
+items out, but image:../media/4.png[image] provides an exception for the
+PL BC OneCard profile.
+
+_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Tip*
+
+Multi-branch libraries may create rules for the entire library system or
+for individual branches. Evergreen will use the most specific applicable
+rule.
+_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+[[lsa-group-create]]
+Creating local penalty thresholds
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
+
+Local System Administrators can override the Sitka defaults by creating
+local penalty thresholds for selected patron groups.
+
+Select Admin > Local Administration > Group Penalty Thresholds.
+
+Click New Penalty Threshold.
+
+group penalty threshold interface
+
+The new penalty pop-up appears. Complete all fields and click Save.
+
+new penalty threshold form
+
+image:../media/1.png[image] Group - the profile group to which the rule
+applies. Selecting Public Library Patrons includes all profiles below it
+in the user hierarchy (PL BC OneCard, PL ILL, etc).
+
+image:../media/2.png[image] Org Unit - multi-branch libraries may create
+rules for individual branches or the entire library system.
+
+image:../media/3.png[image] Penalty - select
+PATRON_EXCEEDS_CHECKOUT_COUNT, PATRON_EXCEEDS_LOST_COUNT,
+PATRON_EXCEEDS_OVERDUE_COUNT, or PATRON_EXCEEDS_FINES ; other options
+are not used by Sitka.
+
+After clicking Save the new threshold appears with the Sitka defaults.
+Evergreen always gives precedence to local settings (in this example,
+BSP).
+
+group penalty threshold interface
+
+________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Tip*
+
+For user groups that have no limits Sitka Support recommends setting
+thresholds to 9999.
+________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+[[lsa-edit-penalty]]
+Deleting or editing local penalty thresholds
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
+
+To delete a local threshold select the row to remove and click Delete
+Selected. The threshold is removed immediately without further
+confirmation.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+To edit a local threshold, double-click the desired row to open the
+pop-up form. Edit the form and click Save. New settings take effect
+immediately.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+[[lsa-hold-driven-recall]]
+Hold-driven Recall
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+Academic libraries usually allow extended loan periods to some patron
+types on some materials. They will recall these items when other patrons
+request them. Hold-driven Recall automates this process.
+
+When libraries recall an item they ususally shorten the loan period and
+block renewal. They may also change the fine rate and maximum fine
+amount. A notice (via email) is sent to the current borrower to inform
+him/her of the change.
+
+Evergreen uses three library setting entries to trigger hold-driven
+recall and define change parameters. When a hold is placed and there is
+no availabe copy, Evergeen will check whether the Recall settings are
+set up for the library. If settings are on and recall condition is met,
+a recall will be triggered.
+
+Go to Admin > Local Administration > Library Settings Editor to set them
+up.
+
+1. Recalls: Circulation duration that triggers a recall
++
+This is the threshold that decides whether a recall is triggered.
+Recalls are triggered only when items are checked out with a loan period
+longer than the one specified in this entry. For example, in a library
+the longest general loan period is 35 days. Extended loan to faculty is
+92 days. You may specify, e.g. 36 days or 90 days in this entry to
+trigger recalls on items checked out to faculty with extended loan
+period. But you need to consider the next entry to make your decision.
++
+___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Tip*
+
+Evergreen uses the loan duration rule in circulation records as the loan
+period of a circulation. It does not calculate the loan period from the
+checkout and due dates. If you set specific due date on checkout, the
+actual loan period and the loan duration rule may not match.
+___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+2. Recalls: Truncated loan period
++
+When a recall is triggered, Evergreen will reset the due date in the
+current circulation record. The new due date is calculated based on the
+value entered in this entry and the above. The later date generated by
+these two entries will be the new due date. For example, the truncated
+loan period is 7 days and the threshold in the above entry is 36 days.
+On 2013-07-01 a recall is triggered on an item checked out on
+2013-06-09, and the new due date based on truncated loan period will be
+2013-07-08 (2013-07-01 + 7 days), while 2013-07-15 is based on the
+recall threshold (2013-06-09 + 36 days). Evergreen will set the new due
+date to 2013-07-15. If the above item is recalled on 2013-07-10, the due
+date from the truncated loan period will be 2013-07-17. This will be the
+new due date. In other words, the recall threshold is the minimum loan
+period an extended loan can be shortened to, and patrons with extended
+loan items will have at least the truncated loan period when they
+receive the recall notice.
++
+_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Caution*
+
+Under extreme circumstance, overdue items' loan periods may be extended,
+e.g. an extended loan checked out in last term is recalled in this term.
+_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+3. Recalls: An array of fine amount, fine interval, and maximum fine.
++
+This is optional. If you wish to set up new fine rules on recalled
+items, follow the example quoted in the Library Settings Editor. Make
+sure the brackets and double quotation around the fine interval are
+included.
+
+[[lsa-hold-policies]]
+Hold Policies
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+A user with LSA privileges can view your library's hold policies.
+Changes to hold policies can be requested through the Sitka support
+team.
+
+Select Admin > Local Administration > Hold Policies.
+
+Select your library from the drop down list after Context Org Unit.
+
+The first screen provides a summary view of each hold rule for your
+library, and more detail can be seen by clicking on the individual
+entries. screenshot of staff client
+
+______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Tip*
+
+The Hold Policy for each library or library system defines who can place
+how many holds on what types of materials. It also defines whether the
+library's materials can be used to fill holds picked up at other
+libraries. Hold policies are usually defined by a combination of the
+Requestor Permission Group (eg. Public Library Users, Public Library
+Staff etc.), item attributes like circulation modifier (eg. books,
+juvenile-collection etc.), and library (user home, items' owning and
+circulating library) with additional parameters of maximum holds and
+whether a hold can be placed at all. Transit Range defines where the
+library's materials can go to fill holds.
+______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+Select the individual hold policy for viewing by double-clicking on the
+desired row.
+
+In the below example, Public Library Users are able to place holds on
+BELK library’s items of any circulation modifier and pick up these items
+at BELK library. They can have up to a maximum of 20 holds.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+[[lsa-item-attribute-editor]]
+Item Attribute Editor
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+This is where you can choose to hide some unused fields on Edit Item
+Attibute, (aka Copy Editor) screen, such as Deposit Amount.
+
+Select Admin > Local Administration > Edit Item Attribute The Copy
+Editor opens.
+
+Click Hide Fields button at the left bottom corner.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+By default your library is displayed on top of the list. If you wish to
+hide fields for all branches of your library system, change it to your
+library system.
+
+Check the field(s) that you want to hide and click OK button. Those
+selected fields will disappear from the Copy Editor. Close the tab.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+If you wish to unhide a field, repeat the above step 1 and 2. Deselect
+the field and click OK.
+
+[[lsa-library-settings]]
+Library Settings Editor
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+With the Library Settings Editor local system administrators (LSA) can
+optionally customize Evergreen's behaviour for a particular library or
+library system. For descriptions of available settings see the Settings
+Overview table below. Most settings can be changed in the staff client
+but some Sitka-wide defaults are maintained by the support team. All
+staff accounts can view library settings but an LSA login is required to
+make changes.
+
+New Sitka libraries should set up local settings as soon as possible
+after migration.
+
+To open the Library Settings Editor select Admin > Local Administration
+> Library Settings Editor.
+
+Settings having effects on the same function or module are grouped
+together. You may browse the list or search for the entry you want to
+edit. Type in your search term in the filter box. You may clear or
+re-apply the filter by clicking Clear Filter or Filter.
+
+image:media/lse-1.png[library setting editor]
+
+To edit an entry click Edit in the line.
+
+Read the instruction in the pop-up window. Make the change. Click Update
+Setting to save the change. Click Delete Setting if you wish to delete
+it.
+
+image:media/lse-2.png[image]
+
+Click History to view the previous values, if any, of a setting. You can
+revert back to an old value by clicking revert.
+
+image:media/lse-3.png[image]
+
+_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Caution*
+
+Please note that different settings may require different data format,
+which is listed in the Settings Overview table. Refer to the Data Type
+table at the bottom of this page to find the data format used for each
+data type.
+_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+To export library settings, click Export button on the above Library
+Setting Editor screen. Click Copy in the pop-up window. Those settings
+displayed on the screen are copied to clipboard. Paste the content to a
+text editor, such as Notepad. Save the file on your computer.
+
+To import library settings, click Import button on Library Settings
+Editor screen.
+
+Open your previously saved file and copy the content. Click Paste in the
+pop-up window. Click Submit.
+
+image:media/lse-5.png[image]
+
+______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Note*
+
+The exported settings may include entries with context of Sitka. When
+importing settings with such entries you may see errors of permission
+denied. This is considered normal as LSA can not and should not edit
+entries in the Sitka context.
+______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+The settings are grouped together in separate tables based on functions
+and modules, which are affected by the setting. They are in the same
+sequence as you see in the staff client. Each table describes the
+available settings in the group and shows which can be changed on a
+per-library basis. At bottom is the table with a list of
+link:#lsa-library-settings-data[data types] with details about
+acceptable settings values.
+
+_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Note*
+
+For settings used by Acquisitions Module, please refer to Acquisition
+User Manual.
+
+Long Overdue item status is not in use in Sitka, thus none of the long
+overdue related entries are included in the table below.
+_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+.Booking and Cataloguing
+[width="100%",cols="23%,33%,11%,11%,22%",options="header",]
+|=======================================================================
+|Setting |Description |Data type |Edited by |Notes
+|Booking Allow email notify |Permit email notification when a
+reservation is ready for pickup. |link:#lsa-data-types[True/false] |LSA
+|
+
+|Default Classification Scheme |Defines the default classification
+scheme for new call numbers: 1 = Generic; 2 = Dewey; 3 = LC
+|link:#lsa-data-types[Number] |Sitka |Affects call number sorting
+
+|Default copy status (fast add) |Default status when a copy is created
+using the "Fast Item Add" interface. |link:#lsa-data-types[Selection
+list] |LSA |Default: In process
+
+|Default copy status (normal) |Default status when a copy is created
+using the normal volume/copy creator interface.
+|link:#lsa-data-types[Selection list] |LSA |Default: In Process
+
+|Defines the control number identifier used in 003 and 035 fields |Admin
+setting | |Sitka |
+
+|Delete bib if all copies are deleted via Acquisitions lineitem
+cancellation. | |link:#lsa-data-types[True/False] |Sitka |
+
+|Delete volume with last copy |Automatically delete a volume when the
+last linked copy is deleted. |link:#lsa-data-types[True/False] |Sitka
+|Default TRUE.
+
+|Maximum Parallel Z39.50 Batch Searches |The maximum number of Z39.50
+searches that can be in-flight at any given time when performing batch
+Z39.50 searches. |link:#lsa-data-types[Number] |Sitka |
+
+|Maximum Z39.50 Batch Search Results |The maximum number of search
+results to retrieve and queue for each record + Z39 source during batch
+Z39.50 searches |link:#lsa-data-types[Number] |Sitka |
+
+|Spine and pocket label font family |Set the preferred font family for
+spine and pocket labels. You can specify a list of fonts, separated by
+commas, in order of preference; the system will use the first font it
+finds with a matching name. For example, "Arial, Helvetica, serif".
+|link:#lsa-data-types[Text] |LSA |
+
+|Spine and pocket label font size |Set the default font size for spine
+and pocket labels |link:#lsa-data-types[Number] |LSA |
+
+|Spine and pocket label font weight |Set the preferred font weight for
+spine and pocket labels. You can specify "normal", "bold", "bolder", or
+"lighter". |link:#lsa-data-types[Text] |LSA |
+
+|Spine label left margin |Set the left margin for spine labels in number
+of characters. |link:#lsa-data-types[Number] |LSA |
+
+|Spine label line width |Set the default line width for spine labels in
+number of characters. This specifies the boundary at which lines must be
+wrapped. |link:#lsa-data-types[Number] |LSA |
+
+|Spine label maximum lines |Set the default maximum number of lines for
+spine labels. |link:#lsa-data-types[Number] |LSA |
+|=======================================================================
+
+.Circulation
+[width="100%",cols="23%,33%,11%,11%,22%",options="header",]
+|=======================================================================
+|Setting |Description |Data type |Edited by |Notes
+|Auto-extend grace periods |When enabled grace periods will auto-extend.
+By default this will be only when they are a full day or more and end on
+a closed date, though other options can alter this.
+|link:#lsa-data-types[True/False] |LSA |
+
+|Auto-extending grace periods extend for all closed dates |It works when
+the above setting "Auto-Extend Grace Periods" is set to TRUE. If
+enabled, when the grace period falls on a closed date(s), it will be
+extended past all closed dates that intersect, but within the hard-coded
+limits (your library's grace period). |link:#lsa-data-types[True/False]
+|LSA |
+
+|Auto-extending grace periods include trailing closed dates |It works
+when the above setting "Auto-Extend Grace Periods" is set to TRUE. If
+enabled, grace periods will include closed dates that directly follow
+the last day of the grace period. A backdated checkin with effective
+date on the closed dates will assume the item is returned after hours on
+the last day of the grace period. |link:#lsa-data-types[True/False] |LSA
+|Useful when libraries' bookdrop equipped with AMH.
+
+|Block hold request if hold recipient privileges have expired |
+|link:#lsa-data-types[True/False] |LSA |
+
+|Cap max fine at item price |This prevents the system from charging more
+than the item price in overdue fines |link:#lsa-data-types[True/False]
+|LSA |
+
+|Charge fines on overdue circulations when closed |When set to True,
+fines will be charged during scheduled closings and normal weekly closed
+days. |link:#lsa-data-types[True/False] |LSA |
+
+|Checkout fills related hold |When a patron checks out an item and they
+have no holds that directly target the item, the system will attempt to
+find a hold for the patron that could be fulfilled by the checked out
+item and fulfills it. On the Staff Client you may notice that when a
+patron checks out an item under a title on which he/she has a hold, the
+hold will be treated as filled though the item has not been assigned to
+the patron's hold. |link:#lsa-data-types[True/false] |LSA |
+
+|Checkout fills related hold on valid copy only |When filling related
+holds on checkout only match on items that are valid for opportunistic
+capture for the hold. Without this set a Title or Volume hold could
+match when the item is not holdable. With this set only holdable items
+will match. |link:#lsa-data-types[True/False] |LSA |
+
+|Checkout auto renew age |When an item has been checked out for at least
+this amount of time, an attempt to check out the item to the patron that
+it is already checked out to will simply renew the circulation. If the
+checkout attempt is done within this time frame, Evergreen will prompt
+for choosing Renewing or Checkin then Checkout the item.
+|link:#lsa-data-types[Duration] |LSA |
+
+|Do not change fines/fees on zero-balance LOST transaction |When an item
+has been marked lost and all fines/fees have been completely paid on the
+transaction, do not void or reinstate any fines/fees EVEN IF Void Lost
+Item Billing When Returned, and/or Void Processing Fee on Lost Item
+Return, and/or Restore Overdues on Lost Item Return are enabled. This
+setting has no effect on partially resolved bills.
+|link:#lsa-data-types[True/False] |Sitka |Not in use
+
+|Do not include outstanding Claims Returned circulations in lump sum
+tallies in Patron Display. |In the Patron Display interface, the number
+of total active circulations for a given patron is presented in the
+Summary sidebar and underneath the Items Out navigation button. This
+setting will prevent Claims Returned circulations from counting toward
+these tallies. |link:#lsa-data-types[True/False] |LSA |
+
+|Hold shelf status delay |The purpose is to provide an interval of time
+after an item goes into the on-holds-shelf status before it appears to
+patrons that it is actually on the holds shelf. This gives staff time to
+process the item before it shows as ready-for-pickup.
+|link:#lsa-data-types[Duration] |LSA |
+
+|Include Lost circulations in lump sum tallies in Patron Display. |In
+the Patron Display interface, the number of total active circulations
+for a given patron is presented in the Summary sidebar and underneath
+the Items Out navigation button. This setting will include Lost
+circulations as counting toward these tallies.
+|link:#lsa-data-types[True/False] |LSA |
+
+|Invalid patron address penalty |When set, if a patron address is set to
+invalid, a penalty is applied. |link:#lsa-data-types[True/False] |LSA |
+
+|Item status for missing pieces |This is the Item Status to use for
+items that have been marked or scanned as having Missing Pieces. In the
+absence of this setting, the Damaged status is used.
+|link:#lsa-data-types[Selection list] |LSA |
+
+|Load patron from Checkout |When scanning barcodes into Checkout
+auto-detect if a new patron barcode is scanned and auto-load the new
+patron. |link:#lsa-data-types[True/False] |LSA |Not in use
+
+|Lost checkin generates new overdues |Enabling this setting causes
+retroactive creation of not-yet-existing overdue fines on lost item
+checkin, up to the point of checkin time (or max fines is reached). This
+is different than "restore overdue on lost", because it only creates new
+overdue fines. Use both settings together to get the full complement of
+overdue fines for a lost item |link:#lsa-data-types[True/False] |LSA |
+
+|Lost items usable on checkin |Lost items are usable on checkin instead
+of going 'home' first |link:#lsa-data-types[True/false] |LSA |
+
+|Max patron claims returned count |When this count is exceeded, a staff
+override is required to mark the item as claims returned.
+|link:#lsa-data-types[Number] |LSA |
+
+|Maximum visible age of User Trigger Events in Staff Interfaces |If this
+is unset, staff can view User Trigger Events regardless of age. When
+this is set to an interval, it represents the age of the oldest possible
+User Trigger Event that can be viewed. |link:#lsa-data-types[Duration]
+|LSA |Not working
+
+|Minimum transit checkin interval |In-Transit items checked in this
+close to the transit start time will be prevented from checking in
+|link:#lsa-data-types[Duration] |LSA |
+
+|Patron merge address delete |Delete address(es) of subordinate user(s)
+in a patron merge. |link:#lsa-data-types[True/False] |LSA |
+
+|Patron merge barcode delete |Delete barcode(s) of subordinate user(s)
+in a patron merge |link:#lsa-data-types[True/False] |LSA |
+
+|Patron merge deactivate card |Mark barcode(s) of subordinate user(s) in
+a patron merge as inactive. |link:#lsa-data-types[True/False] |LSA |
+
+|Patron Registration: Cloned patrons get address copy |If True, in the
+Patron editor, addresses are copied from the cloned user. If False,
+addresses are linked from the cloned user which can only be edited from
+the cloned user record. |link:#lsa-data-types[True/False] |LSA |
+
+|Printing: custom Javascript file |Full URL path to a Javascript File to
+be loaded when printing. Should implement a print_custom function for
+DOM manipulation. Can change the value of the do_print variable to false
+to cancel printing. |link:#lsa-data-types[Text] | |
+
+|Require matching email address for password reset requests |
+|link:#lsa-data-types[True/False] |LSA |
+
+|Restore overdues on lost item return |If true when a lost item is
+checked in overdue fines are charged (up to the maximum fines amount)
+|link:#lsa-data-types[True/False] |LSA |
+
+|Specify search depth for the duplicate patron check in the patron
+editor |When using the patron registration page, the duplicate patron
+check will use the configured depth to scope the search for duplicate
+patrons. |link:#lsa-data-types[Number] |Sitka |
+
+|Suppress hold transits group |To create a group of libraris to supress
+Hold Transits among them. All libraries in the group should use the same
+unique vaule. Leave it empty if transits should not be suppressed.
+|link:#lsa-data-types[Text] |Sitka |Not in use
+
+|Suppress non-hold transits group |To create a group of libraris to
+supress Non-Hold Transits among them. All libraries in the group should
+use the same unique vaule. Leave it empty if Non-Hold Transits should
+not be suppressed. |link:#lsa-data-types[Text] |Sitka |
+
+|Suppress popup-dialogs during check-in. |When set to True, no pop-up
+window for exceptions on check-in. But the accompanying sound will be
+played. |link:#lsa-data-types[True/False] |LSA |
+
+|Target copies for a hold even if copy's circ lib is closed |If this
+setting is true at a given org unit or one of its ancestors, the hold
+targeter will target copies from this org unit even if the org unit is
+closed (according to the actor.org_unit.closed_date table).
+|link:#lsa-data-types[True/False] |LSA |
+
+|Target copies for a hold even if copy's circ lib is closed IF the circ
+lib is the hold's pickup lib |If this setting is true at a given org
+unit or one of its ancestors, the hold targeter will target copies from
+this org unit even if the org unit is closed (according to the
+actor.org_unit.closed_date table) IF AND ONLY IF the copy's circ lib is
+the same as the hold's pickup lib. |link:#lsa-data-types[True/False]
+|LSA |
+
+|Truncate fines to max fine amount | |link:#lsa-data-types[True/False]
+|LSA |Sitka default TRUE
+
+|Use Lost and Paid copy status | |link:#lsa-data-types[True/False]
+|Sitka |Sitka default TRUE
+
+|Warn when patron account is about to expire |If set, the staff client
+displays a warning this number of days before the expiry of a patron
+account. Value is in number of days. |link:#lsa-data-types[Duration]
+|LSA |
+
+|Void lost item billing when claims returned |If True, when a lost item
+is claimed returned, the item replacement bill (item price) is voided.
+|link:#lsa-data-types[True/False] |LSA |
+
+|Void processing fee on lost item claims returned |If True, the
+processing fee is voided when a lost item is claimed returned.
+|link:#lsa-data-types[True/false] |LSA |
+
+|Void lost item billing when returned |If True,when a lost item is
+checked in the item replacement bill (item price) is voided. If the
+patron has already paid the bill a credit is applied. But libraries may
+choose not to adjust bills if already resolved by: Do not change
+fines/fees on zero-balance LOST transaction.
+|link:#lsa-data-types[True/false] |LSA |
+
+|Void lost max interval |Items that have been overdue this long will not
+result in lost charges being voided when returned, and the overdue fines
+will not be restored, either. Only applies if Circ: Void lost item
+billing or Circ: Void processing fee on lost item are true.
+|link:#lsa-data-types[Duration] |LSA |
+
+|Void processing fee on lost item return |If True, the processing fee is
+voided when a lost item is returned |link:#lsa-data-types[True/false]
+|LSA |
+|=======================================================================
+
+__________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Note*
+
+Long Overdue status is not in use on Sitka Evergreen. All settings
+related to Long Overdue may be ignored.
+__________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+.Credit Card Processing
+[cols="",options="header",]
+|===============================================
+|Credit card payment is not currently supported.
+|All settings can be ignored.
+|===============================================
+
+.Finances
+[width="100%",cols="23%,33%,11%,11%,22%",options="header",]
+|=======================================================================
+|Setting |Description |Data type |Edited by |Notes
+|Allow credit card payments |If enabled, patrons will be able to pay
+fines accrued at this location via credit card.
+|link:#lsa-data-types[True/False] |Sitka |Not in use
+
+|Charge item price when marked damaged |If true Evergreen bills item
+price to the last patron who checked out the damaged item. Staff receive
+an alert with patron information and must confirm the billing.
+|link:#lsa-data-types[True/false] |LSA |
+
+|Charge lost on zero |If set to True, default item price will be charged
+when an item is marked lost even though the price in item record is 0.00
+(same as no price). If False, only processing fee, if used, will be
+charged. |link:#lsa-data-types[True/false] |LSA |
+
+|Charge processing fee for damaged items |Optional processing fee billed
+to last patron who checked out the damaged item. Staff receive an alert
+with patron information and must confirm the billing.
+|link:#lsa-data-types[Number(dollar)] |LSA |Disabled when set to 0
+
+|Default item price |Replacement charge for lost items if price is unset
+in the Copy Editor.. Does not apply if item price is set to $0
+|link:#lsa-data-types[Number(dollar)] |LSA |
+
+|Disable Patron Credit |Do not allow patrons to accrue credit or pay
+fines/fees with accrued credit. |link:#lsa-data-types[True/Fasle] |LSA
+|If set to TRUE, Patron Credit will not be displayed on Bills screen.
+
+|Leave transaction open when lost balance equals zero |If True, it
+leaves the lost copy on the patron record when it is paid.
+|link:#lsa-data-types[True/False] |Sitka |Sitka default False
+
+|Lost materials processing fee |The amount charged in addition to item
+price when an item is marked lost. |link:#lsa-data-types[Number]
+(dollar) |LSA |
+
+|Maximum Item Price |When charging for lost items, limit the charge to
+this as a maximum. |link:#lsa-data-types[Number(dollar)] |LSA |
+
+|Minimum Item Price |When charging for lost items, charge this amount as
+a minimum. |link:#lsa-data-types[Number(dollar)] |LSA |
+
+|Negative Balance Interval (DEFAULT) |Amount of time since the payment
+date, after which no negative balances (refunds) are allowed on
+circulation bills. This setting works only when the "Prohibit negative
+balance on bills" setting is set to "TRUE".
+|link:#lsa-data-types[Duration] |LSA |2.10. If the settings for Lost and
+Overdues are the same, you may use this setting and the "Prohibit
+Negative Balance on Bills (DEFAULT)" setting, and igore the separate
+settings for Lost and Overdues.
+
+|Negative Balance Interval for Lost |Amount of time since the payment
+date, after which no negative balances (refunds) are allowed on bills
+for lost materials. The "Prohibit negative balance on bills for lost
+materials" setting must also be set to "TRUE".
+|link:#lsa-data-types[Duration] |LSA |2.10
+
+|Negative Balance Interval for Overdues |Amount of time since payment
+date, after which no negative balances (refunds) are allowed on bills
+for overdue materials. The "Prohibit negative balance on bills for
+overdue materials" setting must also be set to "TRUE".
+|link:#lsa-data-types[Duration] |LSA |2.10
+
+|Prohibit Negative Balance on Bills (DEFAULT) |Default setting to
+prevent negative balances (refunds) on circulation related bills. Set to
+"TRUE" to prohibit negative balances at all times, or use in conjunction
+with an interval setting to prohibit negative balances after a period of
+time since the payment was made. |link:#lsa-data-types[True/False] |LSA
+|2.10
+
+|Prohibit Negative Balance on Bills for Lost Materials |Prohibit
+negative balance on bills for lost materials. Set to "TRUE" to prohibit
+negative balances at all times, or use in conjunction with an interval
+setting to prohibit negative balances after a period of time since the
+payment was made. |link:#lsa-data-types[True/False] |LSA |2.10
+
+|Prohibit Negative Balance on Bills for Overdue Materials |Prohibit
+negative balance on bills for overdue materials. Set to "TRUE" to
+prohibit negative balances at all times, or use in conjunction with an
+interval setting to prohibit negative balances after a period of time
+since the payment was made. |link:#lsa-data-types[True/False] |LSA |2.10
+
+|Void overdue fines when items are marked lost |If true overdue fines
+are voided when an item is marked lost |link:#lsa-data-types[True/false]
+|LSA |
+|=======================================================================
+
+.GUI: Graphic User Interface
+[width="100%",cols="23%,33%,11%,11%,22%",options="header",]
+|=======================================================================
+|Setting |Description |Data type |Edited by |Notes
+|Alert on empty bib records |Alert staff when the last copy for a record
+is being deleted. |link:#lsa-data-types[True/False] |LSA |
+
+|Button bar |If TRUE, the staff client button bar appears by default on
+all workstations registered to your library; staff can override this
+setting at each login. |link:#lsa-data-types[True/False] |LSA |
+
+|Cap results in Patron Search at this number. |The maximum number of
+resutls returned per search. If 100 is set up here, any search will
+return 100 records at most. |link:#lsa-data-types[Number] |LSA |
+
+|Default Country for New Addresses in Patron Editor |This is the default
+Country for new addresses in the patron editor.
+|link:#lsa-data-types[Text] |LSA |
+
+|Default hotkeyset |Default Hotkeyset for clients (filename without the
+.keyset). Examples: Default, Minimal, and None
+|link:#lsa-data-types[Text] |LSA |Individual workstations' default
+overrides this setting.
+
+|Default ident type for patron registration |This is the default Ident
+Type for new users in the patron editor. |link:#lsa-data-types[Selection
+list] |LSA |
+
+|Default showing suggested patron registration fields |Instead of All
+fields, show just suggested fields in patron registration by default.
+|link:#lsa-data-types[True/False] |LSA |
+
+|Disable the ability to save list column configurations locally. |GUI:
+Disable the ability to save list column configurations locally. If set,
+columns may still be manipulated, however, the changes do not persist.
+Also, existing local configurations are ignored if this setting is true.
+|link:#lsa-data-types[True/False] |LSA |
+
+|Example for Day_phone field on patron registration |The example on
+validation on the Day_phone field in patron registration.
+|link:#lsa-data-types[Text] |LSA |
+
+|Example for Email field on patron registration |The example on
+validation on the Email field in patron registration.
+|link:#lsa-data-types[Text] |LSA |
+
+|Example for Evening-phone on patron registration |The example on
+validation on the Evening-phone field in patron registration.
+|link:#lsa-data-types[Text] |LSA |
+
+|Example for Other-phone on patron registration |The example on
+validation on the Other-phone field in patron registration.
+|link:#lsa-data-types[Text] |LSA |
+
+|Example for phone fields on patron registration |The example on
+validation on phone fields in patron registration. Applies to all phone
+fields without their own setting. |link:#lsa-data-types[Text] |LSA |
+
+|Example for Postal Code field on patron registration |The example on
+validation on the Postal Code field in patron registration.
+|link:#lsa-data-types[Text] |LSA |
+
+|Format Dates with this pattern. |Format Dates with this pattern
+(examples: "yyyy-MM-dd" for "2010-04-26", "MMM d, yyyy" for "Apr 26,
+2010"). Formats are effective in display (not editing) area.
+|link:#lsa-data-types[Text] |LSA |
+
+|Format Times with this pattern. |Format Times with this pattern
+(examples: "h:m:s.SSS a z" for "2:07:20.666 PM Eastern Daylight Time",
+"HH:mm" for "14:07"). Formats are effective in display (not editing)
+area. |link:#lsa-data-types[Text] |LSA |
+
+|GUI: Hide these fields within the Item Attribute Editor. |
+|link:#lsa-data-types[Text] |LSA |
+
+|Horizontal layout for Volume/Copy Creator/Editor. |The main entry point
+for this interface is in Holdings Maintenance, Actions for Selected
+Rows, Edit Item Attributes / Call Numbers / Replace Barcodes. This
+setting changes the top and bottom panes (if FALSE) for that interface
+into left and right panes (if TRUE). |link:#lsa-data-types[True/False]
+|LSA |
+
+|Idle timeout |If you want staff client windows to be minimized after a
+certain amount of system idle time, set this to the number of seconds of
+idle time that you want to allow before minimizing (requires staff
+client restart). |link:#lsa-data-types[Number] |LSA |
+
+|Items Out Claims Returned display setting |Value is a numeric code,
+describing which list the circulation should appear while checked out
+and whether the circulation should continue to appear in the bottom
+list, when checked in with oustanding fines. 1 = top list, bottom list.
+2 = bottom list, bottom list. 5 = top list, do not display. 6 = bottom
+list, do not display. |link:#lsa-data-types[Number] |LSA |default=2
+
+|Items Out Lost display setting |Value is a numeric code, describing
+which list the circulation should appear while checked out and whether
+the circulation should continue to appear in the bottom list, when
+checked in with oustanding fines. 1 = top list, bottom list. 2 = bottom
+list, bottom list. 5 = top list, do not display. 6 = bottom list, do not
+display. |link:#lsa-data-types[Number] |LSA |default=2
+
+|Max user activity entries to retrieve (staff client) |Sets the maxinum
+number of recent user activity entries to retrieve for display in the
+staff client. |link:#lsa-data-types[Number] |LSA |
+
+|Maximum previous checkouts displayed |The maximum number of previous
+circulations the staff client will display when investigating item
+details |link:#lsa-data-types[Number] |LSA |
+
+|Patron circulation summary is horizontal |
+|link:#lsa-data-types[True/False] |LSA |
+
+|Record in-house use: # of uses threshold for Are You Sure? dialog. |In
+the Record In-House Use interface, a submission attempt will warn if the
+# of uses field exceeds the value of this setting.
+|link:#lsa-data-types[Number] |LSA |
+
+|Record In-House Use: Maximum # of uses allowed per entry. |The # of
+uses entry in the Record In-House Use interface may not exceed the value
+of this setting. |link:#lsa-data-types[Number] |LSA |
+
+|Regex for Day_phone field on patron registration |The Regular
+Expression for validation on the Day_phone field in patron registration.
+Note: The first capture group will be used for the "last 4 digits of
+phone number" as patron password feature, if enabled. Ex:
+"[2-9]\d\{2}-\d\{3}-(\d\{4})( x\d+)?" will ignore the extension on a
+NANP number. |link:#lsa-data-types[Regular expression] |LSA |
+
+|Regex for Email field on patron registration |The Regular Expression on
+validation on the Email field in patron registration.
+|link:#lsa-data-types[Regular expression] |LSA |
+
+|Regex for Evening-phone on patron registration |The Regular Expression
+on validation on the Evening-phone field in patron registration.
+|link:#lsa-data-types[Regular expression] |LSA |
+
+|Regex for Other-phone on patron registration |The Regular Expression on
+validation on the Other-phone field in patron registration.
+|link:#lsa-data-types[Regular expression] |LSA |
+
+|Regex for phone fields on patron registration |The Regular Expression
+on validation on phone fields in patron registration. Applies to all
+phone fields without their own setting. |link:#lsa-data-types[Regular
+expression] |LSA |
+
+|Regext for Postal Code field on patron registration |The Regular
+Expression on validation on the Postal Code field in patron
+registration. |link:#lsa-data-types[Regular expression] |LSA |
+
+|Require at least one address for Patron Registration |Enforces a
+requirement for having at least one address for a patron during
+registration. If set to False, you need to delete the empty address
+before saving the record. If set to True, deletion is not allowed.
+|link:#lsa-data-types[True/False] |LSA |
+
+|Require XXXXX field on patron registration |The XXXXX field will be
+required on the patron registration screen.
+|link:#lsa-data-types[True/False] |LSA |XXXXX can be Country, Day-phone,
+Evening-phone, Other-phone, DOB, Email, or Prefix.
+
+|Require staff initials for entry/edit of copy notes |Appends staff
+initials and edit date into note content.
+|link:#lsa-data-types[True/False] |LSA |
+
+|Require staff initials for entry/edit of patron notes. |Appends staff
+initials and edit date into note content.
+|link:#lsa-data-types[True/False] |LSA |
+
+|Require staff initials for entry/edit of patron standing penalties and
+messages |Appends staff initials and edit date into patron standing
+penalties and messages. |link:#lsa-data-types[True/False] |LSA |
+
+|Show billing tab first when bills are present |If true accounts for
+patrons with bills will open to the billing tab instead of check out
+|link:#lsa-data-types[True/false] |LSA |
+
+|Show XXXXX field on patron registration |The XXXXX field will be shown
+on the patron registration screen. Showing a field makes it appear with
+required fields even when not required. If the field is required this
+setting is ignored. |link:#lsa-data-types[True/False] |LSA |
+
+|Suggest XXXXX field on patron registration |The XXXXX field will be
+suggested on the patron registration screen. Suggesting a field makes it
+appear when suggested fields are shown. If the field is shown or
+required this setting is ignored. |link:#lsa-data-types[True/False] |LSA
+|
+
+|Toggle off the patron summary sidebar after first view. |When true, the
+patron summary sidebar will collapse after a new patron sub-interface is
+selected. |link:#lsa-data-types[True/False] |LSA |
+
+|URL for remote directory containing list column settings. |The format
+and naming convention for the files found in this directory match those
+in the local settings directory for a given workstation. An
+administrator could create the desired settings locally and then copy
+all the tree_columns_for_* files to the remote directory.
+|link:#lsa-data-types[Text] | |Not in use
+
+|Uncheck bills by default in the patron billing interface |Uncheck bills
+by default in the patron billing interface, and focus on the Uncheck All
+button instead of the Payment Received field.
+|link:#lsa-data-types[True/False] |LSA |
+
+|Unified Volume/Item Creator/Editor |If True, combines the Volume/Copy
+Creator and Item Attribute Editor in some instances.
+|link:#lsa-data-types[True/False] |LSA |
+
+|Work Log: maximum actions logged |Maximum entries for "Most Recent
+Staff Actions" section of the Work Log interface.
+|link:#lsa-data-types[Number] |LSA |
+
+|Work Log: maximum patrons logged |Maximum entries for "Most Recently
+Affected Patrons..." section of the Work Log interface.
+|link:#lsa-data-types[Number] |LSA |
+|=======================================================================
+
+.Global
+[width="100%",cols="23%,33%,11%,11%,22%",options="header",]
+|=======================================================================
+|Setting |Description |Data type |Edited by |Notes
+|Allow multiple username changes |If enabled (and Lock Usernames is not
+set) patrons will be allowed to change their username when it does not
+look like a barcode. Otherwise username changing in the OPAC will only
+be allowed when the patron's username looks like a barcode.
+|link:#lsa-data-types[True/False] |Sitka |Default TRUE.
+
+|Global default locale | |link:#lsa-data-types[Text] |Sitka |Default:
+Canada
+
+|Lock Usernames |If enabled username changing via the OPAC will be
+disabled. |link:#lsa-data-types[True/False] |Sitka |Default FALSE
+
+|Password format |Defines acceptable format for OPAC account passwords
+|Regular expression |Sitka |Default requires that passwords "be at least
+7 characters in length, contain at least one letter (a-z/A-Z), and
+contain at least one number.
+
+|Patron barcode format |Defines acceptable format for patron barcodes
+|Regular expression |Sitka |
+
+|Patron username format |Regular expression defining the patron username
+format, used for patron registration and self-service username changing
+only |link:#lsa-data-types[Regular expression] |Sitka |
+|=======================================================================
+
+.Holds
+[width="100%",cols="23%,33%,11%,11%,22%",options="header",]
+|=======================================================================
+|Setting |Description |Data type |Edited by |Notes
+|Behind desk pickup supported |If a branch supports both a public holds
+shelf and behind-the-desk pickups, set this value to true. This gives
+the patron the option to enable behind-the-desk pickups for their holds
+by selecting Hold is behind Circ Desk flag in patron record.
+|link:#lsa-data-types[True/False] |LSA |
+
+|Best-hold selection sort order |Defines the sort order of holds when
+selecting a hold to fill using a given copy at capture time
+|link:#lsa-data-types[Selection list] |Sitka |
+
+|Block renewal of items needed for holds |When an item could fulfill a
+hold, do not allow the current patron to renew
+|link:#lsa-data-types[True/False] |Sitka |
+
+|Cancelled holds display age |Show all cancelled holds that were
+cancelled within this amount of time |link:#lsa-data-types[Duration]
+|LSA |
+
+|Cancelled holds display count |How many cancelled holds to show in
+patron holds interfaces |link:#lsa-data-types[Number] |LSA |
+
+|Clear shelf copy status |Any copies that have not been put into
+reshelving, in-transit, or on-holds-shelf (for a new hold) during the
+clear shelf process will be put into this status. This is basically a
+purgatory status for copies waiting to be pulled from the shelf and
+processed by hand |link:#lsa-data-types[Selection list] |Sitka |
+
+|Default estimated wait |When predicting the amount of time a patron
+will be waiting for a hold to be fulfilled, this is the default
+estimated length of time to assume an item will be checked out.
+|link:#lsa-data-types[Duration] |Sitka |Not applicable in Sitka OPAC
+
+|Default hold shelf expire interval |Hold Shelf Expiry Time is
+calculated and inserted into hold record based on this interval when
+capturing a hold. |link:#lsa-data-types[Duration] |LSA |
+
+|Expire alert interval |Time before a hold expires at which to send an
+email notifying the patron |link:#lsa-data-types[Duration] |Sitka |Not
+in use
+
+|Expire interval |Amount of time until an unfulfilled hold expires
+|link:#lsa-data-types[Duration] |LSA |
+
+|Hard boundary |Administrative setting for Sitka use only
+|link:#lsa-data-types[Number] |Sitka |
+
+|Hard stalling interval | |link:#lsa-data-types[Duration] |Sitka |
+
+|Has local copy alert |If there is an available copy at the requesting
+library that could fulfill a hold during hold placement time, alert the
+patron. |link:#lsa-data-types[True/False] |LSA |
+
+|Has local copy block |If there is an available copy at the requesting
+library that could fulfill a hold during hold placement time, do not
+allow the hold to be placed. |link:#lsa-data-types[True/False] |LSA |
+
+|Max foreign-circulation time |Time a copy can spend circulating away
+from its circ lib before returning there to fill a hold
+|link:#lsa-data-types[Duration] |Sitka |
+
+|Maximum library target attempts |When this value is set and greater
+than 0, the system will only attempt to find a copy at each possible
+branch the configured number of times |link:#lsa-data-types[Number]
+|Sitka |
+
+|Minimum estimated wait |When predicting the amount of time a patron
+will be waiting for a hold to be fulfilled, this is the minimum
+estimated length of time to assume an item will be checked out.
+|link:#lsa-data-types[Duration] |Sitka |Not applicable in Sitka OPAC
+
+|Org unit target weight |Org Units can be organized into hold target
+groups based on a weight. Potential copies from org units with the same
+weight are chosen at random. |link:#lsa-data-types[Number] |Sitka |
+
+|Reset request time on un-cancel |When a hold is uncancelled, reset the
+request time to push it to the end of the queue
+|link:#lsa-data-types[True/False] |LSA |
+
+|Skip for hold targeting |When true, don't target any copies at this org
+unit for holds |link:#lsa-data-types[True/False] |Sitka |
+
+|Soft boundary |Holds will not be filled by copies outside this boundary
+if there are holdable copies within it. |link:#lsa-data-types[Number]
+|Sitka |
+
+|Soft stalling interval |For this amount of time, holds will not be
+opportunistically captured at non-pickup branches.
+|link:#lsa-data-types[Duration] |Sitka |
+
+|Use Active Date for age protection |When calculating age protection
+rules use the Active date instead of the Creation Date.
+|link:#lsa-data-types[True/False] |LSA |Default TRUE
+
+|Use weight-based hold targeting |Use library weight based hold
+targeting |link:#lsa-data-types[True/False] |Sitka |
+|=======================================================================
+
+.Library
+[width="100%",cols="23%,33%,11%,11%,22%",options="header",]
+|=======================================================================
+|Setting |Description |Data type |Edited by |Notes
+|Change reshelving status interval |Amount of time to wait before
+changing an item from “Reshelving” status to “available”
+|link:#lsa-data-types[Duration] |LSA |The default is at midnight each
+night for items with "Reshelving" status for over 24 hours.
+
+|Claim never checked out: mark copy as missing |When a circ is marked as
+claims-never-checked-out, mark the copy as missing
+|link:#lsa-data-types[True/False] |LSA |
+
+|Claim return copy status |Claims returned copies are put into Sitka
+wide default status of Claimed Returned. This is not configurable at
+library. |link:#lsa-data-types[Selection list] |Sitka |
+
+|Courier code |Courier Code for the library. Available in transit slip
+templates as the %courier_code% macro. |link:#lsa-data-types[Text] |LSA
+|Not in use
+
+|Juvenile age threshold |Upper cut-off age for patrons to be considered
+juvenile, calculated from date of birth in patron accounts
+|link:#lsa-data-types[Duration] (years) |LSA |
+
+|Library information URL |URL for information on this library, such as
+contact information, hours of operation, and directions. Use a complete
+URL, such as "http://example.com/hours.html".
+|link:#lsa-data-types[Text] |LSA |
+
+|Mark item damaged voids overdues |When an item is marked damaged,
+overdue fines on the most recent circulation are voided.
+|link:#lsa-data-types[True/False] |LSA |
+
+|Pre-cat item circ lib |Override the default circ lib of "here" with a
+pre-configured circ lib for pre-cat items. The value should be the
+"shortname" (aka policy name) of the org unit
+|link:#lsa-data-types[Text] |Sitka |
+
+|Telephony: Arbitrary line(s) to include in each notice callfile |This
+overrides lines from opensrf.xml. Line(s) must be valid for your target
+server and platform (e.g. Asterisk 1.4). |link:#lsa-data-types[Text]
+|Sitka |Not in use.
+
+|Use external "library information URL" in copy table, if available |If
+set to true, the library name in the copy details section will link to
+the URL associated with the "Library information URL" library setting
+rather than the library information page generated by Evergreen.
+|link:#lsa-data-types[True/False] |LSA |
+|=======================================================================
+
+.OPAC
+[width="100%",cols="23%,33%,11%,11%,22%",options="header",]
+|=======================================================================
+|Setting |Description |Data type |Edited by |Notes
+|Allow Patron Self-Registration |Allow patrons to self-register,
+creating pending user accounts |link:#lsa-data-types[True/False] |Sitka
+|
+
+|Allow pending addresses |If true patrons can edit their addresses in
+the OPAC. Changes must be approved by staff
+|link:#lsa-data-types[True/false] |LSA |
+
+|Auto-Override Permitted Hold Blocks (Patrons) |
+|link:#lsa-data-types[True/false] |Sitka |Defalt FALSE
+
+|Ignore the Global luri_as_copy flag for this OU |Admin setting on
+e-records scoping |link:#lsa-data-types[True/False] |Sitka |
+
+|Jump to details on 1 hit (OPAC) |When a search yields only 1 result,
+jump directly to the record details page. This setting only affects the
+public OPAC |link:#lsa-data-types[True/False] |LSA |
+
+|Jump to details on 1 hit (staff client) |When a search yields only 1
+result, jump directly to the record details page. This setting only
+affects the PAC within the staff client
+|link:#lsa-data-types[True/False] |LSA |
+
+|Limit the depth of xxxxxx |Admin setting on e-record link display
+|link:#lsa-data-types[Number] |Sitka |
+
+|Limit the number of URIs on the results page |Admin setting on e-record
+link display |link:#lsa-data-types[Number] |Sitka |
+
+|OPAC login message |HTML blob to be rendered in an interstitial page
+upon OPAC login |link:#lsa-data-types[Text] |Sitka |
+
+|Number of staff client saved searches to display on left side of
+results and record details pages |If unset, the default is 10.
+|link:#lsa-data-types[Number] |LSA |
+
+|Open Reviews & More in a new tab |If set to TRUE, Reviews & More links
+in the search results to be opened in a new tab.
+|link:#lsa-data-types[True/False] |LSA |
+
+|Org unit hiding depth |Admin setting controlled by Sitka
+|link:#lsa-data-types[Number] |Sitka |
+
+|Org Unit is not a hold pickup library |If set, this org unit will not
+be offered to the patron as an option for a hold pickup location. This
+setting has no affect on searching or hold targeting.
+|link:#lsa-data-types[True/False] |Sitka |
+
+|Paging shortcut links for OPAC Browse |The characters in this string,
+in order, will be used as shortcut links for quick paging in the OPAC
+browse interface. Any sequence surrounded by asterisks will be taken as
+a whole label, not split into individual labels at the character level,
+but only the first character will serve as the basis of the search.
+|link:#lsa-data-types[Regular expression] |Sitka |
+
+|Patron self-reg. display timeout |Number of seconds to wait before
+reloading the patron self-registration interface to clear sensitive
+data. |link:#lsa-data-types[Duration] |Sitka |
+
+|Patron self-reg. expire interval |If set, this is the amount of time a
+pending user account will be allowed to sit in the database. After this
+time, the pending user information will be purged.
+|link:#lsa-data-types[Duration] |Sitka |
+
+|Payment history age limit |The OPAC should not display payments by
+patrons that are older than any interval defined here.
+|link:#lsa-data-types[Duration] |LSA |Not in use
+
+|Specify how items are ordered |This value specifies how items are
+ordered in search results and record views within the org unit. To sort
+from newest to oldest by active date use 'desc'. To sort from oldest to
+newest by active date use 'asc'. To sort by call number use 'call'.
+|link:#lsa-data-types[Text] |LSA |Default is 'call'.
+
+|Tag Circulated Items in Results |When a user is both logged in and has
+opted in to circulation history tracking, turning on this setting will
+cause previous (or currently) circulated items to be highlighted in
+search results. |link:#lsa-data-types[True/False] |LSA |Default TRUE
+
+|Use fully compressed serial holdings |Show fully compressed serial
+holdings for all libraries at and below the current context unit
+|link:#lsa-data-types[True/False] |Sitka |
+
+|Warn patrons when adding to a temporary book list |Present a warning
+dialog when a patron adds a book to the temporary book list.
+|link:#lsa-data-types[True/False] |Sitka |
+|=======================================================================
+
+.Offline and Program
+[width="100%",cols="23%,33%,11%,11%,22%",options="header",]
+|=======================================================================
+|Setting |Description |Data type |Edited by |Notes
+|Skip offline checkin if newer item Status Changed Time. |Skip offline
+checkin transaction (raise exception when processing) if item Status
+Changed Time is newer than the recorded transaction time. WARNING: The
+Reshelving to Available status rollover will trigger this.
+|link:#lsa-data-types[True/False] |LSA |
+
+|Skip offline checkout if newer item Status Changed Time. |Skip offline
+checkout transaction (raise exception when processing) if item Status
+Changed Time is newer than the recorded transaction time. WARNING: The
+Reshelving to Available status rollover will trigger this.
+|link:#lsa-data-types[True/False] |LSA |
+
+|Skip offline renewal if newer item Status Changed Time. |Skip offline
+renewal transaction (raise exception when processing) if item Status
+Changed Time is newer than the recorded transaction time. WARNING: The
+Reshelving to Available status rollover will trigger this.
+|link:#lsa-data-types[True/False] |LSA |
+
+|Disable automatic print attempt type list |Disable automatic print
+attempts from staff client interfaces for the receipt types in this
+list. Possible values: "Checkout", "Bill Pay", "Hold Slip", "Transit
+Slip", and "Hold/Transit Slip". This is different from the Auto-Print
+checkbox in the pertinent interfaces in that it disables automatic print
+attempts altogether, rather than encouraging silent printing by
+suppressing the print dialog. The Auto-Print checkbox in these
+interfaces have no effect on the behavior for this setting. In the case
+of the Hold, Transit, and Hold/Transit slips, this also suppresses the
+alert dialogs that precede the print dialog (the ones that offer Print
+and Do Not Print as options). |link:#lsa-data-types[Text] |LSA |
+
+|Retain empty bib records |Retain a bib record even when all attached
+copies are deleted |link:#lsa-data-types[True/False] |Sitka |Default
+FALSE based on Sitka cataloguing policy.
+
+|Sending email address for patron notices |This email address is for
+automatically generated patron notices (e.g. email overdues, email holds
+notification). It is good practice to set up a generic account, like
+info@nameofyourlibrary.ca, so that one person’s individual email inbox
+doesn’t get cluttered with emails that were not delivered.
+|link:#lsa-data-types[Text] |LSA |
+|=======================================================================
+
+.Receipt Templates and SMS Text Message
+[width="100%",cols="23%,33%,11%,11%,22%",options="header",]
+|=======================================================================
+|Setting |Description |Data type |Edited by |Notes
+|Content of alert_text include |Text/HTML/Macros to be inserted into
+receipt templates in place of %INCLUDE(alert_text)% |Text |LSA |
+
+|Content of event_text include |Text/HTML/Macros to be inserted into
+receipt templates in place of %INCLUDE(event_text)% |Text |LSA |
+
+|Content of footer_text include |Text/HTML/Macros to be inserted into
+receipt templates in place of %INCLUDE(footer_text)% |Text |LSA |
+
+|Content of header_text include |Text/HTML/Macros to be inserted into
+receipt templates in place of %INCLUDE(header_text)% |Text |LSA |
+
+|Content of notice_text include |Text/HTML/Macros to be inserted into
+receipt templates in place of %INCLUDE(notice_text)% |Text |LSA |
+
+|Disable auth requirement for texting call numbers. |Disable
+authentication requirement for sending call number information via SMS
+from the OPAC. |True/False |LSA |
+
+|Enable features that send SMS text messages. |Current features that use
+SMS include hold-ready-for-pickup notifications and a "Send Text" action
+for call numbers in the OPAC. If this setting is not enabled, the SMS
+options will not be offered to the user. Unless you are carefully
+silo-ing patrons and their use of the OPAC, the context org for this
+setting should be the top org in the org hierarchy, otherwise patrons
+can trample their user settings when jumping between orgs. |True/False
+|LSA |
+|=======================================================================
+
+.Security
+[width="100%",cols="23%,33%,11%,11%,22%",options="header",]
+|=======================================================================
+|Setting |Description |Data type |Edited by |Notes
+|Default level of patrons' internet access |Enter numbers 1 (Filtered),
+2 (Unfiltered), or 3 (No Acess) |link:#lsa-data-types[Number] |LSA |
+
+|Maximum concurrently active self-serve password reset requests |Prevent
+the creation of new self-serve password reset requests until the number
+of active requests drops back below this number.
+|link:#lsa-data-types[Number] |Sitka |Not in use
+
+|Maximum concurrently active self-serve password reset requests per user
+|When a user has more than this number of concurrently active self-serve
+password reset requests for their account, prevent the user from
+creating any new self-serve password reset requests until the number of
+active requests for the user drops back below this number.
+|link:#lsa-data-types[Number] |Sitka |Not in use
+
+|OPAC inactivity timeout (in seconds) |Number of seconds of inactivity
+before OPAC accounts are automatically logged out. Sitka default is 420
+seconds (7 minutes) |link:#lsa-data-types[Number] |LSA |
+
+|Obscure the Date of Birth field |When true, the Date of Birth column in
+patron lists will default to Not Visible, and in the Patron Summary
+sidebar the value will display as unless the field label is clicked.
+|link:#lsa-data-types[True/False] |LSA |
+
+|Offline: Patron usernames allowed |During offline circulations, allow
+patrons to identify themselves with usernames in addition to barcode.
+For this setting to work, a barcode format must also be defined
+|link:#lsa-data-types[True/False] | |
+
+|Patron opt-in boundary |Admin setting | |Sitka |
+
+|Patron opt-in default |Admin setting | |Sitka |
+
+|Patron: password from phone # |If true the last 4 digits of the
+patron's phone number is the password for new accounts (password must
+still be changed at first OPAC login) |link:#lsa-data-types[True/false]
+|LSA |
+
+|Persistent login duration |How long a persistent login lasts, e.g. '2
+weeks' |link:#lsa-data-types[Duration] |Sitka |
+
+|Restrict patron opt-in to home library and related orgs at specified
+depth |Admin setting | |Sitka |
+
+|Self-serve password reset request time-to-live |Length of time (in
+seconds) a self-serve password reset request should remain active.
+|link:#lsa-data-types[Duration] |Sitka |
+
+|Staff login inactivity timeout (in seconds) |Number of seconds of
+inactivity before staff client prompts for login and password. Sitka
+default is 6000 seconds (2 hours) |link:#lsa-data-types[Number] |LSA |
+|=======================================================================
+
+.Self Check
+[width="100%",cols="23%,33%,11%,11%,22%",options="header",]
+|=======================================================================
+|Setting |Description |Data type |Edited by |Notes
+|Allow Fine printing |If true, there will be a print option on the fine
+list screen. |link:#lsa-data-types[True/false] |LSA |
+
+|Allow Hold printing |If true, there will be a print option on the hold
+list screen. |link:#lsa-data-types[True/false] |LSA |
+
+|Allow Items out printing |If true, there will be a print option on the
+items out list screen. |link:#lsa-data-types[True/false] |LSA |
+
+|Audio Alerts |Use audio alerts for selfcheck events.
+|link:#lsa-data-types[True/false] |LSA |
+
+|Block copy checkout status |List of copy status IDs that will block
+checkout even if the generic COPY_NOT_AVAILABLE event is overridden.
+|link:#lsa-data-types[Number] |LSA |Look up copy status ID from Server
+Admin.
+
+|Patron login timeout (in seconds) |Number of seconds of inactivity
+before the patron is logged out of the selfcheck interface.
+|link:#lsa-data-types[Duration] |LSA |
+
+|Pop-up alert for errors |If true, checkout/renewal errors will cause a
+pop-up window in addition to the on-screen message.
+|link:#lsa-data-types[True/False] |LSA |
+
+|Require patron password |If true, patrons will be required to enter
+their password in addition to their username/barcode to log into the
+selfcheck interface. |link:#lsa-data-types[True/False] |LSA |
+
+|Selfcheck override events list |List of checkout/renewal events that
+the selfcheck interface should automatically override instead instead of
+alerting and stopping the transaction. |link:#lsa-data-types[Text] |LSA
+|
+
+|Workstation Required |All selfcheck stations must use a workstation.
+|link:#lsa-data-types[True/False] |LSA |
+|=======================================================================
+
+.Other
+[width="100%",cols="23%,33%,11%,11%,22%",options="header",]
+|=======================================================================
+|Setting |Description |Data type |Edited by |Notes
+|Default display grouping for serials distributions presented in the
+OPAC. |Default display grouping for serials distributions presented in
+the OPAC. This can be "enum" or "chron". |link:#lsa-data-types[Text]
+|Sitka |
+
+|Previous issuance copy location |When a serial issuance is received,
+copies (units) of the previous issuance will be automatically moved into
+the configured shelving location. | | |
+
+|Maximum redirect lookups |Admin setting. |link:#lsa-data-types[Number]
+|Sitka |
+
+|Maximum wait time (in seconds) for a URL to lookup |Admin setting
+|link:#lsa-data-types[Duration] |Sitka |
+
+|Number of URLs to test in parallel |Admin setting
+|link:#lsa-data-types[Number] |Sitka |
+
+|Number of seconds to wait between URL test attempts |Admin setting
+|link:#lsa-data-types[Duration] |Sitka |
+
+|Vandelay default barcode prefix |Apply this prefix to any
+auto-generated item barcodes |link:#lsa-data-types[Text] |LSA |
+
+|Vandelay generate default barcodes |Auto-generate deault item barcodes
+when no item barcode is present. |link:#lsa-data-types[True/False] |LSA
+|
+
+|Vandelay default call number prefix |Apply this prefix to any
+auto-generated item call numbers. |link:#lsa-data-types[Text] |LSA |
+
+|Vandelay generate default call numbers |Auto-generate default item call
+numbers when no item call number is present.
+|link:#lsa-data-types[True/False] |LSA |
+
+|Vandelay default circulation modifier |Default circulation modifier
+value for imported items. |link:#lsa-data-types[Selection list] |LSA |
+
+|Vandelay default copy location |Default copy location value for
+imported items. |link:#lsa-data-types[Selection list] |LSA |
+
+|Vandelay default record match set |Admin setting
+|link:#lsa-data-types[Selection list] |Sitka |
+
+|Circ: default precat circ modifier | |link:#lsa-data-types[Selection
+List] |LSA |
+
+|Claim Return: Mark copy as missing | |link:#lsa-data-types[True/False]
+|Sitka |Default FALSE
+
+|Disallow circulation of items when they are on booking reserve and that
+reserve overlaps with the checkout period |When true, items on booking
+reserve during the proposed checkout period will not be allowed to
+circulate unless overridden with the COPY_RESERVED.override permission.
+|link:#lsa-data-types[True/False] |LSA |
+
+|Limit Due Date by Patron Expiry |If True automatically adjusts item due
+date to match patron card expiry date if expiry date sooner than due
+date. If False item due date applied. |link:#lsa-data-types[True/False]
+|LSA |
+
+|Recalls: An array of fine amount, fine interval, and maximum fine. |An
+array of fine amount, fine interval, and maximum fine. For example, to
+specify a new fine rule of $5.00 per day, with a maximum fine of $50.00,
+use: [5.00,"1 day",50.00] |link:#lsa-data-types[Text] |LSA |Brackets are
+required in the text.
+
+|Recalls: Circulation duration that triggers a recall. |A hold placed on
+an item with a circulation duration longer than this will trigger a
+recall. For example, "14 days" or "3 weeks".
+|link:#lsa-data-types[Duration] |LSA |
+
+|Recalls: Truncated loan period. |When a recall is triggered, this
+defines the adjusted loan period for the item. For example, "4 days" or
+"1 week". |link:#lsa-data-types[Duration] |LSA |
+
+|Use in-database circ policy |Admin setting
+|link:#lsa-data-types[True/False] |Sitka |
+
+|Use in-database holds policy |Admin setting
+|link:#lsa-data-types[True/False] |Sitka |
+
+|Use legacy hardcoded receipts/slips | |link:#lsa-data-types[True/False]
+|LSA |
+
+|circ.renew.check_penalty | |link:#lsa-data-types[True/False] |Sitka |
+
+|global.credit.allow | |link:#lsa-data-types[True/False] |Sitka |Not in
+use
+
+|org.opt_out_email_predue | |link:#lsa-data-types[True/False] |Sitka
+|Not in use
+
+|ui.network.progress_meter |Switch off/on a bar indicating network in
+progress |link:#lsa-data-types[True/False] |LSA |
+|=======================================================================
+
+Acceptable formats for each setting type are listed below. Quotation
+marks are never required when updating settings in the staff client.
+
+[width="100%",cols="29%,71%",options="header",]
+|=======================================================================
+|Data type |Formatting
+|True/false |Select value from drop-down menu
+
+|Number |Enter a numerical value (decimals allowed in price settings)
+
+|Duration |Enter a number followed by a space and any of the following
+units: minutes, hours, days, months (30 minutes, 2 days, etc)
+
+|Selection list |Choose from a drop-down list of options (e.g. copy
+status, copy location)
+
+|Text |Free text
+|=======================================================================
+
+[[lsa-noncat]]
+Non-Catalogued Type Editor
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+This is where you configure your non-catalogued types that appear in the
+dropdown menu for non-catalogued circulations.
+
+Select Admin > Local Administration > Non Catalogued Type Editor.
+
+To set up a new non-catalogued type, type the name in the left hand box,
+and choose how many days the item will circulate for. Click Create.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+Select the Circulate In-House box for non-catalogued items that will
+circulate in house. This can be used to manually track computer use, or
+meeting room rentals.
+
+This is what the dropdown menu for non-catalogued circulations in the
+patron checkout screen looks like:
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+[[lsa-statcat]]
+Statistical Categories Editor
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+This is where you configure your statistical categories (stat cats).
+ Stat cats are a way to save and report on additional information that
+doesn’t fit elsewhere in Evergreen's default records. It is possible to
+have stat cats for copies or patrons.
+
+Select Admin > Local Administration > Statistical Categories Editor.
+
+To create a new stat cat, enter the name of the stat cat and select Copy
+or Patron in the dropdown menu. Check the respective On or Off radio
+buttons beside each option. And then click Create new statistical
+category.
+
+* OPAC Visiblity: If On, the stat cat and its value are displayed in
+Copy Details on OPAC.
+* Required: If On, the stat cat becomes mandatory.
+* Archive with Circs: If On, the stat cat and its value are kept in aged
+circulation records.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+To add stat cat values, click Add in the line of the stat cat. Type in
+the value, then click Create new entry button. Confirm on the prompt.
+Repeat these steps if you need add more values.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+Clicking Edit on the above screen allows you to change the stat cat name
+and/or its properties.
+
+*Copy stat cats.*
+
+The image above shows some examples of copy stat cats. You would see
+these when editing items in the Copy Editor, also known as the Edit Item
+Attributes screen. You might use copy stat cats to track books you have
+bought from a specific vendor, or donations.
+
+This is what the copy stat cat looks like in the Copy Editor.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+*Patron stat cats.*
+
+Below are some examples of patron stat cats. Patron stat cats can be
+used to keep track of information like the high school a patron attends,
+or the home library for a consortium patron, e.g. InterLink. You would
+see these in the lower part of registration/edit patron screen.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+There are two more options when creating a patron stat cat: Allow Free
+Text allows staff to type in the values when on patron registration/edit
+screen; Show in Summary displays the stat cat, if there is a value, in
+patron summary.
+
+This is what the patron stat cat looks like in the patron registration
+screen.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+[[lsa-survey]]
+Surveys
+~~~~~~~
+
+This section illustrates how to create a survey, shows where the survey
+responses are saved in the patron record, and explains how to report on
+surveys.
+
+Surveys questions can be optional or required. Surveys come up when a
+patron is first registered and edited subsequently. Required survey
+questions have to be answered whenever the patron record is edited. Some
+examples of survey questions might include: _Would you use the library
+if it were open on a Sunday?_ _Would you like to be contacted by the
+library to learn about new services?_ _Do you attend library programs?_
+
+To find out the survey result you need to run reports on survey
+questions. For example, you could find out how many people say they
+would use the library if it were open on a Sunday, or you could get a
+list of patrons who say they would like to receive marketing material
+from the library. There is a shared template for reporting on patron
+surveys under SITKA_templates > Patrons > Patron Surveys. See
+link:#shared-template[???] for more about shared templates and contact
+Sitka support if you need help tweaking this template.
+
+From the Admin menu, select Local Administration > Surveys.
+
+The Survey List will open. In this example the table is empty because no
+surveys have been created. Click Add New Survey.
+
+surveys interface
+
+Fill out the New Survey form, then click Save Changes.
+
+surveys interface
+
+A few tips when creating a new survey:
+
+* Start Date must always be in the future. It is not possible to add
+questions to a survey after the start date.
+* Dates should be in YYYY-MM-DD format
+* OPAC Survey? and Poll Style? are not yet implemented - leave unchecked
+* Check Is Required if the survey should be mandatory for all patron
+registration and update
+* Check Display in User Summary to make survey answers visible in patron
+records in Other Surveys.
+* Surveys can not only start from a future date.
+
+A summary of your new survey will appear. Type the first survey question
+in the Question field, then click Save Question & Add Answer. Survey
+questions are multiple choice.
+
+surveys interface
+
+Enter possible multiple choice answers and click Add Answer. Each
+question may have as many answers as you like.
+
+surveys interface
+
+Repeat the steps above to add as many questions and answers as you wish.
+When finished click Save, then Go Back to return to the survey list.
+
+surveys interface
+
+Your new survey will appear in the Survey List table. To make further
+changes click the survey name to open the detailed view.
+
+surveys interface
+
+This is what the survey looks like in the patron registration/edit
+screen. Note that in this example this survey question appears in red
+and is required as the Is Required box was checked when creating the
+survey.
+
+surveys interface
+
+To see a patron’s response to a survey, retrieve the patron record.
+Click Other > Surveys to see the response.
+
+surveys interface surveys interface
+
+There is a shared template for reporting on patron surveys in the
+reporting interface, under SITKA_templates > Patrons > Patron Surveys.
+For more information see link:#shared-template[???]. If you need help
+tweaking this template please contact Sitka support.
+
+[[lsa-work-log]]
+Work Log
+~~~~~~~~
+
+Go to Admin > Local Adminstration > Work Log
+
+There are two lists of records. The uppper list contains the recent
+staff actions, while the lower list includes the patrons affected by
+recent staff actions.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+A default number of actions/patrons are displayed. You can increase or
+decrease the number by using the up or down arrow and clicking Refresh
+button.
+
+If you highlight an entry, you can retrieve the item and/or patron
+record by clicking Retrieve Item or Retrieve Patron button.
+
+[[serveradmin]]
+Server Administration
+---------------------
+
+Most options under the Admin > Server Administration menu are global
+Sitka settings that cannot be changed locally. The single exception is
+the Organizational Units submenu, which allows Local System
+Administrators to edit library contact information, hours of operation,
+and addresses.
+
+There is some view-only information that is useful under Server
+Administration, in particular the list of Copy Statuses.
+
+[[serveradmin-org-unit]]
+Organizational Units
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+Anyone with access to the staff client may view these settings but a
+Local System Administrator login is required to make changes.
+
+Go to Admin > Server Administration > Organizational Units.
+
+server administration menu
+
+Find your library from the tree on the left side of the page and click
+it to open settings. Multi-branch library systems will see an entry for
+each branch.
+
+organizational units interface
+
+The Main Settings tab opens displaying settings for your library. Only
+Main Email Address and Main Phone Number should be edited, please leave
+all other settings at their default values.
+
+organizational units, main settings
+
+Click Save to record changes.
+
+________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Note*
+
+The Organizational Units screen flashes green when saving changes to any
+tab (see screencast below, only available in the
+http://coconut.pines.bclibrary.ca:21080/docbook/Sitka/current/html/index.html[online
+version] of the manual). If there is no flash or flash in red, please
+ensure you are using an LSA login and click Save again. Contact Sitka
+Support if you still cannot save the changes.
+________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+[[server-hours]]
+Library Hours of Operation
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
+
+Local System Administrators can use the Organizational Units interface
+to set the library's hours of operation. These are regular weekly hours;
+holiday and other closures are recorded in the link:#lsa-closed[Closed
+Dates Editor].
+
+Hours of operation and closed dates affect due dates and overdue fines.
+
+* *Due dates.*
++
+Due dates that would fall on closed days are automatically pushed
+forward to the next open day. Likewise, if an item is checked out at
+8pm, for example, and would normally be due on a day when the library
+closes before 8pm, Evergreen pushes the due date forward to the next
+open day.
+* *Overdue fines.*
++
+Overdue fines are not charged on days when the library is closed.
+
+To review or edit your library's hours of operation:
+
+Open the Organizational Units interface as described in the steps
+link:#server-main[above].
+
+Click the Hours of Operation tab.
+
+organizational units, main settings
+
+Review your library's weekly hours, editing as necessary. To set a
+closed day click the corresponding Closed button. Closed days (Monday
+and Sunday in the example below) have open and close times of 12:00 AM.
+
+hours of operation interface
+
+Click Save to record any changes
+
+_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Caution*
+
+Operation hours do not contain time zone information. Please do not
+adjust them, even though your library is outside Pacific Time Zone.
+_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+[[server-addresses]]
+Library Addresses
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
+
+Addresses set in Admin (-) > Server Administrations > Organizational
+Units appear in patron email notifications, hold slips, and transit
+slips. Local System Adminstrators should ensure that the Mailing, Holds,
+and Physical addresses are set correctly.
+
+Open the Organizational Units interface as described in the
+link:#server-main[previous section].
+
+Click the Addresses tab.
+
+organizational units, main settings
+
+There are four address tabs: Mailing, Holds, Physical, and ILL. Sitka
+Support recommends setting the first three at a minimum. The Holds
+Address appears on transit slips when items are sent to fulfill holds at
+another branch. The Mailing address is used in notices.
+
+addresses interface
+
+Click Save to record changes for each tab.
+
+____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Caution*
+
+The value in State (Province) field in Mailing address is used to
+generate the URLs to My Account link in email notices. To ensure correct
+URLs, please always use BC for BC libraries or MB for Manitoba
+libraries.
+____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Note*
+
+The Valid checkbox is an optional setting that does not affect current
+Evergreen functions, but the Sitka Support team recommends checking it
+for all correct addresses.
+________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+[[serveradmin-prefix-suffix]]
+Call Number Prefix and Call Number Suffix
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+If you library uses prefixes and/or suffixes in call numbers, you can
+build a standard list, which will be displayed as dropdown lists when
+creating/editing call number record.
+
+This is how it looks on the call number creating/editing screen.call
+number prefix
+
+To create a call number prefix/suffix, go to Admin > Server
+Administration > Call Number Prefix (Suffix)
+
+Click New Prefix (Suffix). Type in the label. Choose your library as the
+Owning Library, and then Save. call number prefix
+
+To delete a prefix/suffix, check the record, and then click Delete
+Selected.
+
+____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Caution*
+
+Call Number Prefix/Suffix created here are different from Label
+Prefix/Suffix created on Copy Location Editor. The former are displayed
+as part of call number in OPAC, while the latter are on printed labels
+only.
+____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+[[serveradmin-copy-statuses]]
+Copy Statuses
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+This table describes the copy statuses in use by Sitka, updated as of
+February 2016.
+
+_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Tip*
+
+If the Sets copy active is set to NO, an item created with this status
+will not have the Active Date field filled. The date will be filled
+later when the item achieves a status with Sets copy active is set to
+YES.
+_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+[width="100%",cols="27%,37%,12%,12%,12%",options="header",]
+|=======================================================================
+|Item Status |Definition |Holdable |OPAC Visible |Sets copy active
+|Available |Item is on the shelf |Yes |Yes |Yes
+
+|Bindery |Sent to be rebound |No |Yes |No
+
+|Cataloguing |Item is being catalogued or in cataloguing department |Yes
+|Yes |Yes
+
+|Checked out |Item is on loan |Yes |Yes |Yes
+
+|Claimed Returned |Patron reports item has been returned. (Libraries
+develop own procedure for deciding when to make an item Claimed Return)
+|No |Yes |Yes
+
+|Cleaning |Item is being cleaned (ie. DVDs and CDs) |Yes |Yes |Yes
+
+|Damaged |Damaged and may not circulate again |No |Yes |Yes
+
+|Discard/Weed |Item is no longer in collection, it has been weeded or
+discarded |No |No |Yes
+
+|ILL |Not currently used in Sitka. |No |No |Yes
+
+|In process |Item is being processed and will soon be available |Yes
+|Yes |No
+
+|In transit |Item is travelling between libraries and remains in the In
+Transit status until checked in |Yes |Yes |Yes
+
+|Long Overdue |Not currently used in Sitka. |No |No |No
+
+|Lost |Declared lost by patron or library (either manually or
+automatically) |No |Yes |Yes
+
+|Lost and Paid |Item was declared lost by patron or staff and has now
+been paid for. |No |Yes |Yes
+
+|Mending |Item is being repaired |Yes |Yes |Yes
+
+|Missing |Item cannot be found |No |Yes |Yes
+
+|On display |Item is on display and is not in its usual shelving
+location |Yes |Yes |Yes
+
+|On holds shelf |Item is awaiting pick-up by patron. Item is usually on
+a "holds shelf" within the library |Yes |Yes |Yes
+
+|On order |Item has been ordered but not yet received from a vendor |Yes
+|Yes |No
+
+|On reservation shelf |Used with room/booking module. When an item has
+been booked/reserved, it is placed in a unique location, ready for
+pick-up |No |Yes |Yes
+
+|Onsite consultation |Item is available for use on-site and possibly
+needs to be requested through staff. This is not intended for normal
+reference materials. |No |Yes |Yes
+
+|Reserves |In reserves collection |No |Yes |Yes
+
+|Reshelving |Item has been returned but not yet shelved. Status
+automatically changes to Available after 24 hours |Yes |Yes |Yes
+
+|Storage |On-site or off-site storage |Yes |Yes |Yes
+
+|Temporarily Unavailable |Not available for patrons to borrow but will
+become available at a later date |No |No |Yes
+|=======================================================================
+
+[[serveramdin-hard-due-date]]
+Hard Due Date
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+One or more hard due date(s) can be set up for a library to force the
+circulation due on selected date(s). The hard due date is used in the
+circulation policy based on patron profile and/or item circulation
+modifier. It may be used to extend or shortern the regular loan
+duration. For example, it may be used to grant faculty members term loan
+by an Always Use? TRUE hard due date, or to force all students to return
+their items by the end of the term by an Always Use? FALSE hard due
+date, which takes effect when the regular due date falls after the hard
+due date. Please contact Sitka Support if you wish to use hard due date.
+
+[[serveramdin-floating-group]]
+Floating Group
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+Evergreen 2.6 supports floating collections. Floating items stay at the
+checkin library, instead of being sent back to the item's original
+circulating library. Floating Groups are used to limit the range of
+libraries that an item can float within. Please contact Sitka Support if
+you wish make all or partial of your items float within selected
+libraries/branches.
+
+[[admin-self-check]]
+Evegreen Self Check Administrative Set-Up
+-----------------------------------------
+
+_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Note*
+
+The information in this section is specific to the native Evergreen Self
+Check which is available to all libraries. For information regarding a
+third party self check please contact the vendor for that third party
+self check.
+_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+[[self-check-setup]]
+Initial Set-Up
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+Library sets up a computer specifically for self check with the
+following:
+
+* a mouse
+* a barcode scanner
+* library security system _(RFID pad, demagnetizing equipment, etc.)_
+* a keyboard
+* a receipt printer
+* Internet Browser
++
+_The self check is known to be compatible with Chrome, Firefox and
+Internet Explorer._
+* a method for locking down access so patrons cannot use the computer
+for other functions
++
+Sitka Support recommends that you consult with your local IT support on
+the best method to lock down your computer.
+
+Library contacts Sitka Support to get a self check interface set up with
+the library's logo and colours.
+
+Sitka Support supplies library with URL for self check and a self check
+specific Local System Administrator account.
+
+Library saves URL as a favourite in browser or as a shortcut on the
+computer's desktop for easy access.
+
+Library sets needed self check library settings. See
+link:#lsa-library-settings-self-check[table_title].
+
+Library teaches patrons to use self check.
+
+For instructions on using the native Evergreen Self Check see
+link:#circ-selfcheck[???].
+
+[[delete-patron]]
+Deleting Inactive Cards and Patron Accounts by Sitka's In-house Patron
+Deletion Tool
+------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+The patron deletion tool developed by the Sitka Support team allows
+Local System Administrators to delete inactive cards and patron
+accounts. This is done outside patron's records and a small batch of
+barcodes/records can be deleted at once. The table below describes a few
+scenarios where this tool may be used.
+
+[cols=",",options="header",]
+|=======================================================================
+|Scenario |Action
+|An active patron lost a card and was issued a new one (using Replace
+Barcode) |link:#delete-patron-card[Delete the lost card] (optional)
+
+|A patron is no longer active and their account should be removed
+completely |link:#delete-patron-account[Delete patron account]
+
+|An active patron has more than one account |Merge the accounts. Choose
+the card number that you want to keep as the lead record. See
+link:#patron-merging[section_title].
+|=======================================================================
+
+[[delete-patron-card]]
+Deleting Inactive Cards
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=VkxNnjHNsLc[*Sitka Snippet Video -
+Delete Lost Cards (2:17)*]
+
+When a patron's card is marked lost and a new barcode is assigned, the
+old barcode remains in the Evergreen database as an inactive card.
+Deleting lost or inactive cards is optional. Patrons cannot check out
+items or log into the OPAC with an inactive card, but the lost cards can
+be used to retrieve active patron data in the staff client. Whether a
+library routinely deletes inactive cards is a matter of local policy.
+
+_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Note*
+
+Staff can only delete cards for patrons whose home library is their
+library or one of their branches.
+
+Staff can edit the patron's account and update the home library in order
+to delete the card.
+_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+To delete inactive cards, start a new tab by File > New Tab or CTRL T.
+Click Delete Patron Account under Admin.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+Login with a Local System Administrator username and password.
+
+screenshot of patron deletion tool
+
+Enter one or more inactive cards to delete (one barcode per line).
+Ensure the Delete cards only box is checked, then click Submit.
+
+screenshot of patron deletion tool
+
+After a few seconds the confirmation screen appears (for multiple cards
+it may take longer). It is not possible to delete a patron's primary
+card. Review patron data, select the card(s) you wish delete, then click
+Delete Checked Cards.
+
+screenshot of patron deletion tool
+
+The deletion report lists successfully deleted cards.
+
+screenshot of patron deletion tool
+
+[[delete-patron-account]]
+Deleting Patron Accounts
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=p7vZ4BB8O4Q[*Sitka Snippet Video -
+Delete Patron Acounts (2:06)*]
+
+Deleted accounts remain in the Evergreen database for reporting purposes
+but are no longer accessible from the staff client. The deletion tool
+checks the following before deleting any account:
+
+* *Open circulations.*
++
+Accounts with items checked out cannot be deleted
+* *Active holds.*
++
+Accounts with active holds cannot be deleted
+* *Bills.*
++
+Accounts with unpaid bills are flagged but may still be deleted; if
+deleted the bills are voided
+
+__________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Note*
+
+If deleting a duplicate record for an active patron please see
+link:#patron-merging[section_title]
+__________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+______________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Note*
+
+Staff can only delete patrons whose home library is their library or one
+of their branches.
+
+Staff can edit the patron's account and update the home library in order
+to delete the patron.
+______________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+To delete patron accounts, start a new tab by File > New Tab or CTRL T.
+Click Delete Patron Account under Admin.
+
+screenshot of staff client
+
+Login with a Local System Administrator username and password.
+
+screenshot of patron deletion tool
+
+Enter one or more accounts to delete, one per line, then click Submit.
+
+screenshot of patron deletion tool
+
+The confirmation screen appears (if deleting multiple accounts this may
+take longer). Accounts that cannot be deleted because of active holds or
+circulations are flagged and the check-boxes greyed out. Accounts with
+outstanding bills are un-checked by default but can be selected to void
+the fines and proceed with deletion. Click Delete Checked Patrons to
+continue.
+
+screenshot of patron deletion tool
+
+The deletion report lists successfully deleted accounts.
+
+screenshot of patron deletion tool
+
+[[notices]]
+Circulation, Hold, and Patron Account Notices
+---------------------------------------------
+
+Patrons with email addresses in Evergreen receive pre-due email
+reminders three days before items are due. Evergreen also generates
+email notices for overdues and holds. Optional customized print overdue
+letters are also available.
+
+Two optional patron account notices are also available
+
+There are three email addresses on the notices besides the recipient’s
+email: __From__, _Reply-To_ and __Errors-To__. The _From_ address has to
+be the BC Libraries Cooperative's email address. The _Reply-To_ and
+_Errors-To_ addresses are from the Sending email addresses for patron
+notices setting in the link:#lsa-library-settings[Library Settings
+Editor]. You must specify a address in this setting. This ensures patron
+replies are directed to the email of your choice. Bounced emails are
+also directed to this email address so staff can alert patrons when
+there is a problem with their email.
+
+Patrons can opt out of receiving overdue and courtesy notice emails in
+My Account under link:#opac-preferences-notification[Notification
+Preferences].
+
+[[notice-pre-dues]]
+Library Pre-due Notices
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+Library pre-due notices are generated and sent via email to patrons
+three days before an item is due. Only patrons with email addresses in
+Evergreen receive pre-due notices.
+
+These emails are not spam and should not be marked as spam by either
+patrons or staff.
+
+The pre-due notice template can be customized at the federation or
+library level. Please contact Sitka Support for customization.
+
+Libraries can opt out of pre-due notices using the
+org.opt_out_email_predue setting in the Library Settings Editor.
+
+____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Caution*
+
+One checkout will receive only one pre-due notice. If the due date is
+extended via Edit Due Date after the pre-due notice is sent out, no new
+notice will be generated. Staff is encouraged to use Renew or Renew with
+Specific Due Date function instead of Edit Due Date to make sure a
+second notice will be generated in the due course.
+____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+[[notices-overdues]]
+Library Overdue Notices
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+There are three types of overdue notices according to the delivery
+method:
+
+* link:#overdue-email[Notices delivered by email]
+* link:#overdue-paper[Notices delivered by paper]
+* link:#overdue-phone[Notices delivered by phone]
+
+The server sends overdue emails to patrons once a day, after hours, when
+the fines generator runs. The emails are generated when an item is 7
+days, and then 14 days overdue (this is a global Sitka setting).
+
+These emails are not spam and should not be marked as spam by either
+patrons or staff.
+
+The overdue email notice templates can be customized at the federation
+or library level. Please contact Sitka Support for customization.
+
+Evergreen generates a PDF file of overdue notices and emails the file to
+you to be printed and distributed to patrons. These notices are created
+and sent daily.
+
+An empty PDF file means that there is no notice for the day due to no
+item filling in the overdue category. You will still receive the empty
+file. If you are not receiving daily PDF files please contact Sitka
+support.
+
+To set up paper overdues you need to provide Sitka support with the
+following information:
+
+* the receiving email address for the PDF file to be sent to.
++
+Ensure you inform Sitka support if you need to change the receiving
+email.
+* the intervals at which you would like patrons to receive notices.
++
+The standard intervals to choose from are 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 or
+10 weeks after the item becomes due. The intervals define when a second,
+third, or fourth, and so on, letter is sent out.
++
+The 1 and 2 weeks overdue notices are sent to patrons without email
+address only. From the 3 weeks overdue notice onwards it is sent to all
+patrons.
++
+____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Note*
+
+A final notice which includes billing information can be set to coincide
+with the system automatically marking long overdue items to lost. See
+link:#notices-final[Final Notices] for information on setting up this
+notice.
+____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+* the wording you would like to be used on each notice.
++
+This wording of the paper notices is customizable by library. PDF
+notices are set up through the Sitka support team and cannot be modified
+in the staff client. Please submit required revisions to Sitka support.
+
+You can set up a link:#recurring-report[recurring report] to generate a
+list of overdues for all patrons, or for those without an email address
+only. Then you can phone each person individually. You may specify an
+email address to receive an email reminder each time a list is
+generated. There are two shared templates for overdue reports in the
+SITKA_templates > Circulation folder. See link:#shared-template[???] for
+more about using shared templates. Sitka support staff will be very
+happy to assist if you need help in this process.
+
+[[notices-final]]
+Final Notices
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+The final paper overdue notice sent to patrons can be set as a billing
+notice which includes processing fees and replacement costs. The price
+is taken from the price entered in the price field of the copy editor
+for the item. If the price field is blank the price is taken from the
+Default Item Price setting in the Library Settings Editor. The
+processing fee comes from the Lost Materials Processing Fee setting
+found in the Library Settings Editor.
+
+Final notices are set up as part of the paper overdues. When setting up
+your paper overdues specify the interval at which you would like the
+final notice to be sent and provide Sitka support with the wording you
+would like to appear on the notice.
+
+Libraries have the option to have Evergreen automatically mark long
+overdue items as lost. Contact Sitka Support if you would like to set
+this up for your library. Please include the interval at which you would
+like long overdue items to be marked as lost. This interval can be set
+to coincide with your final notice so that patrons receive a bill for
+lost items. This does not apply to items that are manually marked lost
+by staff.
+
+[[notices-holds]]
+Hold Slip and Holds Notifications
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+A hold slip is generated when a hold reaches ready-for-pickup status.
+The content of the slip can be from a shared template saved on the
+server (legacy slip) or a receipt template saved in individual
+workstations. Local hold slip template is used when the library setting
+called "Use legacy hardcoded receipts/slips" is set to FALSE.
+
+The ready-for-pickup hold notification templates can be customized at
+the federation or library level. Please contact Sitka Support for
+customization.
+
+When a hold is ready for pickup, the requester can be notified via
+automatic email and/or SMS Text, and/or manual phone call by staff
+depending on the choice made when he/she placed the hold. The selected
+notfication method(s) may be indicated on the hold slip. For example, if
+email notification is selected, the email address will be printed on the
+hold slip. A blank email address indicates that email notification was
+not selected.
+
+1. For automatic email notice and SMS Text, it works the same way as
+the automatic overdue notices. The notification email/SMS Text is
+generated and sent to the patron 5 to 30 minutes after the item achieves
+on-hold-shelf status. In order to receive these notices the patron must
+have chosen these notification methods when placing the hold and the
+email address in his/her account and the given mobile number/carrier
+must be valid.
+2. For phone notification, staff needs to phone patrons individually.
+Phone numbers are printed on the Hold Slips when holds are captured, if
+Phone Notification is chosen.
+
+This notification is optional for individual libraries. The notification
+templates can be customized on library level. Please contact Sitka
+Support if your library wishes to use this service.
+
+An email is sent to the requester when a hold is cancelled by staff on
+the Staff Client. The note put in by staff on cancellation will be
+included in the email explaining the cancellation reason.
+
+This notification is optional for individual libraries. The notification
+templates can be customized on library level. Please contact Sitka
+Support if your library wishes to use this service.
+
+The emails are sent to the requesters when staff view and clear
+hold-shelf expired holds (click _Clear These Holds_ on Browse Holds
+Shelf) on the Staff Client.
+
+[[notices-patronaccount]]
+Patron Account Notices
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+An email will be sent to new patrons the day after their account is
+created welcoming them to the library and confirming that the email
+address in their account is correct.
+
+An email will be sent to patrons 30 days before their account is set to
+expire. This is intended to give users time to renew their account
+before they lose access to library services.
+
+These emails are not spam and should not be marked as spam by either
+patrons or staff.
+
+The two Patron Account notices are optional and libraries must opt in.
+Libraries can choose to opt in to only one or both of these notices. The
+Patron Account notice templates can be customized at the federation or
+library level. Please contact Co-op Support for set up and
+customization.
+
+[[opac-lockdown]]
+Managing Internet OPAC Stations
+-------------------------------
+
+This chapter contains some suggestions on how to manage public access to
+your Internet enabled online catalogue search stations in your library.
+They are meant as guidelines only, and their efficacy in your library
+will depend on many factors. Some possible factors that will affect how
+you manage your search stations are: do you want only Internet browser
+access to your catalogue, or do you want Internet access limited to a
+few sites, or do you want access to other applications such as printing,
+and so on. How you interpret and use these guidelines will be specific
+to your library’s needs. Finally, depending on how your library network
+is configured you may need assistance from a system technician or
+administrator.
+
+There are numerous plugins for Firefox, which could be combined to
+create a kiosk-like effect. Clever patrons can still use CTRL-ALT-DEL
+to cancel the program.
+
+https://addons.mozilla.org/en-US/firefox/addon/1659
+
+If you need to restrict the workstation to specific websites, we
+recommend looking into plugins that advertise "parental controls"
+
+https://addons.mozilla.org/en-US/firefox/addon/4351
+
+Internet Explore is very prone to security problems, however there are
+various ways to get a kiosk in IE:
+
+http://support.microsoft.com/kb/154780
+
+http://technet.microsoft.com/en-us/ie/bb219517.aspx
+
+This is possible, but it requires extensive editing of the registry. If
+you want to lock something specific, and you do not have a system
+technician available, it's possible to search the Internet for advice
+and follow the instructions you find, i.e.: "disable control panel".
+ There are also numerous commercial software packages that do this.
+
+Implementing Linux on your search stations is also an option. There are
+various ways that you could do this. If you use a LiveCD, it still
+could be possible for the patron to eject the CD and reboot the
+computer. A better solution is to install Linux to the hard drive.
+This solution provides the maximum lock-down, but is the most difficult
+to implement. Here are some of the easier ways to get at this solution:
+
+http://webconverger.org/
+
+[[requirements]]
+Evergreen System Requirements
+-----------------------------
+
+Evergreen runs smoothly on most modern computers with a good internet
+connection. To ensure your system is ready for migration here are a few
+tips and minimum requirements.
+
+The Evergreen staff client requires persistent connectivity to the
+Evergreen servers to function. Most internet traffic uses moments of
+brief connectivity rather than a persistent connection so it is not
+unusual when experiencing connectivity issues to notice it in the
+Evergreen staff client first.
+
+Evergreen will work down to a 3Mbps connection, but the performance will
+get progressively worse the lower the connection speed gets. While
+Evergreen will be functionally usable at 3Mbps it may of limited use at
+lower speeds.
+
+.Recommended Internet Connection Speeds
+[width="99%",cols="30%,42%,14%,14%",options="header",]
+|=========================================================
+|Category |Downstream |Upstream |Latency (to Sitka)
+|Bare Minimum To Function |3Mbps |786Kbps |less than 200ms
+|Adequate |6Mbps |1Mbps |less than 125ms
+|Ideal |12Mbps |2Mbpbs |less than 75ms
+|=========================================================
+
+________________________________________________________________________
+*Note*
+
+Mbps stands for megabit per second and can also be represented as Mbits.
+
+Kbps stands for kilobit per second and can also be represented as Kbits.
+
+ms stands for milliseconds.
+________________________________________________________________________
+
+Most of the bandwidth usage in a library is not from Evergreen, but from
+other usage of the Internet by both staff and patrons. When staff
+workstations share an ISP connection with public workstations libraries
+ideally should have at least 1.5-2x more down/upstream capacity than
+what is recommended in the table above.
+
+Staff terminals connect to the central database using the Evergreen
+staff client, available for download from
+https://bc.libraries.coop/support/staff-client-executables/ . The
+Evergreen staff client must be installed on each staff workstation and
+requires at minimum:
+
+* Windows 10, 8, 7, or Vista operating system. Win 10 users may need to
+manage Win 10 privacy settings based on best practice in Windows
+community or on advice of your IT department or vendor.
+* Mac OS X operating system.
+* Linux operating system.
+* a reliable high speed internet connection
+* 512Mb of RAM
+
+There is no stand-alone OPAC client for Evergreen. Patrons search the
+catalogue using a web browser. Each OPAC terminal will require at
+minimum:
+
+* a reliable high speed internet connection
+* a web browser (e.g. Firefox, Chrome or Internet Explorer)
+
+________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Note*
+
+The OPAC will not work in Internet Explorer on computers running Windows
+XP. Co-op Support recommends you update your operating system or use
+Firefox or Chrome.
+________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+To limit your OPAC terminals to catalogue searches local configuration
+will be required. Please see link:#opac-lockdown[???] for more
+information.
+
+Evergreen will work with virtually any barcode scanner – if it worked
+with your legacy system it should work on Evergreen.
+
+Evergreen can use most desktop printers configured for your terminal to
+print receipts, check-out slips, holds lists, etc. The exception is
+spine label printing, which requires roll printers. Evergreen currently
+formats spine labels for output to a label roll printer. If you do not
+have a roll printer manual formatting may be required.
+
+______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Note*
+
+Evergreen might not print correctly to receipt printers using the
+Windows XP _Generic/Text Only_ printer driver. Please use a
+printer-specific driver instead.
+______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+[[profiles]]
+Staff Accounts
+--------------
+
+Staff accounts are special patron accounts on Evergreen which have been
+granted more permissions to allow the owners to log into the Staff
+Client. Besides extra permissions each staff account has its own working
+location. The owner can log into the Staff Client at assigned working
+locations only.
+
+There are three ways staff accounts can be set up and used in the
+system.
+
+*Staff and Patron Accounts*
+
+Accounts are created for staff members and given the appropriate Library
+Staff permission group and working location. Staff use the account for
+borrowing as well as to login into the staff client and perform their
+work.
+
+*Staff Specific Accounts*
+
+Accounts are created for staff members and given the appropriate Library
+Staff permission group and working location. These accounts often have
+something like LOGIN or STAFF as part of the name and may use a barcode
+such as SITKASTAFF rather than an actual barcode. Staff use the accounts
+only for logging into the staff client for work. Staff have a separate
+patron account for borrowing.
+
+*Generic Accounts*
+
+Accounts are created for functions, such as circulation, rather than for
+specific staff members and given the appropriate Library Staff
+permission group and working location. These accounts' barcodes and
+names are often related to their function. For example, an account for
+circulation may use circulation1 as the barcode and be named Dummy,
+Circulation. These accounts are shared by the appropriate staff. Sitka
+Staff strongly encourage libraries to ensure that shared usernames and
+passwords are kept secure and are changed as needed, especially when
+staff leave the library.
+
+Sitka encourages libraries to use the method or methods that work best
+for them.
+
+______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Tip*
+
+Generic accounts will not be granted permissions to create/run reports.
+Libraries are encouraged to have a dedicated account(s) for reporting
+purpose. The account must belong to an individual staff member and is
+for office use only. To avoid re-setting up reports, the owner of the
+account may be updated when the reporting task is passed on to another
+staff member.
+______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+[[profiles-create]]
+Creating Staff Accounts
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=j9fUqY6YWhY[*Sitka Snippet Video -
+Create Staff Accounts (2:36)*]
+
+New staff accounts are created in much the same way as patron accounts,
+using Circulation > Register Patron or +Shift+ +F1+ . Select one of the
+staff profiles from the Profile Group drop-down menu.
+
+User permissions screenshot
+
+Open the patron registration form and fill in the relevant information.
+
+Choose a Library Staff permission group from the Main (Profile)
+Permission Group down down menu.
+
+Save the account.
+
+Retrieve the account through a patron or barcode search.
+
+Assign a link:#profiles-working[Working Location] to the account.
+
+Open the patron registration form and fill in the relevant information.
+
+Choose any Library Staff permission group from the Main (Profile)
+Permission Group down down menu.
+
+Save the account.
+
+Submit a ticket to Sitka Support asking for the account to be granted
+Local System Administrator permissions. Make sure you include the name
+and barcode for the account. If your library is multi-branch include the
+working locations to be assigned to the account.
+
+Sitka Support will grant the permission, assign the working locations
+and respond to your ticket when the account is ready to be used.
+
+[[profiles-working]]
+Working Locations
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+Each new staff account must be assigned a Working Location which
+determines its access level in staff client interfaces. Accounts
+migrated from legacy systems already have working locations assigned.
+
+To assign a working location open the newly created staff account using
+F1 (retrieve patron) or F4 (patron search).
+
+Select Other > User Permission Editor
+
+User permissions screenshot
+
+Place a check in the box next to the desired working location, then
+scroll to the bottom of the display and click Save.
+
+_________________________________________________________________________________
+*Note*
+
+In multi-branch libraries it is possible to assign more than one working
+location
+_________________________________________________________________________________
+
+[[profiles-edit]]
+Editing Staff Accounts
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+Staff accounts can be edited in the staff client by a staff member with
+a higher level of permission. For example, a local system administrator
+can edit all other staff accounts except their own and that of other
+local system administrators. Contact
+https://bc.libraries.coop/request-support/[Co-op Support] to request
+edits to a local system administrator account.
+
+Through link:#opac-account-preferences[My Account] staff can update
+their username, password, and email addresses
+
+Staff can also reset their password using the
+link:#opac-forgot-password[Forgot Your Password?] link for My Account.
+This requires having an email entered in the staff account.
+
+[[profiles-password-reset]]
+Resetting Your Password
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+Staff passwords can be reset in four ways:
+
+1. Edit your account in the staff client while signed in as yourself.
+2. Use the link:#opac-forgot-password[Forgot Your Password?] link in
+the OPAC.
++
+You must have an email recorded in your account for this to method to
+work.
+3. Have a staff member with Local System Administrator permissions
+assign a temporary password and then use method 1 or 2 to reset it to a
+secure password.
++
+This method only works if your account is not a Local System
+Administrator account.
+4. Send in a request to
+https://bc.libraries.coop/request-support/[Co-op Support] to have a
+temporary password assigned and then use method 1 or 2 to reset it to a
+secure password.
+
+[[staff_account_permissions]]
+Staff Account Permissions
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+Below is a general outline of staff account permission levels. To view a
+detailed list of permissions for a particular Evergreen account go to
+Admin (-) > User permission editor in the staff client.
+
+[cols=",,,,,,",options="header",]
+|=======================================================================
+|Action |General Staff |Circulators |Circ + Copy Edit |Circ + Full Cat
+|Catalogers |Local System Administrator (LSA)
+|Basic circulation functions |* |* |* |* |* |*
+
+|CheckIn bad status overrides |* |* |* |* |* |*
+
+|CheckIn Missing/Lost/ClaimedReturned overrides | |* |* |* | |*
+
+|CheckOut overrides | |* |* |* | |*
+
+|MaxRenewalReached override | |* |* |* |* |*
+
+|Basic patron record |* |* |* |* |* |*
+
+|Bar patrons |* |* |* |* | |*
+
+|Unbar patrons | |* |* |* | |*
+
+|Merge/delete patrons | | | | | |*
+
+|Patron restriction overrides | |* |* |* | |*
+
+|Bills and payments |* |* |* |* | |*
+
+|Holds |* |* |* |* |* |*
+
+|Copy/volume records | | |* |* |* |*
+
+|Bib records | | | |* |* |*
+
+|Buckets |* |* |* |* |* |*
+
+|View report output |* |* |* |* |* |*
+
+|Create/upload offline transactions |* |* |* |* |* |*
+
+|Process offline transactions | | | | | |*
+
+|Transit |* |* |* |* |* |*
+
+|Abort remote transit | | |* |* |* |*
+|=======================================================================
+
+____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+*Note*
+
+Only users with reporting permissions (granted by Sitka Support on
+libraries' request) can access the Reports interface, but the output can
+be visible to all staff accounts. Any staff requesting reporting
+permissions must sign and submit the Reporter Privacy Agreement see
+https://bc.libraries.coop/support/sitka/reporter-privacy-waiver/[*Reporter
+Privacy Waiver*]
+____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
+
+[[profiles-grant-permissions]]
+Granting Additional Permissions
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+A Local System Administrator (LSA) may selectively grant LSA permissions
+to other staff accounts. In the example below a _Circ +Full Cat_ account
+is granted permission to process offline transactions, a function which
+otherwise requires an LSA login.
+
+Log in as a Local System Administrator.
+
+Select Admin (-) > User Permission Editor and enter the staff account
+barcode when prompted
+
+User permissions screenshot
+
+*OR*
+
+Retrieve the staff account first, then select Other > User Permission
+Editor
+
+User permissions screenshot
+
+The User Permission Editor will load (this may take a few seconds).
+Greyed-out permissions cannot be edited because they are either a)
+already granted to the account, or b) not available to any staff
+account, including LSAs.
+
+User permissions screenshot
+
+image:../media/1.png[image] List of permission names. For help
+correlating permissions to specific Evergreen functions please contact
+Sitka support.
+
+image:../media/2.png[image] If checked the permission is granted to this
+account.
+
+image:../media/3.png[image] Depth limits application to the staff
+member's library and should be left at the default. Evergreen blocks
+attempts to set Federation- or Sitka-wide privileges.
+
+image:../media/4.png[image] If checked this staff account will be able
+to grant the new privilege to other accounts (not recommended).
+
+To allow processing of offline transactions check the _Applied_ column
+next to OFFLINE_EXECUTE.
+
+User permissions screenshot
+
+Scroll down and click Save to apply the changes.
+
+User permissions screenshot
projects / working / Evergreen.git / commitdiff